CITY OF KENNER OF KENNER WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT NO. 3 GENERATOR BANKING PROFESSIONAL SEALS...

CITY OF KENNERWASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT NO. 3GENERATOR BANKING

PROFESSIONAL SEALS

PROFESSIONAL SEALS

PROJECT NAME: City of KennerWastewater Treatment Plant No. 3Generator Banking

DIVISION 2 SPECIFICATIONS: The following specification Sections were prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision:

Fernandez+Johnson Architecture

Linfield, Hunter & Junius, Inc.

(END OF DIVISION 2)

02231 ................02300 ................

CLEANING AND GRUBBINGEARTHWORK

02452 ................ PILE LOAD TESTS02457 ................ TIMBER PILES


PROFESSIONAL SEALS



03300 ................ CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

(END OF DIVISION 3)


PROFESSIONAL SEALS



13120 ................ PRE-CAST CONCRETE BUILDINGS (SITE BUILT)13343 ................ PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS

(END OF DIVISION 13)


PROFESSIONAL SEALS


IMC Consulting Engineers, Inc.

15000 ................ PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS15050 ................ PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS15450 ................ PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



PROFESSIONAL SEALS

ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS: The following specification Sections were prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision:

IMC Consulting Engineers

16010 .......... ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS16055 .......... POWER SYSTEM STUDY16060 .......... GROUNDING AND BONDING16111 .......... RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS16120 .......... WIRES AND CABLES (UNDER 600-VOLTS)16140 .......... WIRING DEVICES16160 .......... CONTROL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES16190 .......... SUPPORTING DEVICES16195 .......... ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION16231 .......... PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS16232 .......... PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR FUEL PUMPS AND

CONTROLS16410 .......... ENCLOSED SWITCHES16415 .......... TRANSFER SWITCHES16416 .......... PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION EQUIPMENT16430 .......... PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR16440 .......... PANELBOARDS16441 .......... SWITCHBOARDS16460 .......... LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS16491 .......... FUSES16510 .......... LIGHTING16902 .......... ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS


CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

AND

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking

KENNER, LA.

MAYOR E. “Ben” Zahn

COUNCIL

Maria C. DeFrancesch, Councilwoman at Large Division A Thomas “Tom” Willmott, Councilman at Large Division B

Gregory W. Carroll, Councilwoman District 1 Michael G. Sigur, Councilman District 2 Keith M. Reynaud, Councilman District 3

Leonard J. Cline, Councilwoman District 4 Dominick F. Impastato, III , Councilman District 5

CHIEF OF POLICE Michael J. Glaser

IMC Consulting Engineers, Inc. 3120 20th Street

Metairie, LA 70002

Project Number 2282

SEALED BID NO. 17-6407

2

TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ....................................................................................................................... 2 to 5 INVITATION TO BID .......................................................................................................................... 6 to 7 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS ................................................................................... 8 to 9 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ...................................................................................................... 10 to 18 SECTION I. BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS REQUIRED OF ALL BIDDERS BID FORM………………………………………………………………………………………….19 to 21 BID BOND………………………………………………………………………………………………..22 SECTION II. DOCUMENTS REQUIRED OF SUCCESSFUL BIDDER AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................................................................... 23 CORPORATE RESOLUTION (SAMPLE) ............................................................................................... 24 AGREEMENT ................................................................................................................................... 25 to 30 HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT……………………………………………………………………...31 AFFIDAVIT-EMPLOYEMENT STATUS VERIFICATION……………………………………………32 ATTESTATION CLAUSE………………………………………………………………………………..33 PERFORMANCE BOND .................................................................................................................. 34 to 35 LABOR AND MATERIALS (PAYMENT) BOND ......................................................................... 36 to 37 LDEQ REQUIRED DOCUMENTS……………………………………………………………… .. 38 to 71 LABOR PROVISIONS ..................................................................................................................... 72 to 78 DAVIS-BACON WAGE DECISION ............................................................................................... 79 to 85

3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(Continued) SECTION III. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ................................................................................................ 86 to 96 GENERAL CONDITIONS……………………………………………………….………... GC-1 to GC-41 SECTION IV. PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK ................................................................... 01010-1 – 01010-2 SECTION 01015 - CONTROL OF WORK ..................................................................... 01015-1 - 01015-6 SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING .................................. 01050-1 – 01050-4 SECTION 01150 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................. 01150-1 – 01150-8 SECTION 01152 - REQUESTS FOR PAYMENT .......................................................... 01152-1 – 01152-4 SECTION 01153 - CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES ................................................. 01153-1 – 01153-4 SECTION 01200 - PROJECT MEETINGS ..................................................................... 01200-1 – 01200-4 SECTION 01310 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ....................................................... 01310-1 – 01310-8 SECTION 01340 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES……….01340-1 – 01340-4 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................................... 01400-1 – 01400-6 SECTION 01410 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ........................................... 01410-1 – 01410-4 SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS. .. 01500-1 – 01510-6 SECTION 01510 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES ............................................................... 01510-1 – 01510-4 SECTION 01590 - FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS ....................................................... 01590-1 – 01590-4 SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ..................................................... 01600-1 – 01600-4 SECTION 01620 - STORAGE AND PROTECTION...................................................... 01620-1 – 01620-2 SECTION 01650 – STARTUP PROCEDURES .............................................................. 01650-1 – 01650-2

4

TABLE OF CONTENTS

(Continued) SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT ................................................................ 01700-1 – 01700-6 SECTION 01710 - CLEANING ....................................................................................... 01710-1 – 01710-2 DIVISION 2 THRU 16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 – SITE WORK SECTION 02231 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING ....................................................... 02231-1 – 02231-2 SECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK .................................................................................. 02300-1 – 02231-6

SECTION 02452 – PILE LOAD TESTS ......................................................................... 02452-1 – 02452-6 SECTION 02457 – TIMBER PILES ................................................................................ 02457-1 – 02457-6 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ..................................................... 03300-1 – 03300-20 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13120 – PRE-CAST CONCRETE BUILDING (SITE BUILT) .................... 13120-1 – 13120-6 SECTION 13343 – PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS .............................. 13343-1 – 13343-8 DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL SECTION 15000 – PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................ 15000-1 – 15000-10 SECTION 15050 – PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS ......................... 15050-1 – 15050-8 SECTION 15450 – PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .................................... 15450-1 – 15450-14 DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 16010 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS .................................... 16010-1 – 16010-16 SECTION 16055 – POWER SYSTEM STUDY ............................................................ 16055-1 – 16055-12 SECTION 16060 – GROUNDING AND BONDING...................................................... 16060-1 – 16060-8 SECTION 16111 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ........ 16111-1 – 16111-8 SECTION 16120 – WIRES AND CABLES (UNDER 600-VOLTS) .............................. 16120-1 – 16120-8

5

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) SECTION 16140 – WIRING DEVICES .......................................................................... 16140-1 – 16140-4 SECTION 16160 – CONTROL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES ............................... 16160-1 – 16160-4 SECTION 16190 – SUPPORTING DEVICES ................................................................ 16190-1 – 16190-4 SECTION 16195 – ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ................................................. 16195-1 – 16195-6 SECTION 16231 – PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS ........................................ 16231-1 – 16231-18 SECTION 16232 – PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR FUEL PUMPS AND

CONTROLS ..................................................................................... 16232-1 – 16232-6 SECTION 16410 – ENCLOSED SWITCHES ................................................................. 16410-1 – 16410-4 SECTION 16415 – TRANSFER SWITCHES ............................................................... 16415-1 – 16415-10 SECTION 16416 – PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION EQUIPMENT .......... 16416-1 – 16416-6 SECTION 16430 – PARALLELING LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR .................... 16430-1 – 16430-26 SECTION 16440 - PANELBOARDS .............................................................................. 16440-1 – 16440-6 SECTION 16441 - SWITCHBOARDS .......................................................................... 16441-1 – 16440-10 SECTION 16460 – LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ............................................. 16460-1 – 16460-6 SECTION 16491 - FUSES ............................................................................................... 16491-1 – 16491-4 SECTION 16510 - LIGHTING ........................................................................................ 16510-1 – 16510-6 SECTION 16902 – ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS .................................. 16902-1 – 16902-6

6

INVITATION TO BID The City of Kenner will receive sealed bids for the Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking. The work generally consists of the following: Under this project, two (2) new diesel generator sets will be provided, and three (3) existing diesel generator sets will be relocated to a new pile supported slab. Switchgear will be provided on the new slab for paralleling the generator sets, and new feeders will be constructed to provide full standby power to the treatment plant. Sealed Bids will be received by the City of Kenner in the Purchasing Department, 1801 Williams Blvd. Building C, Third Floor, Kenner, Louisiana 70062 until 9:45 a.m. on Monday October 9, 2017. Bids will not be accepted after this time. All interested parties are invited to attend the bid opening on the same day at 10:00 a.m. in the Council Chambers at 1801 Williams Boulevard, Kenner, Louisiana, at which time they will be publicly read. There will be a pre-bid meeting on Wednesday, September 27, 2017 at 2:00 p.m. the Public Works Office located at 1610 Rev. Richard Wilson Drive, Kenner, Louisiana 70062. The pre-bid meeting is not mandatory, but all interested bidders are encouraged to attend. Contractors may obtain and submit bids electronically by visiting www.centralauctionhouse.com. If submitting bid electronically, a bid bond is the only acceptable form of bid security. A cashier’s or certified check will be NOT accepted. Copies of Bidding Documents and Contract Documents for review or for use in preparing bids may be obtained from the Consulting Design Professionals, IMC Consulting Engineers, Inc. located at 3120 20th Street, Metairie, LA 70002 upon deposit of $50.00 for each set of documents. Deposits on the first set of documents furnished to bona fide prime bidders will be retained upon return of the documents in good condition no later than ten days after receipt of bid. Partial sets of documents will not be issued. Any bidder to whom a contract is awarded shall certify that he holds an active license in accordance with LSA-R.S. 37:2150 et. seq. Bidders must write their Louisiana State Contractor’s license number on the outside of the bid envelope prior to bid submission for public works construction projects estimated at $50,000 and above. In the case of an electronic bid proposal, a contractor may submit an authentic digital signature on the electronic bid proposal accompanied by the contractor’s license number in order to meet the requirements of LSA-R.S. 37:2163. Except as otherwise provided herein, if the bid does not contain the contractor’s certification and show the contractor’s license number on the bid envelope, the bid shall be automatically rejected, shall be returned to the bidder marked “REJECTED” and shall not be read aloud.

http://www.centralauctionhouse.com/

7

In accordance with LA R.S. 38:2212 and Louisiana Administrative Code 34:III.Chapter 3 §307, bid submission shall conform to those requirements as stipulated on the Louisiana Uniform Public Work Bid Form. Bidder must submit a bid security in the form of bid bond, cashier’s check, or certified check in the amount of 5% of the contract price in favor of the City of Kenner. If submitting bid electronically, a bid bond is the only acceptable form of bid security. A cashier’s or certified check will be NOT accepted Prior to and upon contract execution, the successful bidder shall provide to the Owner all other documents necessary, including but not limited to performance bond, payment bond and insurance certificate(s), which are necessary for contract execution in accordance with the timetable as stipulated in this Invitation to Bid. Bids will be received on a total bid price basis. If a Contract for the Work is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsive Bidder, who had bid in accordance with the requirements of the Louisiana Uniform Public Work Bid Form, as determined by the Owner's evaluation of the corresponding Bid Form. Determination of the lowest Bidder shall be on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and any Alternates accepted by the Owner, subject to the Owner's and the Design Professional's evaluation of the corresponding Bid Form and the provisions of Louisiana Public Contracts Law. The Work is to commence within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed. Completionof the Work is required within 270 calendar days following the Date of Contract as stated in the Notice to Proceed. The bid prices shall include all such taxes and the costs of all required permits, insurance and bonds, if any. No Bid may be withdrawn within a period of 45 days after the date fixed for opening bids for this project. For just cause, the City of Kenner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids.

CITY OF KENNER

Sealed Bid No. 17-6407 /s/ Theresa L. Nevels Purchasing Director

Advertisement: The Times Picayune City of Kenner Official Journal Publishing Dates: September 13, 20, and 27, 2017

8

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

EXPLANATION OF AFFIRMATIVE ACTION STEPS

It is a Federal requirement that all procurement made with the Federal funds utilize six (6) affirmative action steps to utilize small business enterprises (SBE's), minority business enterprises (MBE's), women's business (WBE's), and small businesses in rural areas (SBRA's) in the areas of construction, services, equipment, and supplies. These six steps are as follows: 1. Include MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's on the solicitation lists; 2. Assure that MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's, once they are identified, are solicited

whenever they are potential sources;

3. When economically feasible, divide total requirements into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's;

4. Where feasible, establish delivery schedules which encourage participation by MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's;

5. Using the services and assistance of the U.S. Department of Commerce's Minority Business Development Agency (MBDA) and the Small Business Administration (SBA); and

6. Requiring the prime contractor to take the affirmative steps outlined here. If the successful bidder does not plan to award subcontracts, these steps should still be taken in procuring equipment and supplies.

Step number five (5) is not mandatory if other sources to identify MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's are utilized. However, the use of these resources is encouraged. There are several outline databases that list qualifying firms, some of which may be identified as disadvantaged business enterprises (DBE) rather than MBE, WBE, SBE, or SBRA firms. One of these databases in the PRO-Net database which can be accessed by typing www.sba.gov to reach the SBA Webpage. The PRO-Net database allows you to conduct a search for firms based on a number of criteria such as locality, SIC codes, bonding capability, etc. This database also allows you to locate firms that have been certified through the 8(a) program which certifies that the company has at least 2 years’ experience, has adequate financing and bonding to perform, and has references from previous jobs. If you do not have Internet access you can contact the New Orleans office of the SBA at (504) 589-2847.

9

The MBDA also maintains a database which can be accessed by typing www.mbda.gov to reach their opportunity database. Information you submit to this database about the job you have for MBE/WBE participation will be compared with information in the Phoenix database of minority companies. When a match is made, the eligible minority companies will receive a copy of your opportunity by email and/or fax and you will receive (via email or fax) a list of the minority companies to which your opportunity has been referred. The phone number for the MBDA is (214) 767-8001. The Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development (DOTD) also has an online list of DBE firms that have been certified by DOTD. Typing www.dotd.state.la.us/cgi-bin/construction.cgi will take you to the site where you can select the most current list of DBE firms. The phone number for DOTD is (225) 379-1382. The successful bidder must provide documentation to demonstrate that the affirmative action steps were pursed. In addition to the use of forms RF-245 and RF 248, documentation might include records of telephone calls, records of utilization of the MBDA and SBA Web sites, and relevant correspondence. Where MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and/or SBRA's are contacted but not utilized, an explanation as to why each one contacted was not utilized should be provided. END OF SECTION

10

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS - LIST OF SUBJECTS

B-1 CROSS REFERENCE TO PRIMARY STATEMENTS B-2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS B-3 LOUISIANA LICENSE REQUIREMENTS B-4 FAMILIARIZATION WITH THE WORK B-4.01. Site Conditions B-5 INTERPRETATIONS B-6 TAXES AND PERMITS B-7 BID SECURITY B-8 RETURN OF BID SECURITY B-9 CONTRACT TIME B-10 SUBCONTRACTORS B-10.01. Suppliers B-11 BIDS B-11.01. Bid Form B-11.02. Bid Pricing B-11.03. Electronic and Manual Submission of Bids B-11.04. Special Requirements for Manual Submission of Bids B-11.05 Modification and Withdrawal of Bids B-11.06. Bids to Remain Open B-12 AWARD OF CONTRACT B-13 EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT B-14 COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS B-15 LOCAL MATERIALS AND FIRMS B-16 WORK SCHEDULING B-17 WORK ON PRIVATE PROPERTY B-18 USE OF POTABLE WATER B-19 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS B-20 SUPPLEMENTARY INSURANCE

11

B-1 CROSS REFERENCE TO PRIMARY STATEMENTS. Definitions, requirements, and limitations affecting the bidding are contained in the various contract documents, and are not necessarily repeated in these instructions. The following is a partial list of applicable provisions and their locations:

Availability of Land General Conditions and Division 1 Bonds and Insurance General and Supplemental Conditions Definitions General and Supplemental Conditions Detailed Description of the Work Division 1 Liquidated Damages Agreement Laws and Regulations General and Supplemental Conditions Retainage Agreement and Supplemental Conditions Subsurface Investigations General and Supplemental Conditions

B-2 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS. Bidders may be required to submit evidence that they have a practical knowledge of the particular Work bid upon, and that they have the financial resources to complete the proposed Work. In determining the Bidder's qualifications, the following factors will be considered: Work previously completed by the Bidder and whether the Bidder (a) maintains a permanent place of business, (b) has adequate plant and equipment to do the Work properly and expeditiously, (c) has the financial resources to meet all obligations incidental to the Work, and (d) has appropriate technical experience. Each Bidder may be required to show that former work has been handled and that no just claims are pending against such work. No Bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged in any work, which would impair the Bidder's ability to perform or financially manage this Work. B-3 LOUISIANA LICENSE REQUIREMENTS. State regulations require that any prospective Bidder on construction contracts of $50,000.00 or greater obtain a Louisiana Contractor's License prior to either acquiring bidding documents or submitting a bid. Each prospective Bidder shall produce evidence that the Bidder possesses the proper Louisiana Contractor's License before the Bidder will be allowed to acquire copies of bidding documents, all in accordance with LSA-R.S.38:2212 (A)(1)(e). Any bidder to whom a contract is awarded shall certify that he holds an active license in accordance with LSA-R.S. 37:2150 et. seq. Bidders must write their Louisiana State Contractor’s license number on the outside of the bid envelope prior to bid submission for public works construction projects estimated at $50,000 and above. In the case of an electronic bid proposal, a contractor may submit an authentic digital signature on the electronic bid proposal accompanied by the contractor’s license number in order to meet the requirements of LSA-R.S. 37:2163. Except as otherwise provided herein, if the bid does not contain the contractor’s certification and show the contractor’s license number on the bid envelope, the bid shall be automatically rejected, shall be returned to the bidder marked “REJECTED” and shall not be read aloud.

12

B-4 FAMILIARIZATION WITH THE WORK. Before submitting a Bid, each prospective Bidder shall become familiar with the Work, the site where the Work is to be performed, local labor conditions and all laws, regulations and other factors affecting performance of the Work. The Bidder shall carefully correlate its observations with requirements of the Contract Documents and otherwise become satisfied with the expense and difficulties attending performance of the Work. The submission of a Bid will constitute a representation of compliance by the Bidder. There will be no subsequent financial adjustment for lack of such familiarization.

B-4.01. Site Conditions. Each Bidder shall visit the site of the Work and become completely informed relative to construction hazards and procedure, the availability of lands, the character and quantity of surface and subsurface materials, utilities to be encountered, the arrangement and condition of existing structures and facilities, the procedure necessary for maintenance or uninterrupted operation of existing facilities, the character of construction equipment and facilities needed for performance of the Work, and facilities for transportation, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. All such factors shall be properly investigated and considered in the preparation of the Bid.

B-5. INTERPRETATIONS. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents shall be submitted to Design Professional in writing. Replies will be issued by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded by Design Professional as having received the bidding documents. Addenda will be issued at least three (3) days (excluding weekends and holidays) prior to the time stated for opening bids. Questions received less than ten (10) working days prior to the date for opening of bids will not be answered. Only answers furnished by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. B-6. TAXES AND PERMITS. Attention is directed to the requirements of the General and Supplementary Conditions regarding payment of taxes and obtaining permits. All taxes that are lawfully assessed against Owner or Contractor in connection with the Work shall be paid by the Contractor. The bid prices shall include all such taxes and the costs of all required permits. B-7. BID SECURITY. The amount of bid security is as stated in the Invitation to Bid. The required security must be in the form of a certified or bank cashier’s check or bid bond. If submitting bid electronically, a bid bond is the only acceptable form of bid security. A cashier’s or certified check will be NOT accepted. If bid bond is used, then it shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the A.M.

13

Best's Key Rating Guide or by an insurance company in good standing licensed to write bid bonds which is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents. The bid security shall be made payable without condition to City of Kenner, Louisiana, the Owner. The bid security may be retained by and shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages if the Bid is accepted and a contract based thereon is awarded and the Bidder should fail to enter into a contract in the form prescribed, with legally responsible sureties, within thirty (30) days after such award is made by Owner. For the bidder’s convenience, a bid bond form has been provided. B-8 RETURN OF BID SECURITY. The bid security of the successful Bidder will be retained until execution of the Agreement and furnishing of the required Contract Security, whereupon checks furnished as bid security will be returned; if the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Contract Security within thirty (30) days of the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the bid security of that Bidder will be forfeited. The bid security of any Bidder whom Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award shall be returned upon execution of Agreement. B-9. CONTRACT TIME. The Contract Time is an essential part of the contract and it will be necessary for each Bidder to satisfy Owner of its ability to complete the Work within the time set forth in this Bid Specification. Provisions for delays, liquidated damages, and extensions of time are set forth in the General and Supplementary Conditions. B-10. SUBCONTRACTORS. Within seven (7) days after Bids are opened, the apparent low Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall submit a list of all Subcontractors expected to be used in the Work. The use of Subcontractors listed by the Bidder and accepted by Owner prior to the Notice of Award will be required in the performance of the Work.

B-10.01. Suppliers. The list of subcontractors shall also include the suppliers and manufacturers of principal items of materials and equipment the Bidder expects to use in the work unless such suppliers or manufacturers are named in the bid.

B-11. BIDS.

B-11.01. Bid Form. A separate copy of the Bid Form is provided for purposes of submitting a bid. Bid Form must be completed in ink or typewritten. Bids by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the appropriate corporate officer. If someone other than a corporate officer signs for the Bidder/Contractor, a copy of a corporate resolution or other signature authorization shall be required for submission of bid. Failure to include a copy of the appropriate signature authorization, if required, may result in the rejection of the bid unless bidder has complied with LSA R.S. 38:2212(A)(1)(c) or R.S. 38:2212(O). When requested by Owner, evidence of the authority of the person signing shall be furnished.

14

A bid price shall be indicated for each lump sum item and/or unit price item listed therein. Bids received without all items completed may be considered non-responsive.

The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers which shall be filled in on the Bid Form. No alterations in Bids, or in the printed forms therefore, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder. If initialed, Owner may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed.

B-11.02. Bid Pricing. The Bidder shall complete the schedule of all unit and lump sum prices included in the Bid Form and shall accept all fixed unit prices listed therein. The total Bid will be determined as the sum of the products of the estimated quantity of each item and the unit price bid. The final Contract Price will be subject to adjustment according to final measured, used, or delivered quantities as provided in Division 1, and the unit prices in the bid will apply to such final quantities except that unit prices will be subject to change by Change Order if quantities vary more than twenty-five percent (25%).

By completing the bid form, vendor is acknowledging any and all insurance requirements attached hereto this bid and has factored such costs into total bid price.

B-11.03. Electronic and Manual Submission of Bids. The Bidder is only required to submit the forms as stated in Section B-11.01 BID FORM. Other documentation required shall be furnished by the low bidder at a later date, in accordance with the timetable in Section B-12 (Award of Contract) and B-13 (Execution of Agreement).

Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery for receipt of bids.

Oral, telephone, or telegraph Bids are invalid and will not receive consideration.

No Bidder may submit more than one Bid. Multiple Bids under different names will not be accepted from one firm or association. All bids are due at the time and date specified in the Invitation to Bid, or the modified time and date indicated by subsequent Addendum.

B-11.04. Special Requirements for Manual Submission of Bids

If bidder is submitting manually, the Bid Form and accompanying data in accordance with section B-11.01 BID FORM shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope or wrapping, addressed to:

City of Kenner Purchasing Department 1801 Williams Blvd.

3rd Floor Bldg. C Kenner, Louisiana 70062

15

and identified on the outside with the Bidder's name and Louisiana Contractor's license number and with the words Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking the notation "BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof.

Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid, or the modified time and date indicated by Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. B-11.05. Modification and Withdrawal of Bid. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a bid must be executed) and delivered at any time prior to the opening of bids. No Bids may be withdrawn after the scheduled closing time for receipt of Bids, nor for at least forty-five (45) days thereafter, except that Bids containing patently obvious mechanical, clerical, or mathematical errors may be withdrawn by the Bidder if clear and convincing sworn, written evidence is furnished to the Owner within 48 hours of the bid opening excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, in accordance with the Louisiana Public Bid Law. Under no circumstances may a Bidder be allowed to raise any prices as contained in the initial Bid. A Bidder who attempts to withdraw a Bid under provisions of this section shall be allowed to resubmit a Bid on the same contract in the event that it is re-advertised.

B-11.06. Bids to Remain Open. All Bids shall remain open for forty-five (45) days after the day of the Bid opening. Owner shall release Bids and return Bid securities as specified in this section under "Return of Bid Security".

B-12. AWARD OF CONTRACT. Owner shall award a contract to the Bidder who, in Owner's judgment, is the lowest responsive, responsible Bidder. Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, and to reject nonconforming, nonresponsive, or conditional Bids. In evaluating Bids, Owner shall consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, alternatives and unit prices if requested in the Bid Form. Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and may reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not pass any such evaluation to Owner's satisfaction. The rejection procedure will be in accordance with the Louisiana Public Bid Law, LSA-R.S. 38:2212 et seq. In the event that a bid is awarded, a formal written notice of intent to award will be given to the lowest responsible bidder who had bid according to the contract, plans, and specifications as advertised. The low bidder’s attestation pursuant to LA R.S. 38:2212.10 (“Affidavit Employment Status Verification”), LA R.S. 38:2227 (“Past Criminal Convictions of Bidders”), and LA R.S. 38:2224 (“Non-Collusion Affidavit”) shall be furnished by low bidder within ten (10) days after the bid opening. All other documentation required to be submitted by low bidder, including, but not limited to, a performance bond, labor and materials payment bond,

16

hold harmless agreement, and insurance certificate(s), shall be furnished to Owner prior to contract execution. Should Contractor receive a notice of disapproval and/or deficiency from Owner or Design Professional regarding any of these documents, Contractor will be given seventy two (72) hours from the date of such notice to correct deficiency. In the event that contractor fails or refuses to furnish the required certificates, bonds, etc., Owner reserves the right to disqualify said Contractor and award the bid to the next lowest responsive bidder who had bid according to the contract, plans, and specifications as advertised. The date on bond forms shall be left blank for filling in by Owner. The certification date on the power of attorney also shall be left blank for filling in by Owner. Owner shall insert the date on bond forms, and power of attorney, and return copies to Design Professional for review and distribution. If the contract is awarded, Owner shall do so within forty-five (45) days of the Bid Opening, unless the successful Bidder has agreed in writing to hold its bid price for a longer period. B-13 EXECUTION OF THE AGREEMENT. No less than seventeen (17) days after award, Design Professional shall furnish to Contractor four (4) copies of the executed Agreement and other Contract Documents bound therewith. The date of contract on the Agreement shall be left blank for filling in by Owner. Owner shall execute the Contract Documents, insert the date of contract on the Agreement, Bonds, and Power of Attorney, and return copies to Design Professional for review and distribution. Contractor shall be responsible for filing one complete copy of the executed Contract Documents with the Recorder of Mortgages in Jefferson Parish, and promptly furnish recordation information to Owner. No payment shall be made until this requirement is fulfilled. B-14 COPIES OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Copies of the drawings and specifications for use in preparing Bids may be obtained from the Design Professional in accordance with the Invitation to Bid. Payment in cash or check, payable to the Design Professional in accordance with the Invitation to Bid, will be required for the documents on the following basis:

One (1) complete set of plans and specifications . . . . . $50.00 Deposits will be refunded in accordance with LSA- R.S. 38:2212 provided the documents do not contain any permanent markings and can be reused for Contract Documents. The Contractor to whom a contract is awarded will be furnished five (5) copies of the specifications and the drawings, together with all Addenda thereto for Contractors use in performing the work. B-15. LOCAL MATERIALS AND FIRMS. By statutory authority, preference is hereby given to materials, supplies, and provisions produced, manufactured or grown in Louisiana, quality

17

being equal to articles offered by competitors outside of the State (LSA R.S. 38:2251), and preference is hereby given to firms doing business in the State of Louisiana (LSA R.S. 38:2253). Please refer to Supplementary Conditions, Paragraph SC-16. B-16. WORK SCHEDULING. Because of the nature of this contract, it may be necessary for the Contractor to respond to emergencies immediately upon notification. B-17. WORK ADJACENT TO PRIVATE PROPERTY. The Contractor shall be aware that work may be performed adjacent to private property. The Contractor shall notify, prior to the start of work in the area, all property owners adjacent to and along the route of construction by means of either a printed circular or form letter giving the general details of the work. The letter shall also include names and telephone numbers for key project personnel of the Contractor so that property owners may report problems. These contact telephone numbers shall be given so that appropriate personnel may be contacted 24 hours a day, seven days a week. B-18. USE OF POTABLE WATER. If the Contractor intends to use water from the Parish water system, Contractor shall first obtain a water meter from the Jefferson Parish Department of Water. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs incurred with water usage. B-19. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. Upon contract execution, the successful Bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond guaranteeing faithful performance. The successful Bidder will also be required a Labor and Materials Payment Bond guaranteeing the payment of all bills and obligations arising from the performance of the contract. The amount of these bonds shall be the total contract amount. These bonds shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide or by an insurance company in good standing licensed to write bid bonds which is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents. B-20 SUPPLEMENTARY INSURANCE. The successful Bidder will be required to furnish insurance that meets the requirements set out in the General and Supplemental Conditions. A number of the insurance requirements are contingent on certain categories of risk being present on the Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking. While the nature of the insurable risk on the project may change, an initial assessment of the project shows that the contingent insurances below will be required for this project. a) Builder's Risk Insurance as detailed in SC-2.07 (Recommended). b) Contractor’s Pollution (Owner's Protective Liability) as detailed in SC-2.05 (Recommended).

18

c) Automobile Coverage including the Transpiration of Pollutants as detailed in SC-2.02(e) (Recommended) d) Lift Risk Liability as detailed in SC-2.03(f) (Recommended). e) Maritime Liability (Not Currently Required) f) Umbrella Liability Policy as detailed in SC-2.04 ($5 Million recommended). Note to Vendor: Factor all costs associated with insurance requirements and bonds, if applicable, into final bid price.

END OF SECTION

19

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM TO: City of Kenner Purchasing Department BID FOR: City of Kenner 1801 Williams Blvd., Bldg. C, 3rd Floor Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3

Kenner, Louisiana 70062 Generator Banking

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by: IMC Consulting Engineers, Inc. and dated: _May 26, 2017_. Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: (Enter the number the Designer has

assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging) _______________________________________ TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base Bid” * but not alternates) the sum of: Dollars ($ ) ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices designated as alternates in the unit price description. Alternate No. 1 Fuel Storage and Distribution System for the lump sum of: Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 2 Portable Generator Connection Boxes for the lump sum of: Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 3 Generator Pad Site Lighting for the lump sum of: Dollars ($ ) NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER **:

DATE:

* The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included with the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed. ** If someone other than a corporate officer signs for the Bidder/Contractor, a copy of a corporate resolution or other signature authorization shall be required for submission of bid. Failure to include a copy of the appropriate signature authorization, if required, may result in the rejection of the bid unless bidder has complied with La. R.S. 38:2212(A)(1)(c) or RS 38:2212(O) . BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check as prescribed by LA RS 38:2218.A is attached to and made a part of this bid.

20

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM

TO: City of Kenner Purchasing Department BID FOR: City of Kenner 1801 Williams Blvd., Bldg. C, 3rd Floor

Kenner, Louisiana 70062

UNIT PRICES: This form shall be used for any and all work required by the Bidding Documents and described as unit prices. Amounts shall be stated in figures and only in figures.

DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

REF. NO. QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity times Unit Price)

1 1 LS

DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # SITE WORK REF. NO. QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity times Unit Price)

2 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # PILE DRIVING


3 1 LS

DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # ____ CONCRETE REF. NO. QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity times Unit Price)

4 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # __ STEEL


5 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS


6 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # PRE-CAST CONCRETE BUILDING (SITE BUILT)


7 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # EARTH MOVEMENT FOR ELECTRICAL


8 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # ____ ENCASEMENT AND ENCLOSURES FOR UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL


9 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # ____ ELECTRICAL MATERIALS, METHODS, DEVICES, AND FIXTURES


10 1 LS

21

LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM TO: City of Kenner Purchasing Department BID FOR: City of Kenner 1801 Williams Blvd., Bldg. C, 3rd Floor

Kenner, Louisiana 70062

UNIT PRICES: This form shall be used for any and all work required by the Bidding Documents and described as unit prices. Amounts shall be stated in figures and only in figures.

DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # ____ ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT REF. NO. QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity times Unit Price)

11 1 LS

DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # ____ GENERATOR PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS


12 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # GENERATORS


13 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # ____ REMOVAL OF UNFORESEEN STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS, NOT TO EXCEED


14 1 LS $30,000.00 $30,000.00 DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # __1__ FUEL STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM


15 1 LS

DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # __2__ PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTIONS REF. NO. QUANTITY: UNIT OF MEASURE: UNIT PRICE UNIT PRICE EXTENSION (Quantity times Unit Price)

16 1 LS DESCRIPTION: BASE BID OR ALT. # __3__ GENERATOR PAD WORK LIGHTING


17 1 LS

22

BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that we, the undersigned,_____________________ as PRINCIPAL, and as SURETY, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Kenner, State of Louisiana, acting herein by and through the City Council, the governing authority for said City, hereinafter called the "OWNER", in the penal sum of: DOLLARS ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying Bid dated the day of ___________, 20___ for City of Kenner Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking. NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall not withdraw said Bid within the period specified herein after the opening of the same or, if no period be specified, within sixty (60) days after the said opening, and shall within the period specified therefore or, if no period be specified, within twelve (12) days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written Contract with the OWNER in accordance with the Bid as accepted, and give bond with good sufficient surety and sureties, as may be required, for the faithful performance and proper fulfillment of such Contact; or in the event of the withdrawal of said Bid within the period specified, or the failure to enter into such Contract and give such bond within the time specified, if the Principal shall pay the OWNER the difference between the amount specified in said bid and the amount for which the OWNER may procure the required work or supplies, or both, if the latter be in excess of the former, then the above obligation shall be void and of no effect, otherwise, to remain in full force and virtue.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounded parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this day of___________, 20___, and these presents signed by its undersigned representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.

WITNESSES: BY: _______________________________ _____________________ (Principal) _______________________________ _____________________ TITLE: _______________________________ _____________________ _______________________________ (Surety) _____________________ BY: ______________________________ (Attorney-in-fact) ______________________________ (Address)

23

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF LOUISIANA PARISH OF JEFFERSON

BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, personally came and appeared, _________________________________________________________________________________ (Name) who after being by me duly sworn and deposed said that he is the fully authorized ______________ (Title) of ______________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as bidder), the party who (Name of Bidder)

submitted a bid for City of Kenner Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking was received by City of Kenner on Monday October 9, 2017 and said affiant further said: (1) The bidder employed no person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization, either

directly or indirectly, to secure the public contract under which he received payment, other than persons regularly employed by the bidder whose services in connection with the construction of the public building or project or in securing the public contract were in the regular course of their duties for bidder, and

(2) That no part of the contract price received by bidder was paid or will be paid to any person,

corporation, firm, association, or other organization for soliciting the contract, other than the payment of their normal compensation to persons regularly employed by the bidder whose services in connection with the construction of the public building or project were in the regular course of their duties for bidder.

(3) Said bid is genuine and the bidder has not colluded, conspired, or agreed, directly or indirectly,

with any other bidder to offer a sham or collusive bid. (4) Said bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, agreed with any other person to fix

the bid price of affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to induce any other person to refrain from bidding.

(5) Said bid is not intended to secure an unfair advantage of benefit from the Parish of Jefferson or

in favor of any person interested in the proposed contract. (6) All statements contained in said bid are true and correct. (7) Neither affiant nor any member of his company has divulged information regarding said bid or

any data relative thereto any other person, firm, or corporation. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME THIS DAY OF ______________________________ 20__. (Authorized Signature) NOTARY PUBLIC

___________________________

24

CORPORATE RESOLUTION

EXCERPT FROM MINUTES OF MEETING OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF ___________________________________________________________

AT THE MEETING OF DIRECTORS OF , DULY NOTICED AND HELD ON , , A QUORUM BEING THERE PRESENT, ON MOTION DULY MADE AND SECONDED, IT WAS RESOLVED THAT ________________________, BE AND IS HEREBY APPOINTED, CONSTITUTED AND DESIGNATED AS AGENT AND ATTORNEY-IN-FACT OF THE CORPORATION WITH FULL POWER AND AUTHORITY TO ACT ON BEHALF OF THIS CORPORATION IN ALL NEGOTIATIONS, BIDDING, CONCERNS AND TRANSACTIONS WITH THE CITY OF KENNER OR ANY OF ITS AGENCIES, DEPARTMENTS, EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE EXECUTION OF ALL BIDS, PAPERS, DOCUMENTS, AFFIDAVITS, BONDS, SURETIES, CONTRACTS AND ACTS AND TO RECEIVE AND RECEIPT THEREFOR ALL PURCHASE ORDERS AND NOTICES ISSUED PURSUANT TO THE PROVISIONS OF ANY SUCH BID OR CONTRACT, THIS CORPORATION HEREBY RATIFYING, APPROVING, CONFIRMING AND ACCEPTING EACH AND EVERY SUCH ACT PERFORMED BY SAID AGENT AND ATTORNEY-IN-FACT.

I HEREBY CERTIFY THE FOREGOING TO BE A TRUE AND CORRECT COPY OF AN EXCERPT OF THE MINUTES OF THE ABOVE DATED MEETING OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTORS OF SAID CORPORATION, AND THE SAME HAS NOT BEEN REVOKED OR RESCINDED.

____________________________________________________ SECRETARY ____________________________________________________ DATE

25

AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made the day of ______, 20__, by and between, City of Kenner, Jefferson Parish, Louisiana, referred to in these Contract Documents as "Owner" acting through its Mayor, and _______________________________________referred to in these Contract Documents as "Contractor": WITNESSETH: THAT WHEREAS: in accordance with law, Owner has caused Contract Documents to be prepared and an Invitation to Bid to be published, for and in connection with City of Kenner Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking. WHEREAS, Contractor, in response to the Invitation to Bid, has submitted to Owner, in the manner and at the time specified, a sealed Bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders; and WHEREAS, Owner, in the manner prescribed by law, has publicly opened, examined, and canvassed the Bids submitted, and has determined Contractor to be the lowest and best Bidder for the Work and duly awarded to Contractor a contract therefore, for the sum or sums named in Contractor's Bid. NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the compensation to be paid to Contractor and of the mutual agreements herein contained, the parties to these presents have agreed and hereby agree, Owner for itself and its successors, and Contractor for itself, himself, or themselves, and its, his, or their successors and assigns, and its, his, or their executors and administrators, as follows: ARTICLE I. All notices, letters, and other communication directed to Owner shall be delivered or addressed and mailed, postage prepaid to:

City of Kenner Public Works 1801 Williams Blvd. Kenner, Louisiana 70062

The business address of Contractor given in the Bid Form and Contractor's office in the vicinity of the Work are both hereby designated as the places to which all notices, letters, and other communication to Contractor will be mailed or delivered. Contractor may change his address at any time by written notification to Owner. ARTICLE II. The Contractor shall perform all Work, including the assumption of all obligations, duties and responsibilities necessary to the successful completion of the contract and the furnishing of all materials and equipment required to be incorporated in and form a permanent part of the Work; tools, equipment, supplies, transportation, facilities, labor, superintendence and services required to perform the Work; and Bond, insurance and submittals; all as indicated or specified in the Contract Documents to be performed or furnished by Contractor for the Work included in and covered by Owner's official award of this contract to Contractor, such award being based on the acceptance by Owner of Contractor's Bid.

26

ARTICLE III. That owner shall pay to Contractor for performance of the Work embraced in this contract, and Contractor shall accept as full compensation therefore, the sum (subject to adjustment as provided in the Contract Documents) of ________________________________________________________________________dollars ($ _________________) for all Work covered by and included in the contract award and designated in the foregoing Article I; payment thereof to be made in current funds in the manner provided in the Contract Documents. ARTICLE IV. That Contractor shall complete all Work within 270 calendar days, after the commencement of Contract Time (as defined in General Conditions). ARTICLE V. Time is an essential condition of the contract. Should Contractor fail to perform the Work within the Contract Time stipulated herein, Contractor shall pay to Owner, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty, 0.1% of the contract amount including change orders per calendar day of default, or $500.00 per day, whichever is greater, unless the Contract Time is extended by Owner. After ENGINEER and OWNER conduct a Final Inspection of the Work, a Punch List of outstanding items to be completed, if any, will be issued to the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall have thirty (30) calendar days to complete any outstanding items of Work remaining to be completed or corrected as detailed as a result of the Final inspection. If upon expiration of said thirty (30) calendar days the aforementioned outstanding items of Work have not been completed, liquidated damages in the amount of 0.1% of the contract amount including change orders per day will be reinstated for every day in which the outstanding items of Work have not been completed. In case of joint responsibility for delay in the final completion of the Work, where two or more separate contracts are in force at the same time and cover related work at the same location, liquidated damages assessed against any one Contractor will be based upon the individual responsibility of that Contractor for the delay as determined by, and in the judgment of, Design Professional. The expiration of the Contract Time shall ipso facto constitute a putting in default where Contractor has failed to perform the Work, and Owner need not formally place the Contractor in default. Contractor hereby waives any and all notices of default. ARTICLE VI. Pursuant to LSA-R.S. 38:2248 (Public Contract Law), Owner shall retain the following percentages of each progress payment until payment is due under the terms and conditions governing substantial completion or final payment.

CONTRACT AMOUNT RETAINAGE $0-$499,999.99 10% $500,000 or greater 5%

ARTICLE VII. That the Contract Documents which comprise the contract between Owner and Contractor, attached hereto and made a part of the documents listed in Table of Contents, and the documents identified below.

27

Addenda numbers: Information submitted by Contractor prior to the time Owner issues Notice of Award including the following:

Notice to Proceed. Any Modifications (as defined in General Conditions) duly delivered after execution of this Agreement. The Contract Drawings consist of 32 sheets. Sheet titles are listed on sheet 1 of the Drawings. In addition, each sheet bears the following general title: City of Kenner Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking. Any Notice of Partial Utilization. Notices of Final Completion and Acceptance. ARTICLE VIII. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Agreement, and to the extent of their applicability to the work, Contractor makes the following representations, 1. Contractor has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, locality, and with all local conditions and federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress of performance of the Work. 2. Contractor has studied carefully all reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which were relied upon by Design Professional in the preparation of the Drawings and Specifications and which have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions. 3. Contractor has made or caused to be made examinations, investigations and tests and studies of such reports and related data in addition to those referred to in paragraph 2 as he deems necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, tests, reports, or similar data are or will be required by Contractor for such purposes. 4. Contractor has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, tests, reports, and data with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 5. Contractor has given Design Professional written notice of all conflicts, errors, or

discrepancies that he has discovered in the Contract Documents and the written resolution thereof by Design Professional is acceptable to Contractor.

ARTICLE IX. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE: 40 CFR PART 8. During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows:

28

(1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not limited to, the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this equal opportunity clause.

(2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin.

(3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which

he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract, or understanding, a notice to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or worker's representative of the contractor's commitments under this equal opportunity clause, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment.

(4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of

September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor.

(5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order

No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders.

(6) In the event of the contractors noncompliance with the equal opportunity clause of

this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended, in whole or in part, and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law.

(7) The contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding

paragraph (1) and the provisions of paragraph (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24,

29

1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of each direction by the contracting agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.

ARTICLE X. HISTORICAL PRESERVATION CLAUSE: 36 CFR PART 800 The contractor agrees that, should evidence of historical or archeological sites be discovered during construction, all work in the area will cease immediately and the owner will be informed of the discovery. The owner will, in turn, promptly notify the Municipal Facilities Division of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ). After consulting with the appropriate State and Federal agencies, the DEQ will advise the owner of any protective measures that may be required. ARTICLE XI. ENDANGERED SPECIES CLAUSE: ENDANGERED SPECIES ACT OF

1973, AS AMENDED The contractor agrees that, should plants or animals belonging to either endangered or threatened species be discovered in the area of construction or adjacent areas, all work in the area will cease immediately, and the owner will be informed of the discovery. The owner will, in turn, promptly notify the Municipal Division of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ). After consulting with the appropriate State and Federal agencies, the DEQ will advise the owner of any protective measures that may be required. ARTICLE XII. PRESIDENTIAL EXECUTIVE ORDERS The contractor is required to comply with the following Presidential Executive Orders:

(1) 11625, 12138, and 12434 - Women's and Minority Business Enterprise; (2) 12549 - Debarment and Suspension (3) 11246 - Equal Employment Opportunity.

30

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the date first hereinabove written.

WITNESSES: _________________________ By:

_________________________ Title: ______________________

__ CITY OF KENNER __ By: _______________________

Title: Mayor Approved As to Form –City Attorney’s Office:

_____________________

31

HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT

If _____________________________________________ (hereafter “CONTRACTOR”) is the successful bidder for City of Kenner Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking, then, to the fullest extent permitted by law, CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and hold harmless the City of Kenner, including its elected and appointed officials, employees, servants, volunteers, and agents, specifically the firm of IMC Consulting Engineers, Inc. (collectively, “OWNER”) from against any and all claims, demands, suits, costs, liabilities or judgments for sums of money, and fines or penalties asserted by any party, firm or organization for loss of life or injury or damages to person or property, growing out of, resulting from, or by reason of any negligent acts, errors, and/or omissions, by CONTRACTOR, its agents, servants or employees, while engaged upon or in connection with the work required to be performed by CONTRACTOR.

Further, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to indemnify OWNER for all reasonable

expenses and attorneys’ fees incurred by or imposed upon OWNER in connection therewith for any loss, damage, injury or other casualty pursuant to this section. CONTRACTOR further agrees to pay all reasonable expenses and attorneys’ fees incurred by OWNER in establishing the right to indemnity pursuant to the provision of this Agreement.

The above indemnification shall not apply to those claims, demands, and/or causes of

action arising out of the negligence of OWNER. Accepted By: ________________________________________________ Company Name: ______________________________________________ Signature: ___________________________________________________ Title: _______________________________________________________ Date Accepted: ______________________________________________

32

AFFIDAVIT Employment Status Verification

STATE OF LOUISIANA PARISH OF JEFFERSON

BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, personally came and appeared,

_____________________________, who after being duly sworn, deposed and said that he/she is

the fully authorized ________________________ of ___________________________________

(hereinafter referred to as bidder), the party who submitted a bid for______________________,

Bid Number ______________________ and said bidder further said:

(1) That bidder is registered and participates in a status verification system to verify that all employees in the State of Louisiana are legal citizens of the United States or are legal aliens. (2) That bidder shall continue, during the term of the contract, to utilize a status verification system to verify the legal status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana. (3) That bidder shall require all subcontractors to submit to the bidder a sworn affidavit verifying compliance with statements (1) and (2). _______________________________________ Signature of Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME ON THIS ________ DAY OF ________________, 20____. _______________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC

33

____________________________________________________________________________________

NAME OF PROJECT

_________________________________ ____________________________________ PROJECT NUMBER DATE OF BID

ATTESTATION CLAUSE REQUIRED BY LA. R.S. 38:2227 (PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS OF BIDDERS)

Appearer, as a Bidder on the above-entitled Public Works Project, does hereby attest that:

A. No sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, Or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity Name below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to Any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes: (a) Public bribery (R.S. 14:118) (c) Extortion (R.S. 14:66) (b) Corrupt influencing (R.S. 14:120) (d) Money Laundering (R.S. 14:23)

B. Within the past five years from the project bid date, no sole proprietor or individual partner,

incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a pleas of guilty or nolo contendre to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes, during the solicitation or execution of a contract or bid awarded pursuant to the provision of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes:

(a) Theft (R.S. 14:67) (f) Bank fraud (R.S. 14:71.1) (b) Identity Theft (R. S. 14:67.16) (g) Forgery (R. S. 14:72) (c) Theft of a business record (h) Contractors; misapplication of

(R. S. 14:67.20) payments (R.S. 14:202) (d) False accounting (R.S. 14:70) (i) Malfeasance in office (R. S. 14:134) (e) Issuing worthless checks (R. S. 14:71) __________________________________ _______________________________________ NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

__________________________________ _______________________________________ DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

____________________________________________ SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED

SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

34

FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, ____________________________________________________________________, (Name of Contractor) a , hereinafter called Principal, and , hereinafter called the "Surety", (Name of Surety) are held and firmly bound unto the City of Kenner, Louisiana, hereinafter called "Owner", in the penal sum of___________________________________________________________________ Dollars ($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that Whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the Owner, dated the day of , 20__, a copy of which is hereto attached and made apart hereof for the construction of:

City of Kenner Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall well, truly and faithfully perform its duties, all the undertakings, covenants terms, conditions, and agreements of said contract during the original term thereof, and any extensions thereof which may be granted by the Owner, with or without notice to the Surety, and if he shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred under such contract, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any default in connection with the construction of such work, and all insurance premiums on said work, whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.

35

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of , 20__. WITNESSES: By: ____________________________________

(Principal)

Title: ______________________________________

______________________________________ (Surety) By: __________________________________ (Attorney-in fact) __________________________________

(Address)

NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract. If Contractor is Partnership, all partners should execute bond.

36

LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that __________________________________, a _________________________________________ (Name of Contractor -see Note 1) (Entity - see Note 2) ______________________________________________________________________________ (Address of Contractor) hereinafter called Principal, and: _____________________________________________________________________________ (Name of Surety - see Note 3) _____________________________________________________________________________ (Address of Surety) hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Kenner, State of Louisiana, acting herein by and through the Kenner City Council, the Governing Authority for said City, hereinafter called Owner, in the penal sum of ___________________________________dollars ($_______________________) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the Owner, dated the day of ,20__, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of:

City of Kenner 10th Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 Generator Banking

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly pay all persons, firms, subcontractors, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the work provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such work, and all insurance premiums on said work, and for all labor, performed in such work whether by subcontractor or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the Owner and the Contractor shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of 20__.

P&S 11/15/16 Page 37

WITNESSES: ______________________________________ (Principal) BY:___________________________________

WITNESSES: ______________________________________ (Surety) BY: _________________________________

(Attorney-in-fact)

NOTE: Date of Bond must not be prior to date of Contract.

1. Correct name of Contractor 2. A Corporation, A partnership, or an Individual 3. Correct Name of Surety

P&S 11/15/16 Page 38

Guidance for preparing Plans and Specifications

for Clean Water State Revolving Fund Projects

The Clean Water State Revolving Fund (CWSRF) program is a state program that is receiving Federal assistance. CWSRF projects will have to meet the following Federal requirements: 1. Cost and Effectiveness analysis.

2. Presidential Executive Orders 11625, 12138, and 12432, Women's and Minority Business Enterprise.

3. Presidential Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension.

4. Presidential Executive Order 11246, Equal Employment Opportunity.

5. Davis-Bacon and Related Acts.

6. Use of American iron and steel.

The following form shall be signed by the Loan Recipient or Consulting Engineer and submitted with the final set of Plans and Specifications and is required prior to LDEQ approval. 1. RF-602 Cost & Effectiveness Certification (signed by Loan Recipient or Consulting Engineer and

submitted with final plans and specifications) The following forms shall be included in the bid documents. 2. RF-200 Prospective Prime Contractor's (Bidder) Statement About Six Good Faith Efforts

3. EPA 5700-49 Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters

4. EPA 6100-2 Subcontractor Participation Form

5. EPA 6100-3 Subcontractor Performance Form

6. EPA 6100-4 Subcontractor Utilization Form

7. RF-373 MBE/WBE Certification (signed by Loan Recipient)

The above forms must be completed and signed by the successful bidder except for form RF-373. The RF-373 must be signed by the authorized representative of the loan recipient. It is a good idea to include the remaining forms in the special/supplementary conditions with instructions clarifying that the successful bidder will be required to complete and sign all forms except RF-373. It is a Federal requirement that all procurement made with Federal funds utilize six Good Faith Efforts to utilize disadvantaged business enterprises (DBE's) in the areas of construction, services, equipment, and supplies. In order to advise prospective bidders of these requirements, the attached EXPLANATION OF GOOD FAITH EFFORTS must be included verbatim in the information/instruction for bidders section of the contract documents. The documentation requested from the successful bidder should be included with the bid document package submitted to DEQ. It is a requirement of the CWSRF Loan Program that surety companies providing bonding to contractors be included in the most current version of the U.S. Treasury Department's listing of approved sureties, Circular 570. The latest version of this circular can be found on the Internet at https://www.fiscal.treasury.gov/fsreports/ref/suretyBnd/c570_a-z.htm.

https://www.fiscal.treasury.gov/fsreports/ref/suretyBnd/c570_a-z.htm

P&S 11/15/16 Page 39

Surety companies that are utilized also must be currently licensed to do business in the state of Louisiana. These requirements should be noted in the section of the contract documents that discusses bonding requirements. The attached REQUIRED CLAUSES FOR CONTRACT DOCUMENTS must be included verbatim in the contract documents (special/supplementary conditions) to satisfy these laws. Some portions of the project that do not meet Federal eligibility requirements may not be funded through the CWSRF. If any portions of the project are not eligible, these should be listed separately and identified as ineligible in the bid proposal.

40

The DEQ Project Engineer will review the plans and specifications to ensure the following: 1. That the CWSRF Program requirements discussed above have been met. 2. That adequate information is given to bid and construct the project. 3. That the design is in accordance with the approved Preliminary Engineering Report (if applicable). 4. That the facilities are properly designed according to accepted design criteria and will be capable of

handling the expected hydraulic and organic loadings and (for treatment works) of meeting the expected effluent limits.

The design engineer must take into account the need for reliability in the operation of any treatment works that he or she designs. An important aspect of reliability is the need for multiple units and back up units for the major unit operations in a treatment work. Please refer to our Guidance on Component Reliability Criteria for State Revolving Fund Loan Projects. In order to enable the DEQ Project Engineer to adequately review the design of treatment works and collection/transportation systems, it is requested that the consulting engineer submit a design summary with the plans and specifications. The design summary should contain the relevant data, design criteria, assumptions, methods, and sample calculations used to design the major components of treatment and/or collection/transportation facilities. Normally, a design summary is not required for a sewer rehabilitation project. The CWSRF staff does review bid documents and will issue a letter to the recipient authorizing a contract award, so bidding schedules should be planned to allow time for this activity. We do not plan to take an active role in the resolution of any bid protests, except insofar as any Federal requirements of the CWSRF program may be involved. The CWSRF program does allow loans to include reimbursement for work already performed. It is allowable for the recipient to receive bids and to award construction contracts before the loan agreement is signed, however, no payments can be made until after the loan agreement is signed and there may be some limitations on making large payments immediately after the loan agreement is signed. Recipients may also proceed to construction prior to approval of facilities plans, plans and specifications, addenda, and bid documents; however; the recipient must accept the risk of loss of financial assistance for any elements of the project that are not approvable. Reimbursements for construction contracts already bid cannot be made unless the provisions specified in this guidance were included in the contract documents that were bid. While we strongly discourage recipients from taking any action based on documents that have not been approved, we recognize that some recipients may have compliance schedules that do not allow time for the normal review and approval process. We will attempt to assist these recipients as much as possible but we cannot guarantee that financial assistance will be available until all program requirements have been met.

41

REQUIRED CLAUSES FOR CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

I. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE: 40 CFR PART 8. During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of this equal opportunity clause. (2) The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. (3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract, or understanding, a notice to be provided by the agency contracting officer, advising the labor union or worker's representative of the contractor's commitments under this equal opportunity clause, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and. orders. (6) In the event of the contractors noncompliance with the equal opportunity clause of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended, in whole or in. part, and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (7) The contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order No. 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the contracting agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the contracting agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. II. HISTORICAL PRESERVATION CLAUSE: 36 CFR PART 800. The contractor agrees that, should evidence of historical or archeological sites be discovered during construction, all work in the area will cease immediately and the owner will be informed of the discovery.

42

The owner will, in turn, promptly notify the Clean Water State Revolving Fund Program of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ). After consulting with the appropriate State and Federal agencies the DEQ will advise the owner of any protective measurers that may be required. III. ENDANGERED SPECIES CLAUSE: ENDANGERED SPECIES ACT OF 1973, AS AMENDED The contractor agrees that, should plants or animals belonging to either endangered or threatened species be discovered in the area of construction or adjacent areas, all work in that area will cease immediately, and the owner will be informed of the discovery. The owner will, in turn, promptly notify the Clean Water State Revolving Fund Program of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality (DEQ). After consulting with the appropriate State and Federal agencies, the DEQ will advise the owner of any protective measurers that may be required. IV. PRESIDENTIAL EXECUTIVE ORDERS The contractor is required to comply with the following Presidential Executive Orders: (1) 11625, 12138, and 12432 - Women's and Minority Business Enterprise; (2) 12549 - Debarment and Suspension (3) 11246 - Equal Employment Opportunity. V. USE OF AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL The following text must be included the bidding documents:

“In accordance with Section 608 of the Clean Water Act as amended by the Water Resources Reform and Development Act of 2014, the contractor agrees that all of the iron and steel products used in the performance of the contract will be produced in the United States.”

For additional information including published waivers, please see the EPA website: http://water.epa.gov/grants_funding/aisrequirement.cfm VI. DAVIS BACON AND RELATED ACTS The bidding documents must include the current U.S. Department of Labor wage rates for the project. Wage rates may be downloaded from http://www.wdol.gov/ and clicking on “Selecting DBA WDs”. Select the appropriate Wage Determination for your project and include it in the specifications when you advertise for bids. Recheck the Wage Determination ten days before bid opening, and if it has been revised, the revised version must be issued to bidders as an addendum. Some consulting engineers have staff members that are capable of monitoring Davis-Bacon and Related Acts requirements, and others may not. There are administrative consultants that specialize in monitoring and managing contractor submittals and conformance with Davis-Bacon and Related Acts requirements. An administrative consultant engaged for this purpose is considered an eligible project cost. The following text must be included in the bidding documents:

http://water.epa.gov/grants_funding/aisrequirement.cfm

http://www.wdol.gov/

43

Wage Rate Requirements Under The Clean Water Act, Section 513 Preamble

With respect to the Clean Water State Revolving Funds, EPA provides capitalization grants to each State which in turn provides sub grants or loans to eligible entities within the State. Typically, the sub recipients are municipal or other local governmental entities that manage the funds. For these types of recipients, the provisions set forth under Roman numeral I, below, shall apply. Although EPA and the State remain responsible for ensuring sub recipients’ compliance with the wage rate requirements set forth herein, those sub recipients shall have the primary responsibility to maintain payroll records as described in Section 3(ii)(A), below and for compliance as described in Section I-5. Occasionally, the sub recipient may be a private for profit or not for profit entity. For these types of recipients, the provisions set forth in Roman Numeral II, below, shall apply. Although EPA and the State remain responsible for ensuring sub recipients’ compliance with the wage rate requirements set forth herein, those sub recipients shall have the primary responsibility to maintain payroll records as described in Section II-3(ii)(A), below and for compliance as described in Section II-5. I. Requirements Under The Water Resources Reform and Development Act of 2014 (WRRDA) For Sub recipients That Are Governmental Entities: The following terms and conditions specify how recipients will assist EPA in meeting its Davis-Bacon (DB) responsibilities when DB applies to EPA awards of financial assistance under the Water Resources Reform and Development Act of 2014 (WRRDA) - with respect to State recipients and sub recipients that are governmental entities. If a sub recipient has questions regarding when DB applies, obtaining the correct DB wage determinations, DB provisions, or compliance monitoring, it may contact the State recipient. If a State recipient needs guidance, the recipient may contact Mr. Dannell Brown at [email protected] or 214-665-7279, of EPA Region 6 Grants Management Office, - for guidance. The recipient or sub recipient may also obtain additional guidance from DOL’s web site at http://www.dol.gov/whd/ 1. Applicability of the Davis- Bacon (DB) prevailing wage requirements.

Under the Water Resources Reform and Development Act of 2014 (WRRDA) -, DB prevailing wage requirements apply to the construction, alteration, and repair of treatment works carried out in whole or in part with assistance made available by a State water pollution control revolving. If a sub recipient encounters a unique situation at a site that presents uncertainties regarding DB applicability, the sub recipient must discuss the situation with the recipient State before authorizing work on that site.

2. Obtaining Wage Determinations. (a) Sub recipients shall obtain the wage determination for the locality in which a covered activity subject to DB will take place prior to issuing requests for bids, proposals, quotes or other methods for soliciting contracts (solicitation) for activities subject to DB. These wage determinations shall be incorporated into solicitations and any subsequent contracts. Prime contracts must contain a provision requiring that subcontractors follow the wage determination incorporated into the prime contract.

(i) While the solicitation remains open, the sub recipient shall monitor www.wdol.gov weekly to ensure that the wage determination contained in the solicitation remains current. The sub recipients shall amend the solicitation if DOL issues a modification more than 10 days prior to the closing date (i.e. bid opening) for the solicitation. If DOL modifies or supersedes the applicable wage determination less than 10 days prior to the closing date, the sub recipients may request a finding from the State recipient that there is not a reasonable time to notify interested contractors of the modification of the wage determination. The State recipient will provide a report of its findings to the sub recipient.

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.dol.gov/whd/


44

(ii) If the sub recipient does not award the contract within 90 days of the closure of the solicitation, any modifications or supersedes DOL makes to the wage determination contained in the solicitation shall be effective unless the State recipient, at the request of the sub recipient, obtains an extension of the 90 day period from DOL pursuant to 29 CFR 1.6(c)(3)(iv). The sub recipient shall monitor www.wdol.gov on a weekly basis if it does not award the contract within 90 days of closure of the solicitation to ensure that wage determinations contained in the solicitation remain current.

(b) If the sub recipient carries out activity subject to DB by issuing a task order, work assignment or similar instrument to an existing contractor (ordering instrument) rather than by publishing a solicitation, the sub recipient shall insert the appropriate DOL wage determination from www.wdol.gov into the ordering instrument. (c) Sub recipients shall review all subcontracts subject to DB entered into by prime contractors to verify that the prime contractor has required its subcontractors to include the applicable wage determinations. (d) As provided in 29 CFR 1.6(f), DOL may issue a revised wage determination applicable to a sub recipient’s contract after the award of a contract or the issuance of an ordering instrument if DOL determines that the sub recipient has failed to incorporate a wage determination or has used a wage determination that clearly does not apply to the contract or ordering instrument. If this occurs, the sub recipient shall either terminate the contract or ordering instrument and issue a revised solicitation or ordering instrument or incorporate DOL’s wage determination retroactive to the beginning of the contract or ordering instrument by change order. The sub recipient’s contractor must be compensated for any increases in wages resulting from the use of DOL’s revised wage determination. 3. Contract and Subcontract provisions. (a) The Recipient shall insure that the sub recipient(s) shall insert in full in any contract in excess of $2,000 which is entered into for the actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating, of a treatment work under the CWSRF - financed in whole or in part from Federal funds or in accordance with guarantees of a Federal agency or financed from funds obtained by pledge of any contract of a Federal agency to make a loan, grant or annual contribution (except where a different meaning is expressly indicated), and which is subject to the labor standards provisions of any of the acts listed in § 5.1 or -FY 2015 Water Resource Reform and Development Act, the following clauses: (1) Minimum wages. (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in § 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any



45

additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. Sub recipients may obtain wage determinations from the U.S. Department of Labor’s web site, www.dol.gov. (ii)(A) The sub recipient(s), on behalf of EPA, shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The State award official shall approve a request for an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the sub recipient(s) agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), documentation of the action taken and the request, including the local wage determination shall be sent by the sub recipient (s) to the State award official. The State award official will transmit the request, to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210 and to the EPA DB Regional Coordinator concurrently. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification request within 30 days of receipt and so advise the State award official or will notify the State award official within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the sub recipient(s) do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the award official shall refer the request and the local wage determination, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the State award official, to the Administrator for determination. The request shall be sent to the EPA DB Regional Coordinator concurrently. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt of the request and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.

46

(2) Withholding. The sub recipient(s), shall upon written request of the EPA Award Official or an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the (Agency) may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly, for each week in which any contract work is performed, a copy of all payrolls to the sub recipient, that is, the entity that receives the sub-grant or loan from the State capitalization grant recipient. Such documentation shall be available on request of the State recipient or EPA. As to each payroll copy received, the sub recipient shall provide written confirmation in a form satisfactory to the State indicating whether or not the project is in compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) based on the most recent payroll copies for the specified week. The payrolls shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on the weekly payrolls. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the sub recipient(s) for transmission to the State or EPA if requested by EPA, the State, the contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the sub recipient(s). (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a “Statement of Compliance,” signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:

http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm

47

(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under § 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under § 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the “Statement of Compliance” required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. (D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the State, EPA or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency or State may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees (i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or sub contractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for

48

the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the EPA determines may by appropriate, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination; debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and sub recipient(s), State, EPA, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility.

49

(i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 4. Contract Provision for Contracts in Excess of $100,000. (a) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The sub recipient shall insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (a)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Item 3, above or 29 CFR 4.6. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. (1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The sub recipient, upon written request of the EPA Award Official or an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, shall withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (a)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section. (b) In addition to the clauses contained in Item 3, above, in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in 29 CFR 5.1, the Sub recipient shall insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Sub

50

recipient shall insert in any such contract a clause providing hat the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of agency) and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. 5. Compliance Verification (a) The sub recipient shall periodically interview a sufficient number of employees entitled to DB prevailing wages (covered employees) to verify that contractors or subcontractors are paying the appropriate wage rates. As provided in 29 CFR 5.6(a)(6), all interviews must be conducted in confidence. The sub recipient must use Standard Form 1445 (SF 1445) or equivalent documentation to memorialize the interviews. Copies of the SF 1445 are available from EPA on request. (b) The sub recipient shall establish and follow an interview schedule based on its assessment of the risks of noncompliance with DB posed by contractors or subcontractors and the duration of the contract or subcontract. Sub recipients must conduct more frequent interviews if the initial interviews or other information indicated that there is a risk that the contractor or subcontractor is not complying with DB. Sub recipients shall immediately conduct interviews in response to an alleged violation of the prevailing wage requirements. All interviews shall be conducted in confidence." (c) The sub recipient shall periodically conduct spot checks of a representative sample of weekly payroll data to verify that contractors or subcontractors are paying the appropriate wage rates. The sub recipient shall establish and follow a spot check schedule based on its assessment of the risks of noncompliance with DB posed by contractors or subcontractors and the duration of the contract or subcontract. At a minimum, if practicable, the sub recipient should spot check payroll data within two weeks of each contractor or subcontractor’s submission of its initial payroll data and two weeks prior to the completion date the contract or subcontract. Sub recipients must conduct more frequent spot checks if the initial spot check or other information indicates that there is a risk that the contractor or subcontractor is not complying with DB. In addition, during the examinations the sub recipient shall verify evidence of fringe benefit plans and payments there under by contractors and subcontractors who claim credit for fringe benefit contributions. (d) The sub recipient shall periodically review contractors and subcontractor’s use of apprentices and trainees to verify registration and certification with respect to apprenticeship and training programs approved by either the U.S Department of Labor or a state, as appropriate, and that contractors and subcontractors are not using disproportionate numbers of, laborers, trainees and apprentices. These reviews shall be conducted in accordance with the schedules for spot checks and interviews described in Item 5(b) and (c) above. (e) Sub recipients must immediately report potential violations of the DB prevailing wage requirements to the EPA DB contact listed above and to the appropriate DOL Wage and Hour District Office listed at http://www.dol.gov/whd/america2.htm. II. Requirements Under The Water Resource Reform and Development Act of 2014 (WRDA) -) For Sub recipients That Are Not Governmental Entities: The following terms and conditions specify how recipients will assist EPA in meeting its DB responsibilities when DB applies to EPA awards of financial assistance under –FY 2014 Water Resource Reform and Development Act with respect to sub recipients that are not governmental entities. If a sub recipient has questions regarding when DB applies, obtaining the correct DB wage determinations, DB provisions, or compliance monitoring, it may contact the State recipient for guidance. If a State recipient needs guidance, the recipient may contact Mr. Dannell Brown at [email protected] or 214-665-7279, of EPA Grants Management Office for guidance. The recipient or sub recipient may also obtain additional guidance from DOL’s web site at http://www.dol.gov/whd/

http://www.dol.gov/whd/america2.htm


http://www.dol.gov/whd/

51

Under these terms and conditions, the sub recipient must submit its proposed DB wage determinations to the State recipient for approval prior to including the wage determination in any solicitation, contract task orders, work assignments, or similar instruments to existing contractors.

1. Applicability of the Davis- Bacon (DB) prevailing wage requirements. Under the FY 2015 Water Resouce Reform and Development Act -, DB prevailing wage requirements apply to the construction, alteration, and repair of treatment works carried out in whole or in part with assistance made available by a State water pollution control revolving fund -. If a sub recipient encounters a unique situation at a site that presents uncertainties regarding DB applicability, the sub recipient must discuss the situation with the recipient State before authorizing work on that site. 2. Obtaining Wage Determinations. (a) Sub recipients must obtain proposed wage determinations for specific localities at www.wdol.gov. After the Sub recipient obtains its proposed wage determination, it must submit the wage determination to Mr. Dannell Brown at [email protected] or 214-665-7279, of EPA Grants Management office - for approval prior to inserting the wage determination into a solicitation, contract or issuing task orders, work assignments or similar instruments to existing contractors (ordering instruments unless subsequently directed otherwise by the State recipient Award Official.) (b) Sub recipients shall obtain the wage determination for the locality in which a covered activity subject to DB will take place prior to issuing requests for bids, proposals, quotes or other methods for soliciting contracts (solicitation) for activities subject to DB. These wage determinations shall be incorporated into solicitations and any subsequent contracts. Prime contracts must contain a provision requiring that subcontractors follow the wage determination incorporated into the prime contract.

(i) While the solicitation remains open, the sub recipient shall monitor www.wdol.gov on a weekly basis to ensure that the wage determination contained in the solicitation remains current. The sub recipients shall amend the solicitation if DOL issues a modification more than 10 days prior to the closing date (i.e. bid opening) for the solicitation. If DOL modifies or supersedes the applicable wage determination less than 10 days prior to the closing date, the sub recipients may request a finding from the State recipient that there is not a reasonable time to notify interested contractors of the modification of the wage determination. The State recipient will provide a report of its findings to the sub recipient.

(ii) If the sub recipient does not award the contract within 90 days of the closure of the solicitation, any

modifications or supersedes DOL makes to the wage determination contained in the solicitation shall be effective unless the State recipient, at the request of the sub recipient, obtains an extension of the 90 day period from DOL pursuant to 29 CFR 1.6(c)(3)(iv). The sub recipient shall monitor www.wdol.gov on a weekly basis if it does not award the contract within 90 days of closure of the solicitation to ensure that wage determinations contained in the solicitation remain current.

(c) If the sub recipient carries out activity subject to DB by issuing a task order, work assignment or similar instrument to an existing contractor (ordering instrument) rather than by publishing a solicitation, the sub recipient shall insert the appropriate DOL wage determination from www.wdol.gov into the ordering instrument. (d) Sub recipients shall review all subcontracts subject to DB entered into by prime contractors to verify that the prime contractor has required its subcontractors to include the applicable wage determinations. (e) As provided in 29 CFR 1.6(f), DOL may issue a revised wage determination applicable to a sub recipient’s contract after the award of a contract or the issuance of an ordering instrument if DOL determines that the sub recipient has failed to incorporate a wage determination or has used a wage determination that clearly does not






52

apply to the contract or ordering instrument. If this occurs, the sub recipient shall either terminate the contract or ordering instrument and issue a revised solicitation or ordering instrument or incorporate DOL’s wage determination retroactive to the beginning of the contract or ordering instrument by change order. The sub recipient’s contractor must be compensated for any increases in wages resulting from the use of DOL’s revised wage determination. 3. Contract and Subcontract provisions. (a) The Recipient shall insure that the sub recipient(s) shall insert in full in any contract in excess of $2,000 which is entered into for the actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating, of a treatment work under the CWSRF - or in accordance with guarantees of a Federal agency or financed from funds obtained by pledge of any contract of a Federal agency to make a loan, grant or annual contribution (except where a different meaning is expressly indicated), and which is subject to the labor standards provisions of any of the acts listed in § 5.1 or the FY 2015 Water Resouce Reform and Development Act -, the following clauses: (1) Minimum wages. (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work, will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3) ), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in § 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. Sub recipients may obtain wage determinations from the U.S. Department of Labor’s web site, www.dol.gov. . (ii)(A) The sub recipient(s), on behalf of EPA, shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The State award official shall approve a request for an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and

http://www.dol.gov/

53

(3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the sub recipient(s) agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), documentation of the action taken and the request, including the local wage determination shall be sent by the sub recipient(s) to the State award official. The State award official will transmit the report, to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210 and to the EPA DB Regional Coordinator concurrently. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification request within 30 days of receipt and so advise the State award official or will notify the State award official within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the sub recipient(s) do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the award official shall refer the request, and the local wage determination, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the State award official, to the Administrator for determination. The request shall be sent to the EPA Regional Coordinator concurrently. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt of the request and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (2) Withholding. The sub recipient(s) shall upon written request of the EPA Award Official or an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work, all or part of the wages required by the contract, the (Agency) may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. (3) Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work.

54

Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The contractor shall submit weekly, for each week in which any contract work is performed, a copy of all payrolls to the sub recipient, that is, the entity that receives the sub-grant or loan from the State capitalization grant recipient. Such documentation shall be available on request of the State recipient or EPA. As to each payroll copy received, the sub recipient shall provide written confirmation in a form satisfactory to the State indicating whether or not the project is in compliance with the requirements of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) based on the most recent payroll copies for the specified week. The payrolls shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on the weekly payrolls. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the sub recipient(s) for transmission to the State or EPA if requested by EPA, the State, the contractor, or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the sub recipient(s). (B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a “Statement of Compliance,” signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under § 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under § 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. (C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the “Statement of Compliance” required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section.

http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm

55

(D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the State, EPA or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency or State may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. (4) Apprentices and trainees-- (i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractors registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe

56

benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended and 29 CFR part 30. (5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. (6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the EPA determines may by appropriate, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. (7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. (8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and Sub recipient(s), State, EPA, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (10) Certification of eligibility. (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 4. Contract Provision for Contracts in Excess of $100,000. (a) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The sub recipient shall insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (a)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Item 3, above or 29 CFR 4.6. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards.

57

(1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The sub recipient shall upon the request of the EPA Award Official or an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (a)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section. (c) In addition to the clauses contained in Item 3, above, in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in 29 CFR 5.1, the Sub recipient shall insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Sub recipient shall insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the (write the name of agency) and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. 5. Compliance Verification (a) The sub recipient shall periodically interview a sufficient number of employees entitled to DB prevailing wages (covered employees) to verify that contractors or subcontractors are paying the appropriate wage rates. As provided in 29 CFR 5.6(a)(6), all interviews must be conducted in confidence. The sub recipient must use Standard Form 1445 (SF 1445) or equivalent documentation to memorialize the interviews. Copies of the SF 1445 are available from EPA on request. (b) The sub recipient shall establish and follow an interview schedule based on its assessment of the risks of noncompliance with DB posed by contractors or subcontractors and the duration of the contract or subcontract. Sub recipients must conduct more frequent interviews if the initial interviews or other information indicated that there is a risk that the contractor or subcontractor is not complying with DB. Sub recipients shall immediately

58

conduct interviews in response to an alleged violation of the prevailing wage requirements. All interviews shall be conducted in confidence." (c). The sub recipient shall periodically conduct spot checks of a representative sample of weekly payroll data to verify that contractors or subcontractors are paying the appropriate wage rates. The sub recipient shall establish and follow a spot check schedule based on its assessment of the risks of noncompliance with DB posed by contractors or subcontractors and the duration of the contract or subcontract. At a minimum, if practicable the sub recipient should spot check payroll data within two weeks of each contractor or subcontractor’s submission of its initial payroll data and two weeks prior to the completion date the contract or subcontract. Sub recipients must conduct more frequent spot checks if the initial spot check or other information indicates that there is a risk that the contractor or subcontractor is not complying with DB . In addition, during the examinations the sub recipient shall verify evidence of fringe benefit plans and payments there under by contractors and subcontractors who claim credit for fringe benefit contributions. (d). The sub recipient shall periodically review contractors and subcontractors use of apprentices and trainees to verify registration and certification with respect to apprenticeship and training programs approved by either the U.S Department of Labor or a state, as appropriate, and that contractors and subcontractors are not using disproportionate numbers of, laborers, trainees and apprentices. These reviews shall be conducted in accordance with the schedules for spot checks and interviews described in Item 5(b) and (c) above. (e) Sub recipients must immediately report potential violations of the DB prevailing wage requirements to the EPA DB contact listed above and to the appropriate DOL Wage and Hour District Office listed at http://www.dol.gov/whd/america2.htm. Note that “subrecipient” in the preceding regulations refers to the municipality. VII.EXPLANATION OF SIX GOOD FAITH EFFORTS It is a Federal requirement that all procurement made with Federal funds utilize six (6) good faith efforts to utilize disadvantaged business enterprises (DBE's) in the areas of construction, services, equipment, and supplies as follows:

1. Ensure DBEs are made aware of contracting opportunities to the fullest extent practicable through outreach and recruitment activities. For Indian Tribal, State and Local and Government recipients, this will include placing DBEs on solicitation lists and soliciting them whenever they are potential sources.

2. Make information on forthcoming opportunities available to DBEs and arrange time frames for contracts and establish delivery schedules, where the requirements permit, in a way that encourages and facilitates participation by DBEs in the competitive process. This includes, whenever possible, posting solicitations for bids or proposals for a minimum of 30 calendar days before the bid or proposal closing date.

3. Consider in the contracting process whether firms competing for large contracts could subcontract with DBEs. For Indian Tribal, State and local Government recipients, this will include dividing total requirements when economically feasible into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by DBEs in the competitive process.

4. Encourage contracting with a consortium of DBEs when a contract is too large for one of these firms to handle individually.

5. Use the services and assistance of the SBA and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce.

6. If the prime contractor awards subcontracts, require the prime contractor to take the steps in paragraphs (1) through (5) of this section.

http://www.dol.gov/esa/contacts/whd/america2.htm

59

The PRO-Net database can be accessed by typing www.sba.gov to reach the SBA Webpage. The PRO-Net database allows you to conduct a search for firms based on a number of criteria such as locality, SIC codes, bonding capability, etc. This database also allows you to locate firms that have been certified through the 8(a) program which certifies that the company has at least 2 years experience, has adequate financing and bonding to perform, and has references from previous jobs. If you do not have Internet access, you can contact the New Orleans office of the SBA at (504) 589-2847. The MBDA also maintains a database which can be accessed by typing www.mbda.gov to reach their opportunity database. Information you submit to this database about the job you have for MBE/WBE participation will be compared with information in the Phoenix database of minority companies. When a match is made, the eligible minority companies will receive a copy of your opportunity by email and/or fax and you will receive (via email or fax) a list of the minority companies to which your opportunity has been referred. The phone number for the MBDA is (214) 767-8001. The Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development (DOTD) also has an online list of DBE firms that have been certified by DOTD. Typing www.dotd.state.la.us/cgibin/construction.cgi will take you to the site where you can select the most current list of DBE firms. The phone number for DOTD is (225) 379-1382. The successful bidder must provide documentation to demonstrate that the affirmative action steps were pursued. Documentation might include records of telephone calls, records of utilization of the MBDA and SBA Web sites, and relevant correspondence. Where DBEs are contacted but not utilized, an explanation as to why each one contacted was not utilized should be provided.

60

COST AND EFFECTIVENESS CERTIFICATION WRRDA 2014: Sec. 5002 (Federal Water Pollution Control Act: Sec. 602b.13)

Loan Recipient: Loan #: CS AI #: Contract: Contract Description: As a condition of receiving assistance through the Louisiana Clean Water State Revolving Fund, I certify that per Section 602(b)(13) of the Water Resources Reform and Development Act of 2014 (WRRDA), the applicant has:

A. studied and evaluated the cost and effectiveness of the processes, materials, techniques, and technologies for carrying out the proposed project or activity for which assistance is sought and

B. has selected, to the maximum extent practicable, a project or activity that maximizes the potential for efficient water use, reuse, recapture, and conservation, and energy conservation, taking into account:

i. the cost of constructing the project or activity; ii. the cost of operating and maintaining the project or activity over the

life of the project or activity; and iii. the cost of replacing the project or activity.

Authorized Representative

and/or Consulting Engineer

Date

61

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

EXPLANATION OF AFFIRMATIVE ACTION STEPS

It is a Federal requirement that all procurement made with the Federal funds utilize six (6) affirmative action steps to utilize small business enterprises (SBE's), minority business enterprises (MBE's), women's business (WBE's), and small businesses in rural areas (SBRA's) in the areas of construction, services, equipment, and supplies. These six steps are as follows:

1. Include MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's on the solicitation lists;

2. Assure that MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's, once they are identified, are solicited

whenever they are potential sources;

3. When economically feasible, divide total requirements into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's;

4. Where feasible, establish delivery schedules which encourage participation by MBE's,

WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's;

5. Using the services and assistance of the U.S. Department of Commerce's Minority

Business Development Agency (MBDA) and the Small Business Administration (SBA); and

6. Requiring the prime contractor to take the affirmative steps outlined here. If the

successful bidder does not plan to award subcontracts, these steps should still be taken in procuring equipment and supplies.

Step number five (5) is not mandatory if other sources to identify MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and SBRA's are utilized. However, the use of these resources is encouraged. There are several outline databases that list qualifying firms, some of which may be identified as disadvantaged business enterprises (DBE) rather than MBE, WBE, SBE, or SBRA firms. One of these databases in the PRO-Net database which can be accessed by typing www.sba.gov to reach the SBA Webpage. The PRO-Net database allows you to conduct a search for firms based on a number of criteria such as locality, SIC codes, bonding capability, etc. This database also allows you to locate firms that have been certified through the 8(a) program which certifies that the company has at least 2 years’ experience, has adequate financing and bonding to perform, and has references from previous jobs. If you do not have Internet access you can contact the New Orleans office of the SBA at (504) 589-2847.

62

The MBDA also maintains a database which can be accessed by typing www.mbda.gov to reach their opportunity database. Information you submit to this database about the job you have for MBE/WBE participation will be compared with information in the Phoenix database of minority companies. When a match is made, the eligible minority companies will receive a copy of your opportunity by email and/or fax and you will receive (via email or fax) a list of the minority companies to which your opportunity has been referred. The phone number for the MBDA is (214) 767-8001. The Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development (DOTD) also has an online list of DBE firms that have been certified by DOTD. Typing www.dotd.state.la.us/cgi-bin/construction.cgi will take you to the site where you can select the most current list of DBE firms. The phone number for DOTD is (225) 379-1382. The successful bidder must provide documentation to demonstrate that the affirmative action steps were pursed. In addition to the use of forms RF-245 and RF 248, documentation might include records of telephone calls, records of utilization of the MBDA and SBA Web sites, and relevant correspondence. Where MBE's, WBE's, SBE's, and/or SBRA's are contacted but not utilized, an explanation as to why each one contacted was not utilized should be provided.

END OF SECTION

63

United States Environmental Protection Agency Washington, DC 20460

Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, and Other Responsibility Matters

The prospective participant certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that it and its principals:

(a) Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any Federal department or agency.

(b) Have not within a three year period preceding this proposal been convicted of or had a civil

judgment rendered against them for commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (Federal, State, or local) transaction or contract under a public transaction; violation of Federal or State antitrust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property;

(c) Are not presently indicted for or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government entity

(Federal, State, or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in paragraph (1)(b) of this certification; and

(d) Have not within a three-year period preceding this application/proposal had one or more public

transactions (Federal, State, or local) terminated for cause or default.

I understand that a false statement on this certification may be grounds for rejection of this proposal or termination of the award. In addition, under 18 USC Sec. 1001, a false statement may result in a fine of up to $10,000 or imprisonment for up to 5 years, or both.

Typed Name & Title of Authorized Representative Signature of Authorized Representative Date

I am unable to certify to the above statements. My explanation is attached.

EPA Form 5700-49 (11-88)

64

RF-200 03/25/2013

CONTRACTOR'S GUIDE & RECORD FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF SIX AFFIRMATIVE ACTIONS

It is a Federal requirement that all procurement made with Federal funds utilize six (6) affirmative

action steps to utilize disadvantaged business enterprises (DBEs) in the areas of construction, services, equipment, and supplies. For each of the following six steps, please state what actions were taken to comply with that step or reasons that no action was taken.

1. Placing qualified DBEs on solicitation lists.

2. Assuring that DBEs, once identified, are solicited whenever they are potential sources.

3. Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by DBEs.

4. Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirement permits, which encourage participation by DBEs.

5. Using the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration, and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce to identify qualified DBEs.

6. Require that each party to a sub-agreement or contract award take the affirmative steps outlined here.

__________________________________________ ______________________________

Signature of Contractor Date

65

CITY OF KENNER USE ONLY RF-373 04/23/13

DBE CERTIFICATION Loan Recipient_________________________________________________________________ Project Number__________________________________DEQ Contract No._______________ The Loan Recipient has determined that a fair share of sub-agreements CAN/CANNOT be awarded to disadvantaged, minority and/or women’s businesses on this project. Determination has been made that the Disadvantaged Business Enterprises participating in this project have been certified by the State of Louisiana’s Unified Certification Program or by another certifying agency. The following is the Loan Recipients effort to show compliance with DEQ’s policy. Prime Construction Contractor____________________________________________________ Construction Contract Amount____________________________________________________ WBE MBE Name of Firm Subcontract Amount ( ) ( ) _______________________________________________ __________________ ( ) ( ) _______________________________________________ __________________ ( ) ( ) _______________________________________________ __________________ ( ) ( ) _______________________________________________ __________________ ( ) ( ) _______________________________________________ __________________ ( ) ( ) _______________________________________________ __________________ *Attach additional sheets if necessary ______________________________ __________________________________________ _______________________ __________________________________________ Date Authorized Representative of Recipient

66

OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved: 8/13/2013

Approval Expires: 8/31/2015

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Participation Form

An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Recipient must require its prime contractors to provide this form to its DBE subcontractors. This form gives a DBE1 subcontractor2 the opportunity to describe work received and/or report any concerns regarding the EPA-funded project (e.g., in areas such as termination by prime contractor, late payments, etc.). The DBE subcontractor can, as an option, complete and submit this form to the EPA DBE Coordinator at any time during the project period of performance.

SUBCONTRACTOR NAME

PROJECT NAME

BID/PROPOSAL NO.

ASSISTANCE AGREEMENT ID NO. (IF KNOWN)

POINT OF CONTACT

ADDRESS TELEPHONE NO.

E-MAIL ADDRESS

PRIME CONTRACTOR NAME

ISSUING/FUNDING ENTITY:

Contract Item Number

Description of Work Received from the Prime Contractor Involving Construction, Services, Equipment or Supplies

Amount Received by Prime Contractor

1 A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity from which EPA accepts certifications as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entities that meet or exceed EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2 Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance. EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form)

67

OMB Control No: 2090-0030

Approved: 8/13/2013 Approval Expires: 8/31/2015

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program

DBE Subcontractor Participation Form

Please use the space below to report any concerns regarding the above EPA-funded project: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Subcontractor Signature Print Name

Title Date

The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address. EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form)

68



Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Performance Form

This form is intended to capture the DBE1 subcontractor’s2 description of work to be performed and the piece of the work submitted to the prime contractor. An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Recipient must require its prime contractor to have its DBE subcontractors complete this form and include all completed forms in the prime contractors bid or proposal package. SUBCONTRACTOR NAME

PROJECT NAME

BID/PROPOSAL NO.


POINT OF CONTACT

ADDRESS TELEPHONE NO.

E-MAIL ADDRESS



Contract Item Number

Description of Work Submitted to the Prime Contractor Involving Construction, Services, Equipment or Supplies

Price of Work Submitted to the Prime Contractor

DBE Certified By: ____DOT ____SBA ____Other: _________________________

Meets/exceeds EPA certification standards? ____Yes ____No ____Unknown

1 A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity from which EPA accepts certifications as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entities that meet or exceed EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2 Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance. EPA FORM 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form)

69

OMB Control No: 2090-0030

Approved: 8/13/2013 Approval Expires: 8/31/2015

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program

DBE Subcontractor Performance Form

I certify under penalty of perjury that the forgoing statements are true and correct. Signing this form does not signify a commitment to utilize the subcontractors above. I am aware of that in the event of a replacement of a subcontractor, I will adhere to the replacement requirements set forth in 40 CFR Part 33 Section 33.302 (c).

Prime Contractor Signature Print Name

Title Date

Subcontractor Signature Print Name

Title Date

The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address. EPA FORM 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form)

70

Continue on back if needed



Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form

This form is intended to capture the prime contractor’s actual and/or anticipated use of identified certified DBE1 subcontractors2 and the estimated dollar amount of each subcontract. An EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Recipient must require its prime contractors to complete this form and include it in the bid or proposal package. Prime contractors should also maintain a copy of this form on file. SUBCONTRACTOR NAME PROJECT NAME

BID/PROPOSAL NO.


POINT OF CONTACT

ADDRESS TELEPHONE NO. E-MAIL ADDRESS



I have identified potential DBE certified subcontractors ____Yes ____No If yes, please complete the table below. If no, please explain: Subcontractor Name/

Company Name Company Address/Phone/Email Estimated

Dollar Amount

Currently DBE

Certified?

1 A DBE is a Disadvantaged, Minority, or Woman Business Enterprise that has been certified by an entity from which EPA accepts certifications as described in 40 CFR 33.204-33.205 or certified by EPA. EPA accepts certifications from entities that meet or exceed EPA certification standards as described in 40 CFR 33.202. 2 Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EPA award of financial assistance. EPA FORM 6100-4 (DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form)

71



Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form

I certify under penalty of perjury that the forgoing statements are true and correct. Signing this form does not signify a commitment to utilize the subcontractors above. I am aware of that in the event of a replacement of a subcontractor, I will adhere to the replacement requirements set forth in 40 CFR Part 33 Section 33.302 (c).

Prime Contractor Signature Print Name

Title Date

The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average three (3) hours per response. Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822T), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address. EPA FORM 6100-4 (DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form)

72

[Code of Federal Regulations] [Title 29 Volume 1J] [Revised as of July 1, 200B] From the U.S. Government Printing Office via GPO Access [CITE: 29CFR5.5) [Page 115-121]

TITLE 29—LABOR

PART 5 LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO CONTRACTS COVERING FEDERALLY FINANCED AND ASSISTED CONSTRUCTION Subpart A - Davis-Bacon and Related Acts Provisions and Procedures Sec.5.5 Contract provisions and related matters.

(a) The Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality requires the contracting officer to insert in full in any contract in excess of $2, 000 ~'1hich is entered into for the actual construction, alteration and/or repair, including painting and decorating, of a public building or public \10rk, or building or work financed in whole or in part from Federal funds or in accordance with guarantees of a Federal agency or financed from funds obtained by pledge of any contract of a Federal agency to make a loan, grant or annual contribution (except \-1here a different meaning is expressly indicated), and which is subject to the labor standards provisions of any of the acts listed in Sec. 5.1, the following clauses (or any modifications thereof to meet the particular needs of the agency, Provided, That such modifications are first approved by the Department of Labor) : (1) Minimum wages. (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1 (b) (2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a) (1) (iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in Sec. 5.5{a) (4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided that the employer’s payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional

73

classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a) (1) (ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers.

(ii) (A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met:

(1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not

performed by a classification in the wage determination: and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry;

and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits,

bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination.

(B) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.

(C) In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, Hill issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.

(D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a) (1) (ii) (8) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all, workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification.

(iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.

(iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide

74

fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program.

(2) Withholding. The (write in name of the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased.

(3) Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such \10rker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section l(b) (2) (B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section l(b) (2) (B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits . Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.

(ii) (A) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payroll’s to the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be

75

maintained under Sec. 5.5(a) (3) (i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form NH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014 -1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors.

(B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following:

(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under Sec. 5.5 (a) (3) (i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5 and that such information is correct and complete;

(2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3;

(3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract.

(C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance” required by paragraph (a) (3) (ii) (B) of this section.

(D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 10 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code.

(iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph la) (3) (i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job . If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.

(4) Apprentices and trainees--(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program,

76

who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor ' s or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance \1ith the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved.

(ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5. 16, trainees shall not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeyman on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is' an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor h'i11 no longer be permitted to utilize trainees

77

at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved .

(iii) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR part 30.

(5) Compliance with Copeland Act requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract.

(6) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality may by appropriate instructions require, and a l so a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts . The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or other tier subcontractor ~1ith all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5.

(7) Contract termination: debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.

(8) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract.

(9) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.

(10) Certification of eligibility. (i) By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor I 5 firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 C,R 5.12(a) (1).

(ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a) (1) .

(iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S .C. 1001.

(b) Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. The Secretary of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (b) (1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Sec. 5.5(a) or 4.6 of part 4 of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards.

78

(1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such work week. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b) (1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic1 including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b) (1) of this section, in the sum of SID for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b) (1) of this section.

(3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The (write in the name of the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor , or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, \'1hich is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b) (2) of this section.

(4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b) (1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b) (1) through (4) of this section.

(c) In addition to the clauses contained in paragraph (b), in any contract subject only to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act and not to any of the other statutes cited in Sec. 5.1, the Secretary of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert a clause requiring that the contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen , working on the contract . Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number;· correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Further, the Secretary of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert in any such contract a clause providing that the records to be maintained under this paragraph shall be made available by the contractor or subcontractor for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Louisiana Department of Environmental Quality and the Department of Labor, and the contractor or subcontractor will permit such representatives to interview employees during \'1working hours on the job.

79

Davis-Bacon Wage Decision

The Davis-Bacon Agreement (DBA), as amended, requires that each contract over $2,000 to which the United States or the District of Columbia is a party for the construction, alteration, and/or repair (including painting or decorating) of public buildings or public works shall contain a clause setting forth the minimum wages to be paid to various classes of laborers and mechanics employed under the contract. This project falls under the provisions required by the current DBA.

Under the provisions of the DBA, contractors or their subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics employed directly upon the site of the work no less than the locally prevailing wages and fringe benefits paid on projects of a similar character. The DBA directs the Department of Labor to determine such local prevailing wage rates (WDs). The WDs, also known as “general schedules”, are then to be placed in covered contracts by Federal agency contracting officials.

In addition to the DBA itself, Congress has added prevailing wage provisions to approximately 60 statutes which assist construction projects through grants, loans, loan guarantees, and insurance. These "related Acts" involve construction in such areas as transportation, housing, air and water pollution reduction, and health.

The geographic scope of the DBA is limited to the 50 States and the District of Columbia. The scope of each related Act is determined by the terms of the particular statute under which the Federal assistance is provided.

http://www.wdol.gov/exitpage.aspx?np=y&url=http://farsite.hill.af.mil/reghtml/regs/far2afmcfars/fardfars/far/22.htm#P146_22580

http://www.wdol.gov/exitpage.aspx?np=y&url=http://farsite.hill.af.mil/reghtml/regs/far2afmcfars/fardfars/far/22.htm#P146_22580

80

General Decision Number: LA170007 08/11/2017 LA7 Superseded General Decision Number: LA20160007 State: Louisiana Construction Type: Heavy Counties: Jefferson, Orleans, Plaquemines, St Bernard, St Charles, St James, St John the Baptist and St Tammany Counties in Louisiana. HEAVY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (Includes flood control, water & sewer lines, and water wells. Also includes elevated storage tanks in all listed parishes except Plaquemines and St. James. Excludes industrial construction-chemical processing, power plants, and refineries.) Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.20 for calendar year 2017 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.20 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2017. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2017 1 02/03/2017 2 04/21/2017 3 04/28/2017 4 08/04/2017 5 08/11/2017 CARP0729-001 07/01/2016 Rates Fringes MILLWRIGHT.......................$ 31.15 10.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP1846-006 07/01/2017 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (formbuilding/formsetting and Piledrivers).....................$ 25.06 9.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0130-005 12/01/2016

81

JEFFERSON, ORLEANS, PLAQUEMINES, ST. BERNARD, ST. CHARLES, ST. JAMES, AND ST. JOHN THE BAPTIST PARISHES Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN (including low voltage wiring)..................$ 30.06 11.17 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * ELEC1077-002 06/01/2017 ST. TAMMANY PARISH Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN (including low voltage wiring)..................$ 24.27 3%+7.95 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0406-018 07/01/2009 Rates Fringes OPERATOR: Power Equipment Bulldozer...................$ 21.26 6.70 Mechanic....................$ 23.31 6.70 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLAS0567-003 07/01/2014 JEFFERSON, ORLEANS, PLAQUEMINES, ST. BERNARD, ST. CHARLES, ST. JOHN THE BAPTIST, and ST. TAMMANY PARISHES Rates Fringes Cement Mason/Concrete Finisher...$ 21.43 6.19 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLAS0812-003 06/01/2004 ST. JAMES PARISH Rates Fringes Cement Mason/Concrete Finisher...$ 21.85 0.00 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0060-002 12/05/2016 JEFFERSON, ORLEANS, PLAQUEMINES, ST. BERNARD, ST. CHARLES, ST. JAMES (Southeastern Portion), ST. JOHN THE BAPTIST, and ST. TAMMANY PARISHES Rates Fringes Plumbers (excluding pipe laying)..........................$ 29.03 11.59 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0198-005 01/01/2016

82

ST. JAMES PARISH (Northwestern Portion) Rates Fringes PLUMBER (excluding pipe laying)..........................$ 29.38 11.40 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SULA2004-007 05/13/2004 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (all other work).......$ 13.75 2.60 Laborers: Common/Landscape............$ 9.88 0.00 Fence.......................$ 11.24 0.00 Flagger.....................$ 8.58 0.00 Mason Tender................$ 7.25 0.00 Pipelayer...................$ 9.84 0.00 PIPEFITTER (excluding pipelaying)......................$ 17.52 4.51 Power equipment operators: Backhoe/Excavator...........$ 14.42 0.00 Crane.......................$ 16.34 3.30 Dragline....................$ 16.50 0.00 Front End Loader............$ 13.89 0.00 Oiler.......................$ 10.03 0.00 Truck drivers: Dump........................$ 11.01 0.00 Pickup......................$ 12.25 0.00 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO

83

is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier.

84

Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to:

85

Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION

86

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS List of Subjects SC-1 SCOPE SC-2 INSURANCE SC-2.01 Workers Compensation and Employer's Liability SC-2.02 Comprehensive Automobile Liability SC-2.03 Comprehensive General Liability SC-2.04 Umbrella Liability Policy SC-2.05 Owner's Protective Liability SC-2.06 Installation Floater (Property Insurance) SC-2.07 Builder's Risk Insurance SC-2.08 Deductibles SC-2.09 Indemnity SC-2.10 Settlement of Insurance Claims SC-3 BID, PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS SC-4 OVERTIME WORK SC-5 CORRECTION PERIOD SC-6 PAYMENT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES SC-7 DOCUMENTATION TO ACCOMPANY APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT SC-7.01 Material and Equipment SC-7.02 Schedules and Data SC-7.03 Documentation for Final Payment SC-8 SPECIFICATIONS SC-9 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PAYMENT SC-10 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS SC-11 HISTORICAL OR ARCHAEOLOGICAL DEPOSITS SC-12 CONTRACT TIME SC-12.01 Delays and Damages SC-12.02 Time Extensions for Weather Conditions SC-13 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

87

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS List of Subjects - Continued SC-14 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE SC-15 ASSIGNMENT SC-16 PREFERENCE AND PRIORTY TO LOUISIANA RESIDENT CONTRACTOR SC-17 EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS SC-18 COORDINATION OF WORK SC-19 COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS SC-20 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SC-21 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PROJECT WORK SCHEDULE SC-22 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES SC-23 ACCEPTANCE OF INSURANCE

88

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

SC-1 SCOPE. These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions (EJCDC No. C-700, 2002 Edition), and amend or supplement other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not so amended or modified remain in full force and effect. SC-2 INSURANCE. The insurance requirements in Article 5 of the General Conditions are as modified herein. All liability and property insurance shall be purchased and maintained by Contractor as set forth herein. Section 2.01 of the General Conditions is revised to require that the valid certificates of insurance showing the required waivers be submitted with the Contract when the Contractor returns the contract for signature by the Mayor of the City of Kenner. The Contractor shall purchase in its name and maintain at its sole cost and expense such liability and other insurance as set out herein. This insurance will provide primary coverage for claims and/or suits which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s performance and furnishing of the Work, whether it is performed by the Contractor, any sub-contractor, partner, supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. If applicable, the Contractor shall require all sub-contractors to maintain, in limits equal to or greater than Contractor’s, the same insurance coverage for Work performed or materials provided for the Work. Contractor shall insert this requirement in all contracts or agreements written and/or oral with all entities and/or persons who perform any Work under this contract. At no time shall Contractor allow any sub-contractors to perform Work without the required types and limits of insurance coverage. All insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the Owner and any principals for whom the Owner is working, including any and all co-lessors of such principal, and shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. Insurance provided for Commercial General Liability, Commercial Automobile Liability, and Umbrella Liability shall name the Owner as an additional insured and shall be primary to any insurance carried by the Owner. Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates of insurance as evidence of the above insurance. If Owner has any objections to the coverage afforded by or other provision of the insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with Section 5.04 of the General Conditions on the basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, Owner will notify Contractor in writing thereof within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of delivery of such certificates to Owner in accordance with Section 2.01 of the General Conditions. SC-2.01 Workers’ Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall purchase in its name, and maintain during the life of this contract, Worker's Compensation Insurance for all his employees in any way engaged in this project. If any Subcontractor does not carry Workers' Compensation Insurance, such coverage must be included under the Contractor's policy. The policy shall provide coverage at least equal to the requirements of the State of Louisiana and shall include Employer's Liability Coverage. If any of the Work is above, on, or alongside bodies of water, U S Longshoreman & Harbor Workers insurance in equal amounts ($1,000,000) is to be included in the policy. Policy limits and endorsements shall be as follows:

89

a. State Act- Louisiana Statutory Requirements; Provide Other States coverage, if applicable;

b. Employer’s Liability with Minimum limits of $1,000,000/1,000,000/1,000,000; and c. Waiver of Subrogation to include written contracts in favor of The City of

Kenner, its elected and appointed officials, agents, directors, servants, employees, volunteers, and any other entities who may require waivers by specific contract.

SC-2.02 Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall purchase in its name, and maintain during the life of this contract, Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance to protect the Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors performing work under this contract from claims arising from any operations or work in connection with this contract. The Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage is to be on an occurrence basis, with minimum limits and endorsements as follows:

a. Minimal acceptable limit: $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit; b. Liability coverage to be provided for Any Auto or for all Owned Autos and Hired and Non-owned Autos. If Contractor owns no vehicles, then a Hired and Non-

owned Auto Liability policy is required; c. Additional Insured endorsement in favor of The City of Kenner, its elected and

appointed officials, agents, directors, servants, employees, and volunteers; d. Waiver of Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us to include written

contracts in favor of The City of Kenner, its elected and appointed officials, agents, directors, servants, employees, and volunteers; and

e. If transporting any pollutants, the policy is to include the Broad Form Transportation Pollution Form CA 99 48, or the most current form available. SC-2.03 Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall purchase in its name, and maintain during the life of this contract, Commercial General Liability Insurance, including Products and Completed Operations Insurance to protect the Owner, Contractor and Subcontractors performing work under this contract from claims arising from any operations or work in connection with this contract. The policy shall provide the following limits and endorsements:

a. Commercial General Liability Form CA 00 01 or pre-approved equivalent; b. Minimal acceptable limits: $1,000,000 per occurrence; $2,000,000 general

aggregate, $2,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate; c. Amendment-Aggregate limits of insurance (per project), the most recent edition

in use in Louisiana or pre-approved equivalent; d. Additional Insured endorsement in favor of The City of Kenner, its elected and

appointed officials, agents, directors, servants, employees and volunteers on CG 20 10 Form B (edition 07 04) or approved equivalent; and

e. Waiver of Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us to include written contracts in favor of The City of Kenner, its elected and appointed officials, agents, directors, servants, employees, and volunteers.

SC-2.04 Umbrella / Excess Liability Coverage. The Contractor shall purchase in its name, and maintain during the life of this contract, a policy of Umbrella / Excess Liability Coverage in excess of the General Liability, Automobile Liability and Employer’s Liability coverages above, following form thereof:

a. Minimum acceptable limits of $5,000,000

90

SC-2.05 Contractor’s Pollution, if applicable. If the Work involves pollutants of any kind, in any manner, including cleanup, this section applies. The Contractor shall purchase in its name, and maintain during the life of this contract, a pollution liability policy covering losses caused by pollution conditions that arise from the operations of the Contractor. The policy shall provide the following limits and endorsements:

a. Minimum acceptable limits: $1,000,000 each incident; $2,000,000 aggregate; b. Broad Form Named Insured endorsement; c. Fines, penalties and punitive damages to be included; d. Clean up costs to be included; e. Additional Insured endorsement in favor of The City of Kenner, its elected and

appointed officials, agents, directors, servants, employees, and volunteers; f. Waiver of Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us to include written

contracts in favor of The City of Kenner, its elected and appointed officials, agents, directors, servants, employees, and volunteers;

h. If claims-made coverage is accepted, the retroactive date, if any, must precede the commencement of the performance of the contract; and

i. Any retrospective date applicable to coverage will be maintained or an extended discovery period will be exercised for a period of three (3) years beginning when the Contract is completed or terminated.

SC-2.06 Builder's Risk Insurance, if applicable. If the construction project involves a structure of any kind, this section applies. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builder’s Risk insurance upon the entire Work which is the subject of the Contract, at the site, to the full insurable value thereof. The Contractor shall purchase the policy with the Owner as the First Named Insured and maintain an “all risk” builder’s risk insurance on the entire Work. If the Contractor has a blanket Builder’s Risk policy, it shall be endorsed to include the Work, with the Owner listed as a Named Insured with regard to the Work. These policies must at a minimum cover for such amount of the Work as is determined by the Engineer and/or Architect. This insurance shall include, the Contractor, any Subcontractors and/or vendors deemed appropriate by the Contractor shall also be Named Insureds.

The policy shall insure against the perils of fire, flood, and extended coverage and shall include, "all risk", insurance for physical damage including, without duplication of coverage: theft; testing as appropriate for the type of project; debris removal; damage to any Work-related property stored in the open, resulting from a non-excluded peril; and vandalism. If not covered under the "all risk" insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar insurance on portions of the Work stored off the site when such portions of the Work are to be included in any applications for payment and such procedures have been approved by the Owner.

The Builder’s Risk insurance shall be written and provided such that any portions of a building or site vacated by the Owner to accommodate the Work are protected and covered by the terms of the insurance. The insurance shall not be cancelled or permitted to lapse because of such vacancy. Coverage is to provide for use and/or occupancy, without qualification, of any and all portions of the Work, or the premises where the Work is being conducted, whether the Work has been accepted by the Owner or not. The policy shall remain in full force and effect until all work has been accepted by the Owner and no repairs, remediation or operations of any type are required from the Contractor, as determined by the Owner. Coverage for Builder’s Risk Soft Costs is to be included.

91

SC-2.07 Deductibles / Self-Insured Retentions. No insurance required under this contract shall include a deductible or Self Insured Retention in excess of $25,000.00 unless approved by the Owner. The cost of all deductible or retained amounts shall be borne by the Contractor. SC-2.08 Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to protect, defend, indemnify and save the Owner, its agents, officials, employees, or any firm, company, organization, or individual, or their contractors, or subcontractors for whom the Owner may be contracted to, harmless from and against any and all claims, demands, actions, and causes of action of every kind and character including but not limited to claims based on negligence, strict liability, and absolute liability which may arise in favor of any person or persons on account of illness, disease, loss of property, services, wages, death or personal injuries resulting from operations contemplated by this contract. Specifically indemnified is the firm of Principal Engineering, the same as the Owner. Further, Contractor hereby agrees to indemnify all parties above for all reasonable expenses and attorneys' fees incurred by or imposed upon the Owner in connection therewith for any such loss, damage, injury or other casualty. Contractor further agrees to pay all reasonable expenses and attorneys' fees incurred by the Owner in establishing the right to indemnity. SC-2.09 Settlement of Insurance Claims. Losses insured under policies that include Owner as a named insured shall be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to the Owner as trustee for the Insureds, as their interests may appear. SC-3 Bid, Performance, and Payment Bonds. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by applicable Laws or Regulations and shall be executed only by sureties meeting the requirements and qualifications set forth herein. If the surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt, becomes insolvent, loses its right to do business in any state where any part of the Project or Work is located, or ceases to meet the requirements of paragraphs 3.1, 3.2, and/or 3.3 C below, the Contractor shall within twenty (20) days thereafter substitute another Bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements herein. SC-3.1 Bid Bond / Evidence of Good Faith - The Contractor’s Bid shall be accompanied by a certified check, cashier’s check or bid bond in an amount equal to five percent (5%) of the Contractor’s Bid as an evidence of good faith. If a Bond is used the surety or insurance company must be currently on the U.S. Department of Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest edition of the A. M. Best’s Key Rating Guide. SC-3.2 Performance and Payment Bonds - The Contractor shall purchase and furnish performance and payment bonds each in an amount at least equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price, including but not limited to, the obligations for actual damages and liquidated damages in accordance with the provisions in the Contract, regarding delay in completion of the Work within the contract times as security for faithful performance and payment of all Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Contract. Separate Performance and Payment Bonds shall be provided. A combined Performance and Payment Bond will not be acceptable. SC-3.3 Qualification of Surety – Performance and Payment Bonds - Any surety Bond written for Owner shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies

92

which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest edition of the A. M. Best’s Key Rating Guide to write individual Bonds up to ten percent (10%) of policy holders’ surplus, or by a surety company that complies with the requirements of LSA-R.S. 38:2219.

SC-3.4 Resident Agent Required - No surety will be accepted from a bondsman that does not have a permanent agent or representative in the State of Louisiana upon whom notices referred to in the General Conditions may be served. Service of said notice on said agent or representative in the State shall be equal to service of notice on the president of the surety, or such other officer as may be concerned. Should the Contractor’s surety, even though approved and accepted by the Owner subsequently remove its agency or representative from the State or terminate its residency or license in the State or become insolvent, bankrupt, or otherwise fail, the Contractor shall immediately furnish a new Bond from another company approved by the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. The new Bond shall be executed upon the same terms and conditions as the original Bond.

SC-3.5 ................... Alternative Security – The Owner, may, at its discretion accept alternative security pursuant to the requirements set forth in the Louisiana Public Contract Law (LSA-R.S. 38:2211 et seq.)

SC-3.6 Scope of the Bond and Obligation of the Surety - The Contractor’s surety shall obligate itself to all the terms and covenants of the Contract covering the Work to be performed there under. The Owner reserves the right to order extra work or to make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the Work under the conditions and in the manner herein described without notice to the Contractor’s surety and without in any manner affecting the liability of the bondsman or releasing it from any of its obligations hereunder.

The Bond shall also secure for the Owner the faithful performance of the Contract in strict accordance with the plans and specifications of the Contract. It shall protect the Owner against all lien laws of the State and shall provide for payment of reasonable attorney’s fees for enforcement of the Contract and institution of concursus proceedings, if such proceedings become necessary. Likewise it shall provide that if the Engineer is put to labor or expense by enforcement of the Contract and institution of concursus proceedings or through delinquency or insolvency of the Contract he shall be equitably paid for such extra expense and services involved.

The surety of the Contractor shall be and does hereby declare and acknowledge itself by acceptance to be bound to the Owner as guarantor jointly and in solido with the Contractor for fulfillment of the foregoing items including, but not limited to any provisions for actual or liquidated damages. SC-4 OVERTIME WORK. No work shall be done between 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. nor on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays without permission of Owner. However, emergency work may be done without prior permission. Night work may be undertaken as a regular procedure with the permission of Owner; such permission, however, may be revoked at any time by Owner if Contractor fails to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for the proper prosecution and control of the work at night. Regular working hours shall not exceed a maximum of 40 hours per week. Requests to work during other than regular working hours as established by Contractor must be submitted to the Design Professional at least 72 hours in advance of the period proposed for such overtime work and shall set forth the proposed schedule for work to give the Design Professional ample time to arrange for his personnel to be at the site of the work.

93

The Contractor shall pay for all additional engineering charges to the Owner on account of the overtime work which may be authorized as stated above. Such engineering charges shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and no extra payment shall be made by the Owner on account of such overtime work. Design Professional overtime charges shall be assessed in accordance with the terms of the Design Professional's Agreement with the Owner. SC-5 CORRECTION PERIOD. Section 13.07 of the General Conditions is hereby modified so that the correction period is one year after the date of City Council Acceptance. Nothing in the General Conditions Article 13 concerning the correction period shall establish a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which Contractor has under the Contract Documents. The establishment of time periods relates only to the specific obligations of the Contractor to correct the work, and has no relationship to the time within which his obligations under the Contract Documents may be commenced to establish his liability with respect to his obligations other than to specifically correct the work. SC-6 PAYMENT OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Article 14 of the General Conditions is hereby modified to include provisions for collecting liquidated damages. When Contractor is in default for nonperformance within the stipulated contract time (as set forth in the Liquidated Damages paragraph), Owner shall deduct the liquidated damages amount from the Contractor's payment request. SC-7 DOCUMENTATION TO ACCOMPANY APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT. In addition to the provisions set forth in GC-14.02 and 14.07, the Contractor's Applications for Payment shall be accompanied by the documentation specified in SC 7.01, 7.02 and 7.03. SC-7.01 Materials and Equipment. If payment is requested for materials and equipment not incorporated in the work, but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Progress Payment shall be accompanied by such data, satisfactory to the Owner, as will establish the Owner's title to the material and equipment and protect his interest therein, including applicable insurance. Payments for such materials and equipment shall be based only upon the actual cost of the materials and equipment to the Contractor and shall not include any overhead or profit to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be cognizant of the fact that other work may be under construction at the same time that this Contract is active. There shall be complete cooperation with any other contractor in the area, and any unavoidable conflicts shall be immediately brought to the Design Professional's attention. SC-7.02 Schedules and Data. Each Application for Progress Payment shall be accompanied by the Contractor's updated schedule of operations, or progress report, with such shop drawings, schedules, procurement schedules, value of material on hand included in application, and other data specified in Division 1 or reasonably required by the Design Professional. With each pay request the Contractor shall submit a breakdown of pay items by work order site, listing location, description of work and cost supported by foreman's report; and a standard A.I.A. billing form indicating bid items, unit prices bid, current quantities installed, value of current work installed, previous quantity installed and total quantity and cost to date. SC-7.03 Documentation for Final Payment. Contractor's Application for Final Payment shall be accompanied by consent of the Surety to final payment and clear lien and privilege certificates issued by the Clerk of Court and Ex-Officio Recorder of Mortgages for Jefferson Parish.

94

SC-8 SPECIFICATIONS. The specifications which govern the materials and equipment to be furnished and the work to be performed under this contract are listed in the Table of Contents at the beginning of this volume. SC-9 RESPONSIBILITY FOR PAYMENT. Except for items specifically identified as provided by the Owner, Contractor shall pay for all labor, materials, and other costs incurred under this Contract. SC-10 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS. Active underground pipelines and utilities are indicated on the Drawings only to the extent such information was made available to or discovered by Design Professional in preparing drawings. There is no guarantee as to the accuracy or completeness of such information, and all responsibility for the accuracy and completeness thereof is expressly disclaimed by the Owner and the Design Professional. Service connections are not indicated on the Drawings. Contractor shall be responsible for discovery of all existing underground installations, in advance of excavating or trenching, by contacting all local utilities, and by prospecting. SC-11 HISTORICAL OR ARCHAEOLOGICAL DEPOSITS. If, during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical or archaeological interest is found, Contractor shall cease operations affecting the find and shall notify Owner who shall notify the State Historic Preservation Officer. No further disturbance of the deposits shall ensue until Contractor has been notified by Owner that he may proceed. Owner will issue a notice to proceed only after the state official has surveyed the find and made a determination to the Owner. Compensation to Contractor, if any, for lost time or changes in construction to avoid the find, shall be determined in accordance with changed conditions or change order provisions of the Contract Documents. SC-12. CONTRACT TIME. SC-12.01 Delays and Damages. Contractor shall accept the risk of any delays caused by the rate of progress of the work performed under this contract or other contract. In the event the Contractor is delayed in the prosecution and completion of the work because of such conditions, the Contractor shall have no claim against the Owner for damages or contract adjustment other than an extension of contract time and the waiving of liquidated damages during the period occasioned by the delay. Time limitations required by the Owner shall be for the benefit of the Owner and contractors, under other contracts, who have entered into such contracts with the Owner in reliance on the time limitations set forth in these Contract Documents. Any claim by the Contractor for damages due to delay by another contractor shall be asserted against that Contractor. SC-12.02 Time Extensions for Weather Conditions. The Contractor shall note that weather conditions shall not be an automatic cause for time extension. The contract time specified in the bidding documents and contract agreement include an allowance for inclement weather. In order to document and claim days lost to inclement weather conditions, the Contractor shall, on a semi-monthly basis submit a report to the Design Professional, stating the time lost to inclement weather, within seven (7) days of the end of the report period. The Design Professional will review the report and make recommendations for either acceptance or rejection of each claimed time period lost to inclement weather. The Owner will then instruct the Design Professional to approve or reject the report.

95

The report for lost days due to inclement weather shall account for all days during the reporting period, including weekends and holidays. Claims for lost days on either weekends or holidays will not be considered unless the Contractor can show that the inclement weather affected work production on the following work day. The reporting periods shall be from the first day of the month through and including the fifteenth day of the month and from the sixteenth day of the month through and including the last day of the month. Lost time accounting shall be in one-half day increments. Lost time shall be considered only if the weather occurrence is in excess of the normal weather patterns as established by the nearest office of the National Weather Service, U.S. Department of Commerce. When the Contract utilizes critical path method scheduling (C.P.M.), the Design Professional will determine if the days lost due to weather conditions actual affected the critical path activities then no time extension will be granted. SC-13 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. Section 14.04 of the General Conditions is hereby deleted entirely, and the following is substituted: When the Contractor considers the work 100% complete, the Contractor shall declare in writing to the Owner and the Design Professional that the work has been completed in accordance with the plans and specifications, and shall request a Final Inspection of the work. Upon receipt of such notification the Design Professional shall , as quickly as practical, schedule and conduct a Final Inspection of the work and shall prepare and furnish to the Contractor a Punch List of outstanding items to be completed or corrected, all in accordance with Section 14.06 of the General Conditions. Upon completion of the Punch List items and verification by the Design Professional and the Owner as acceptable and complete, the City Council will, by Resolution, accept the project as complete for purposes of commencement of the statutory lien period. Until completion of the Punch List, however, the contract time will continue to run. SC-14 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE. In the event of an inconsistency in the Contract Documents, the order or precedence shall be as follows:

a) Agreement b) Addenda/Change Orders/Written Amendment c) Contractor's Bid d) Supplementary Conditions e) Invitation to Bid f) Instructions to Bidders g) General Conditions h) Technical Specifications i) Referenced Standard Specifications j) Drawings

With reference to the drawings, the order of precedence is as follows: Figures govern over scaled dimensions; detail drawings over general drawings; addenda/change order drawings govern over standard drawings and shop drawings. SC-15 ASSIGNMENT. Neither party to this contract shall assign or sublet his interest in this contract without written consent of the other, nor shall Contractor assign any monies due or to become due him under this contract without previous written consent of Owner, nor without the consent of the Surety unless the Surety has waived its right to notice of assignment. The Contractor shall perform at least fifty percent (50%) of all work covered in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not employ any subcontractor, other personnel or organization,

96

Whether initially or at any time during the contract time, to assist the Contractor in the execution of the Contractor’s fifty percent (50%) of the work. SC-16 PREFERENCE AND PRIORITY TO LOUISIANA RESIDENT CONTRACTORS. By statutory authority, certain preference and priority is given to Louisiana Resident Contractors in the award of public work contracts (LSA-R.S. 38:2225). If applicable, Bidder must make request in writing, to accompany bid submission. SC-17 EMERGENCY PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS. The work demands of this contract will require the Contractor to be able to respond to emergencies within one hour of notification. SC-18 COORDINATION OF WORK. The Contractor performing work under this contract shall be required to coordinate his operations with all City of Kenner and/or Parish Public Works Departments as may be required. SC-19 COOPERATION BETWEEN CONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall at all times be cognizant that other work may be under construction at the same time that this Project is active. There shall be complete cooperation with any other contractor(s) on the site or in the immediate vicinity of Contractor’s work area, and any unavoidable conflicts shall be brought immediately to the attention of the Design Professional for resolution. SC-20 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE. Prior to the commencement of construction the Design Professional shall schedule a Pre-Construction Conference. The Contractor shall be represented at the conference by the Project Superintendent and any other personnel as Contractor may desire. An Owner’s representative shall be present, and where advisable, representatives of utility companies shall also be present. SC-21 SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND PROJECT WORK SCHEDULE. The Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional a detailed Schedule of Values and a complete work schedule (CPM schedule) prior to the issuance of a “Notice to Proceed”. SC-22 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES. In Article 6, Section 6.17 Paragraphs A, B, and D of the General Conditions, the words “...and approved...” are hereby deleted. SC-23 ACCEPTANCE OF INSURANCE. The first sentence of Article 5, Section 5.09 of the General Conditions is hereby amended to read as follows: If Owner has any objections to the coverage afforded by, or any other provision of the insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with Section 5.04 on the basis of its not complying with the Contract Documents, Owner will notify Contractor in writing thereof within thirty (30) calendar days of the date of delivery of such certificates to Owner in accordance with Section 2.01.

END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

EJCDC C-700 Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Copyright © 2002 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

GC-0

This document has important legal consequences; consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its use or modification. This document should be adapted to the particular circumstances of the contemplated Project and the Controlling Law.

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS

OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

Prepared by

ENGINEERS JOINT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS COMMITTEE

and

Issued and Published Jointly By

PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS IN PRIVATE PRACTICE a practice division of the

NATIONAL SOCIETY OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS ___________________

AMERICAN COUNCIL OF ENGINEERING COMPANIES

___________________

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS

This document has been approved and endorsed by

The Associated General Contractors of America

Construction Specifications Institute


GC-1

Copyright ©2002

National Society of Professional Engineers 1420 King Street, Alexandria, VA 22314

American Council of Engineering Companies

1015 15th Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005

American Society of Civil Engineers 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, VA 20191-4400

These General Conditions have been prepared for use with the Suggested Forms of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Nos. C-520 or C-525 (2002 Editions). Their provisions are interrelated and a change in one may necessitate a change in the other. Comments concerning their usage are contained in the EJCDC Construction Documents, General and Instructions (No. C-001) (2002 Edition). For guidance in the preparation of Supplementary Conditions, see Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions (No. C-800) (2002 Edition).


GC-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY .............................................................................................................. 6

1.01 Defined Terms .......................................................................................................................................................... 6 1.02 Terminology ............................................................................................................................................................. 8

ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS ............................................................................................................................... 9 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ......................................................................................................... 9 2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 9 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ........................................................................................... 9 2.04 Starting the Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 9 2.05 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................................................... 9 2.06 Preconstruction Conference .................................................................................................................................... 9 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................................................... 9

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE ...................................................................... 10 3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................................................... 10 3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................................................. 10 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................................................ 10 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .............................................................................................. 11 3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................................................... 11 3.06 Electronic Data ...................................................................................................................................................... 11

ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS ................................................................................................ 11

4.01 Availability of Lands .............................................................................................................................................. 11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................................................ 12 4.04 Underground Facilities .......................................................................................................................................... 13 4.05 Reference Points .................................................................................................................................................... 13 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site ......................................................................................................... 13

ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................................................. 14 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds .............................................................................................................. 14 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers .............................................................................................................................. 15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance ........................................................................................................................................ 15 5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance ........................................................................................................................... 15 5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................................................. 16 5.06 Property Insurance ................................................................................................................................................ 16 5.07 Waiver of Rights ..................................................................................................................................................... 17 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds .................................................................................................... 17 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace ....................................................................................... 17 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer ..................................................................................... 18

ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES .......................................................................................................... 18 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence .......................................................................................................................... 18 6.02 Labor; Working Hours ........................................................................................................................................... 18 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment....................................................................................................................... 18 6.04 Progress Schedule .................................................................................................................................................. 18 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ................................................................................................................................. 19 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................................................... 20 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties ...................................................................................................................................... 21 6.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................................................... 21 6.09 Laws and Regulations ............................................................................................................................................ 21 6.10 Taxes ...................................................................................................................................................................... 22 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................................................... 22 6.12 Record Documents ................................................................................................................................................. 22 6.13 Safety and Protection ............................................................................................................................................. 22 6.14 Safety Representative ............................................................................................................................................. 23


GC - 3

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs ........................................................................................................................ 23 6.16 Emergencies ........................................................................................................................................................... 23 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples ................................................................................................................................. 23 6.18 Continuing the Work .............................................................................................................................................. 24 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee .................................................................................................... 24 6.20 Indemnification ...................................................................................................................................................... 24 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services .......................................................................................................... 25

ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE ......................................................................................................................... 25 7.01 Related Work at Site ............................................................................................................................................... 25 7.02 Coordination .......................................................................................................................................................... 26 7.03 Legal Relationships ................................................................................................................................................ 26

ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES ...................................................................................................................... 26 8.01 Communications to Contractor .............................................................................................................................. 26 8.02 Replacement of Engineer ....................................................................................................................................... 26 8.03 Furnish Data .......................................................................................................................................................... 26 8.04 Pay When Due ....................................................................................................................................................... 26 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests .............................................................................................................. 26 8.06 Insurance ............................................................................................................................................................... 26 8.07 Change Orders ....................................................................................................................................................... 26 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .......................................................................................................................... 26 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................................... 27 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ................................................................................................ 27 8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ..................................................................................................................... 27

ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION ..................................................................................... 27 9.01 Owner’s Representative ......................................................................................................................................... 27 9.02 Visits to Site ........................................................................................................................................................... 27 9.03 Project Representative ........................................................................................................................................... 27 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work .............................................................................................................................. 27 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work ....................................................................................................................................... 27 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments ..................................................................................................... 28 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work ...................................................................................................................... 28 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................................................... 28 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ..................................................................................... 28

ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS ........................................................................................................... 28 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................................................... 28 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................................................... 29 10.03 Execution of Change Orders .................................................................................................................................. 29 10.04 Notification to Surety ............................................................................................................................................. 29 10.05 Claims .................................................................................................................................................................... 29

ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................. 30 11.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................................................... 30 11.02 Allowances ............................................................................................................................................................. 31 11.03 Unit Price Work ..................................................................................................................................................... 31

ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES ..................................................... 32 12.01 Change of Contract Price ...................................................................................................................................... 32 12.02 Change of Contract Times ..................................................................................................................................... 33 12.03 Delays .................................................................................................................................................................... 33

ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ....... 33 13.01 Notice of Defects .................................................................................................................................................... 33 13.02 Access to Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 33 13.03 Tests and Inspections ............................................................................................................................................. 33 13.04 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................................................... 34 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work ..................................................................................................................................... 34 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ............................................................................................................. 34 13.07 Correction Period .................................................................................................................................................. 34 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................................................... 35 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work...................................................................................................................... 35

ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION .............................................................................. 36 14.01 Schedule of Values ................................................................................................................................................. 36 14.02 Progress Payments................................................................................................................................................. 36


GC - 4

14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title .............................................................................................................................. 37 14.04 Substantial Completion .......................................................................................................................................... 37 14.05 Partial Utilization .................................................................................................................................................. 38 14.06 Final Inspection ..................................................................................................................................................... 38 14.07 Final Payment ........................................................................................................................................................ 38 14.08 Final Completion Delayed ..................................................................................................................................... 39 14.09 Waiver of Claims ................................................................................................................................................... 39

ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION ......................................................................................... 39 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work ..................................................................................................................................... 39 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ........................................................................................................................... 39 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................................................... 40 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate .............................................................................................................. 40

ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION ................................................................................................................................ 41 16.01 Methods and Procedures ....................................................................................................................................... 41

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS ......................................................................................................................................... 41 17.01 Giving Notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 41 17.02 Computation of Times ............................................................................................................................................ 41 17.03 Cumulative Remedies ............................................................................................................................................. 41 17.04 Survival of Obligations .......................................................................................................................................... 41 17.05 Controlling Law ..................................................................................................................................................... 41 17.06 Headings ......................................................................................................................... 41


GC - 5

GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents and printed with initial capital letters, the terms listed below will have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda--Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement--The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment--The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos--Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Bid--The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 6. Bidder--The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to Owner. 7. Bidding Documents--The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 8. Bidding Requirements--The Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 9. Change Order--A document recommended by Engineer which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract

Times, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 10. Claim--A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim. 11. Contract--The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 12. Contract Documents-- Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Shop Drawings, other Contractor’s submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 13. Contract Price--The moneys payable by Owner to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 14. Contract Times--The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any, (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) com-plete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by Engineer’s written recommendation of final payment. 15. Contractor--The individual or entity with whom Owner has entered into the Agreement. 16. Cost of the Work--See Paragraph 11.01.A for definition. 17. Drawings--That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Shop Drawings and other Contractor submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 18. Effective Date of the Agreement--The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 19. Engineer--The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement. 20. Field Order--A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the Work but


GC - 6

which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 21. General Requirements--Sections of Division 1 of the Specifications. The General Requirements pertain to all sections of the Specifications. 22. Hazardous Environmental Condition--The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, or Radioactive Material in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto in connection with the Work. 23. Hazardous Waste--The term Hazardous Waste shall have the meaning provided in Section 1004 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act (42 USC Section 6903) as amended from time to time. 24. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations--Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinanc-es, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 25. Liens--Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 26. Milestone--A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate comple-tion date or time prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 27. Notice of Award--The written notice by Owner to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, Owner will sign and deliver the Agreement. 28. Notice to Proceed--A written notice given by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which the Con-tract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work under the Contract Documents. 29. Owner--The individual or entity with whom Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. 30. PCBs--Polychlorinated biphenyls. 31. Petroleum--Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils.

32. Progress Schedule--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. 33. Project--The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. 34. Project Manual--The bound documentary information prepared for bidding and constructing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual, which may be bound in one or more volumes, is contained in the table(s) of contents. 35. Radioactive Material--Source, special nucle-ar, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 36. Related Entity -- An officer, director, partner, employee, agent, consultant, or subcontractor. 37. Resident Project Representative--The autho-rized representative of Engineer who may be assigned to the Site or any part thereof. 38. Samples--Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 39. Schedule of Submittals--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 40. Schedule of Values--A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 41. Shop Drawings--All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 42. Site--Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor. 43. Specifications--That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and


GC - 7

workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. 44. Subcontractor--An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 45. Substantial Completion--The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 46. Successful Bidder--The Bidder submitting a responsive Bid to whom Owner makes an award. 47. Supplementary Conditions--That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 48. Supplier--A manufacturer, fabricator, suppli-er, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor. 49. Underground Facilities--All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 50. Unit Price Work--Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. 51. Work--The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 52. Work Change Directive--A written statement to Contractor issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen subsurface or physical conditions under which the Work is to be

performed or to emergencies. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the change ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 1.02 Terminology A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the following meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives 1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered”, “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the requirements of and information in the Contract Documents and conformance with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to the provisions of Paragraph 9.09 or any other provision of the Contract Documents. C. Day 1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. Defective 1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents, or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s -recommendation of final payment (unless responsibility for the protection thereof has been


GC - 8

assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 14.04 or 14.05).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide 1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable condition. 2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use. 4. When “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “pro-vide” is not used in connection with services, materials, or equipment in a context clearly requiring an obligation of Contractor, “provide” is implied. F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Docu-ments, words or phrases which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish. B. Evidence of Insurance: Before any Work at the Site is started, Contractor and Owner shall each deliver to the other, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance which either of them or any additional insured may reasonably request) which Contractor and Owner respectively are required to purchase and maintain in accordance with Article 5. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor up to ten printed or hard copies of the Drawings and Project Manual. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.03 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to

Proceed A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. In no event will the Contract Times com-mence to run later than the sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Agreement, whichever date is earlier. 2.04 Starting the Work A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Times commence to run. 2.05 Before Starting Construction A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement (unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for timely review: 1. a preliminary Progress Schedule; indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones specified in the Contract Documents; 2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and 3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdi-vides the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work. 2.06 Preconstruction Conference A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph 2.05.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, and maintaining required records. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to review for acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with


GC - 9

Paragraph 2.05.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer. 1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor. 2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals. 3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to component parts of the Work. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Docu-ments. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be provided whether or not specifically called for at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by Engineer as provided in Article 9. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regula-tions in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the

Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual or code, or any instruction of a Supplier shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner, or Engineer, or any of, their Related Entities, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake respon-sibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies 1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor may discover and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any standard, specification, manual or code, or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict, error, ambigu-ity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies


GC - 10

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, code, or instruction (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents); or b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents would result in viola-tion of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by either a Change Order or a Work Change Directive. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. Engineer’s approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; (Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.17.D.3); or 3. Engineer’s written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier or other individual or entity performing or furnishing all of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor, shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer or Engineer’s consultants, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any of such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and specific written verification or adaption by Engineer.

B. The prohibition of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Copies of data furnished by Owner or Engineer to Contractor or Contractor to Owner or Engineer that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. Because data stored in electronic media format can deteriorate or be modified inadvertently or otherwise without authorization of the data’s creator, the party receiving electronic files agrees that it will perform acceptance tests or procedures within 60 days, after which the receiving party shall be deemed to have accepted the data thus transferred. Any errors detected within the 60-day acceptance period will be corrected by the transferring party.. C. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator. ARTICLE 4 - AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. Owner will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. If Contractor and Owner are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of any delay in Owner’s furnishing the Site or a part thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.


GC - 11

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a mechanic's or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents; and 2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site (except Underground Facilities) that Engineer has used in preparing the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsur-face or physical condition at or contiguous to the Site that is uncovered or revealed either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connec-tion therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except as aforesaid) until receipt of written order to do so. B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A, Engineer will promptly review the pertinent condition, determine the necessity of Owner's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect thereto, and advise Owner in writing (with a copy to Contractor) of Engineer’s findings and conclusions. C. Possible Price and Times Adjustments 1. The Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, will be equitably adjusted to the extent that the existence of such differing subsurface or physical condition causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must meet any one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 4.03.A; and b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a Unit Price Basis, any adjustment in Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 9.07 and 11.03.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or


GC - 12

b. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, explo-ration, test, or study of the Site and contiguous areas required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor's making such final commitment; or c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. However, Owner and Engineer, and any of their Related Entities shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Sup-plementary Conditions: 1. Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all such information and data, b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, c. coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, during construction, and d. the safety and protection of all such Under-ground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Not Shown or Indicated

1. If an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to that owner and to Owner and Engineer. Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Under-ground Facility. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such Underground Facility. 2. If Engineer concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Work Change Directive or a Change Order will be issued to reflect and document such consequences. An equitable adjustment shall be made in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, to the extent that they are attributable to the existence or location of any Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents and that Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be aware of or to have anticipated. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, Owner or Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 4.05 Reference Points A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property monuments by professionally qualified personnel. 4.06 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of those reports and drawings relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition identified at the Site, if any, that


GC - 13

have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the general accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Except for such reliance on such “technical data,” Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their Related Entities with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or re-vealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.16.A); and (iii) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to Contractor written notice: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely. If Owner and Contractor

cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such Work stop-page or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by Contractor, either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times as a result of deleting such portion of the Work, then either party may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 7. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition: (i) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (ii) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06. G shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the conse-quences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. H. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.H shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.


GC - 14

I. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 - BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect until one year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction period specified in Paragraph 13.07, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the Contract Documents. B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Compa-nies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agent’s authority to act. C. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.01.B, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01.B and 5.02. 5.02 Licensed Sureties and Insurers A. All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Owner or Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions.

5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. B. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Contractor or any other additional insured) which Owner is required to purchase and maintain. 5.04 Contractor’s Liability Insurance A. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees; 3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor’s employees; 4. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sus-tained:

a. by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or b. by any other person for any other reason;

5. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and


GC - 15

6. claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. B. The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 5.04 shall: 1. with respect to insurance required by Paragraphs 5.04.A.3 through 5.04.A.6 inclusive, include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion regarding professional liability) Owner and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as addi-tional insureds, and include coverage for the respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of all such additional insureds, and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby; 2. include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater; 3. include completed operations insurance; 4. include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor’s indemnity obligations under Paragraphs 6.11 and 6.20; 5. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 5.03 will so provide); 6. remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.07; and 7. with respect to completed operations insur-ance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, remain in effect for at least two years after final payment.

a. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions, to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued, evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter.

5.05 Owner’s Liability Insurance A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 5.04, Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract Documents. 5.06 Property Insurance A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-mentary Conditions, Owner shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: 1. include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured; 2. be written on a Builder’s Risk “all-risk” or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations, water damage, (other than caused by flood) and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifi-cally required by the Supplementary Conditions; 3. include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property (including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects); 4. cover materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by Owner prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by Engineer; 5. allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner; 6. include testing and startup; and


GC - 16

7. be maintained in effect until final payment is made unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner, Contractor, and Engineer with 30 days written notice to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. B. Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance or additional property insurance as may be required by the Supplementary Conditions or Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. C. All the policies of insurance (and the certifi-cates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions in accor-dance with Paragraph 5.07. D. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance specified in this Paragraph 5.06 to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work to the extent of any deductible amounts that are identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions. The risk of loss within such identified deductible amount will be borne by Contractor, Subcontractors, or others suffering any such loss, and if any of them wishes property insurance coverage within the limits of such amounts, each may purchase and maintain it at the purchaser’s own expense. E. If Contractor requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under Paragraph 5.06, Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to Contractor by appropriate Change Order. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, Owner shall in writing advise Contractor whether or not such other insurance has been procured by Owner. 5.07 Waiver of Rights A. Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 5.06 will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supple-mentary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) in such policies and will provide primary coverage

for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insureds or additional insureds thereunder. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, and Engineer, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner as trustee or otherwise payable under any policy so issued. B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them for: 1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner; and 2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization pursuant to Paragraph 14.05, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 14.04, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 14.07. C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss referred to in Paragraph 5.07.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them. 5.08 Receipt and Application of Insurance Proceeds A. Any insured loss under the policies of insurance required by Paragraph 5.06 will be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the


GC - 17

requirements of any applicable mortgage clause and of Paragraph 5.08.B. Owner shall deposit in a separate account any money so received and shall distribute it in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced, the moneys so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof covered by an appropriate Change Order . B. Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within 15 days after the occurrence of loss to Owner’s exercise of this power. If such objection be made, Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with the insurers in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If no such agreement among the parties in interest is reached, Owner as fiduciary shall adjust and settle the loss with the insurers and, if required in writing by any party in interest, Owner as fiduciary shall give bond for the proper performance of such duties. 5.09 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace A. If either Owner or Contractor has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the other party in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the objecting party shall so notify the other party in writing within 10 days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested) required by Paragraph 2.01.B. Owner and Contractor shall each provide to the other such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the other may reasonably request. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required of such party by the Contract Documents, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent bonds or insurance to protect such other party's interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage, and a Change Order shall be issued to adjust the Contract Price accordingly. 5.10 Partial Utilization, Acknowledgment of Property Insurer A. If Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 14.05, no such use or occupancy shall commence before the insurers providing the property insurance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06 have acknowledged notice thereof and in writing effected any changes in coverage necessitated thereby. The insurers providing the property insurance shall consent by endorsement on the policy or policies,

but the property insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or occupancy. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of Owner or Engineer in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident superin-tendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor’s representative at the Site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications given to or received from the superintendent shall be binding on Contractor. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Docu-ments. Contractor shall at all times maintain good disci-pline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor will not permit the performance of Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner’s written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld) given after prior written notice to Engineer. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other


GC - 18

facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. 6.04 Progress Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Times. Such adjust-ments will comply with any provisions of the General Re-quirements applicable thereto. 2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Times may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to Engineer for review under the circumstances described below. 1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the

proposed item may, in Engineer’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole, 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times, and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents.

2. Substitute Items

a. If in Engineer’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it will be considered a proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. c. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 6.05.A.2.d, as supplemented in the General Requirements and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under the circumstances. d. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:


GC - 19

1) shall certify that the proposed substi-tute item will:

a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design, b) be similar in substance to that specified, and c) be suited to the same use as that specified;

2) will state:

a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will preju-dice Contractor’s achievement of Substantial Completion on time; b) whether or not use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Docu-ments (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; and c) whether or not incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in con-nection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;

3) will identify:

a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified , and b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services;

4) and shall contain an itemized esti-mate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change,

B. Substitute Construction Methods or Proce-dures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction approved by Engineer. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow Engineer, in Engineer’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. The requirements

for review by Engineer will be similar to those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. Engineer’s Evaluation: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by either a Change Order for a substitute or an approved Shop Drawing for an “or equal.” Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination. D. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute. E. Engineer’s Cost Reimbursement: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B Whether or not Engineer approves a substitute item so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at Contractor’s expense. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall not employ any Subcon-tractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity (including those acceptable to Owner as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.B), whether initially or as a replacement, against whom Owner may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. B. If the Supplementary Conditions require the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to be submitted to Owner in advance for acceptance by Owner by a specified date prior to the Effective Date of the Agreement, and if Contractor has submitted a list thereof in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, Owner’s acceptance (either in writing or by failing to make written objection thereto by the date indicated for acceptance or objection


GC - 20

in the Bidding Documents or the Contract Documents) of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified may be revoked on the basis of reason-able objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by the difference in the cost occasioned by such replacement, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued . No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, shall consti-tute a waiver of any right of Owner or Engineer to reject defective Work. C. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity, nor 2. shall anything in the Contract Documents create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. D. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. E. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities per-forming or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Engineer through Contractor. F. The divisions and sections of the Specifica-tions and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcon-tractors or Suppliers or delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appro-priate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Whenever any such agreement is with a Subcontractor or Supplier who is listed as an additional insured on the property insurance provided in

Paragraph 5.06, the agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier will contain provisions whereby the Subcontractor or Supplier waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, and Engineer,, and all other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insureds or additional insureds (and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them) for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work. If the insurers on any such policies require separate waiver forms to be signed by any Subcontractor or Supplier, Contractor will obtain the same. 6.07 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.08 Permits A. Unless otherwise provided in the Supple-mentary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement. Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.


GC - 21

6.09 Laws and Regulations A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applica-ble to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor’s primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids (or, on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids) having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work shall be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 6.10 Taxes A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which are applicable during the performance of the Work. 6.11 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas 1. Contractor shall confine construction equip-ment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by

negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 3. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the com-pletion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. D. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.12 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all approved Shop Drawings will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, Samples, and Shop Drawings will be delivered to Engi-neer for Owner. 6.13 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precau-tions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the


GC - 22

safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.13.A.2 or 6.13.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of Draw-ings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or , or anyone employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them). D. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 14.07.B that the Work is acceptable (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion). 6.14 Safety Representative A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

6.15 Hazard Communication Programs A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordi-nating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.16 Emergencies A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protec-tion of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued. 6.17 Shop Drawings and Samples A. Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accor-dance with the acceptable Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require. 1. Shop Drawings

a. Submit number of copies specified in the General Requirements. b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.

2. Samples: Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accor-dance with the acceptable schedule of Shop Drawings and Sample submittals.

a. Submit number of Samples specified in the Specifications. b. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.17.D.


GC - 23

B. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals , any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. Submittal Procedures 1. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified:

a. all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information with respect thereto; b. the suitability of all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; c. all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; and d. shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor’s review and approval of that submittal. 3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any variations, that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents. This notice shall be both a written communication separate from the Shop Drawing’s or Sample Submittal; and, in addition, by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing or Sample submit-ted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. D. Engineer’s Review 1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with

the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-ments. 2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of con-struction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer’s review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph 6.17.C.1. E. Resubmittal Procedures 1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of cor-rected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. 6.18 Continuing the Work A. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as permitted by Paragraph 15.04 or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.19 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its Related Entities shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Sub-contractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or


GC - 24

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by Engineer; 2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment related thereto by Owner; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; 5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of acceptabil-ity by Engineer; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by Owner. 6.20 Indemnification A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable . B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, partners, or employees by any employ-ee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the

indemnification obligation under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 6.20.A shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of: 1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve, maps, Drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or 2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. 6.21 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to Engineer. C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.21, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria


GC - 25

given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.17.D.1. E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 - OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with Owner’s employees, or via other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Con-tract Documents, then: 1. written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and 2. if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times that should be allowed as a result of such other work, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, proper and safe access to the Site, a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and shall properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this Paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s

failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.02 Coordination A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Condi-tions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibili-ties will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility for such coordination. 7.03 Legal Relationships A. Paragraphs 7.01.A and 7.02 are not applicable for utilities not under the control of Owner. B. Each other direct contract of Owner under Paragraph 7.01.A shall provide that the other contractor is liable to Owner and Contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by Contractor as a result of the other contractor’s actions or inactions. C. Contractor shall be liable to Owner and any other contractor for the reasonable direct delay and disruption costs incurred by such other contractor as a result of Contractor’s action or inactions. ARTICLE 8 - OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. 8.02 Replacement of Engineer A. In case of termination of the employment of Engineer, Owner shall appoint an engineer to whom Contractor makes no reasonable objection, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.


GC - 26

8.03 Furnish Data A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents. 8.04 Pay When Due A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in Paragraphs 14.02.C and 14.07.C. 8.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner’s duties in respect of providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by Engineer in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.06 Insurance A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, in respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and property insur-ance are set forth in Article 5. 8.07 Change Orders A. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in Paragraph 10.03. 8.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03.B. 8.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undis-closed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06.

8.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements A. If and to the extent Owner has agreed to furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents, Owner’s responsibility in respect thereof will be as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 9 - ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 Owner’s Representative A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and responsi-bilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and will not be changed without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.02 Visits to Site A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at inter-vals appropriate to the various stages of construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against defective Work. B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 9.09. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of Engineer's visits or observations of Contractor's Work Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Project Representative


GC - 27

A. If Owner and Engineer agree, Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative to assist Engineer in providing more extensive observation of the Work. The authority and responsibilities of any such Resident Project Representative and assistants will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 9.09. If Owner designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent or employee, the responsibilities and authority and limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.04 Authorized Variations in Work A. Engineer may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Docu-ments. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. If Owner or Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, and the parties are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if any, of any such adjustment , a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 9.05 Rejecting Defective Work A. Engineer will have authority to reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.06 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments A. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see Paragraph 6.17. B. In connection with Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, see Paragraph 6.21. C. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders, see Articles 10, 11, and 12.

D. In connection with Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment, see Article 14. 9.07 Determinations for Unit Price Work A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. 9.08 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. All matters in question and other matters between Owner and Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due relating to the acceptability of the Work, and the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance of the Work, will be referred initially to Engineer in writing within 30 days of the event giving rise to the question B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written decision on the issue referred. If Owner or Contractor believe that any such decision entitles them to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times or both, a Claim may be made under Paragraph 10.05. The date of Engineer’s decision shall be the date of the event giving rise to the issues referenced for the purposes of Paragraph 10.05.B. C. Engineer’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. D. When functioning as interpreter and judge under this Paragraph 9.08, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. 9.09 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 9 or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in


GC - 28

contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will not be respon-sible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the Work. D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by Paragraph 14.07.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the require-ments of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. E. The limitations upon authority and responsi-bility set forth in this Paragraph 9.09 shall also apply to, the Resident Project Representative, if any, and assistants, if any. ARTICLE 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work by a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). B. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to, or on the amount or extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a Claim may be made therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05.

10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A.Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.16 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.04.B. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropri-ate Change Orders recommended by Engineer covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08.A or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; and 3. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to Paragraph 10.05; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule as provided in Paragraph 6.18.A. 10.04 Notification to Surety A. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times) is required by the provisions of any bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.05 Claims A. Engineer’s Decision Required: All Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the Engineer for decision. A decision by Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of any rights or remedies either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Claims.


GC - 29

B. Notice: Written notice stating the general nature of each Claim, shall be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with the party making the Claim. Notice of the amount or extent of the Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract within 60 days after the start of such event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01.B. A Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02.B. Each Claim shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant believes it is entitled as a result of said event. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). C. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the claimant or the last submittal of the opposing party, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Claim in whole or in part, 2. approve the Claim, or 3. notify the parties that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Claim if, in the Engineer’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Engineer to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. D. In the event that Engineer does not take action on a Claim within said 30 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. E. Engineer’s written action under Paragraph 10.05.C or denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. F. No Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.05. ARTICLE 11 - COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the Claim. Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, such costs shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of the Project, shall include only the following items, and shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B. 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time at the Site. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make pay-ments, in which case the cash discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates and refunds and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.


GC - 30

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to Engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and mainte-nance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the perfor-mance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equip-ment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable, imposed by Laws and Regulations. e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by

Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with Paragraph 5.06.D), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. h. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone service at the Site, expresses, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attor-neys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.


GC - 31

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not specifically and expressly included in Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B. C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order or when a Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. B. Cash Allowances 1. Contractor agrees that:

a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation , overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance

1. Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.07. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. Owner or Contractor may make a Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 10.05 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and signifi-cantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect any other item of Work; and 3. Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. ARTICLE 12 - CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIMES 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:


GC - 32

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by applica-tion of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2); or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement to a lump sum is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2, the Contractor’s fee shall be 15 percent; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent; c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraph 12.01.C.2.a is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor; d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.4, 11.01.A.5, and 11.01.B; e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a through 12.01.C.2.e, inclusive.

12.02 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall be based on written notice submitted by the party making the Claim to the Engineer and the other party to the Contract in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 10.05. B. Any adjustment of the Contract Times covered by a Change Order or any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times will be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Article 12. 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Times will be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Claim is made therefor as provided in Paragraph 12.02.A. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by Owner, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplat-ed by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. B. If Owner, Engineer, or other contractors or utility owners performing other work for Owner as contemplated by Article 7, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times , or both. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C If Contractor is delayed in the performance or progress of the Work by fire, flood, epidemic, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, acts or failures to act of utility owners not under the control of Owner, or other causes not the fault of and beyond control of Owner and Contractor, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Times, if such adjustment is essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph 12.03.C. D. Owner, Engineer and the Related Entities of each of them shall not be liable to Contractor for any


GC - 33

claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of Engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. E. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. ARTICLE 13 - TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects A. Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. All defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspecting, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s Site safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents except: 1. for inspections, tests, or approvals covered by Paragraphs 13.03.C and 13.03.D below; 2. that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Paragraph 13.04.B shall be paid as provided in said Paragraph 13.04.C; and

3. as otherwise specifically provided in the Con-tract Documents. C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, or approvals required for Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to Owner and Engineer. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense. B. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. C. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be


GC - 34

entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. D. If, the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 13.05 Owner May Stop the Work A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents) or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by Owner or permitted by Laws and Regulations as

contemplated in Paragraph 6.11.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner’s written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work re-moved and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications . D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner (and, prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, Engineer) prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or


GC - 35

arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to Owner’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness) and the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor pursuant to this sentence. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. If the acceptance occurs after such recommendation, an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.09 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, take posses-sion of Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the Site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of the adjustment, Owner may make a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed or

damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values A. The Schedule of Values established as provid-ed in Paragraph 2.07.A will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Applica-tion for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments 1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner. 2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Agreement.


GC - 36

B. Review of Applications 1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s observations on the Site of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design professional and on Engineer's review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief:

a. the Work has progressed to the point indicat-ed; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accor-dance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Substantial Completion, to the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, to a final determination of quantities and classifications for Unit Price Work under Paragraph 9.07, and to any other qualifications stated in the recommendation); and c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsi-bilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents; or b. that there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment, will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work, or d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract Price, or e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated in Paragraph 14.02.B.2. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment or, because of subse-quently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, revise or revoke any such payment recommendation previously made, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged, requiring correction or replace-ment; b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or d. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A.

C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.02.D) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor. D. Reduction in Payment 1. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer because:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s performance or furnish-ing of the Work;


GC - 37

b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. Owner has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.5.a through 14.02.B.5.c or Paragraph 15.02.A.

2. If Owner refuses to make payment of the full amount recommended by Engineer, Owner will give Contractor immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action and promptly pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner’s satisfaction the reasons for such action. 3. If it is subsequently determined that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified, the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by Paragraph 14.02.C.1. 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Substantial Completion A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete (except for items specifically listed by Contractor as incomplete) and request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, , Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a tentative certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial Completion. There shall be attached to the certificate a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven

days after receipt of the tentative certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any provisions of the certificate or attached list. If, after considering such objections, Engineer concludes that the Work is not substantially complete, Engineer will within 14 days after submission of the tentative certificate to Owner notify Contractor in writing, stating the reasons therefor. If, after consideration of Owner’s objections, Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will within said 14 days execute and deliver to Owner and Contractor a definitive certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or correct-ed) reflecting such changes from the tentative certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner. D. At the time of delivery of the tentative certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer will deliver to Owner and Contractor a written recommen-dation as to division of responsibilities pending final payment between Owner and Contractor with respect to security, operation, safety, and protection of the Work, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties and guarantees. Unless Owner and Contractor agree otherwise in writing and so inform Engineer in writing prior to Engineer’s issuing the definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, Engineer’s aforesaid recommendation will be binding on Owner and Contractor until final payment. E. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to complete or correct items on the tentative list. 14.05 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work, subject to the following condi-tions. 1. Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use or occupy any such part of the Work which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 2. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substan-


GC - 38

tially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. 3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of Paragraph 14.04 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 5.10 regarding property insurance. 14.06 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment 1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents (as provided in Paragraph 6.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.04.B.7; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all Claims against Owner that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

d. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 14.07.A.2 and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance 1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of Paragraph 14.09. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicat-ing in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. C. Payment Becomes Due 1. Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the Application for Payment and accompanying docu-mentation, the amount recommended by Engineer, less any sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and , will be paid by Owner to Contractor. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed A. If, through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment (for Work fully completed and accepted) and recommendation of


GC - 39

Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.01, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. 14.09 Waiver of Claims A. The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: 1. a waiver of all Claims by Owner against Contractor, except Claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 14.06, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor’s continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and 2. a waiver of all Claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in accordance with the requirements herein and expressly acknowledged by Owner in writing as still unsettled. ARTICLE 15 - SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by notice in writing to Contractor and Engineer which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be granted an adjust-ment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes a Claim therefor as provided in Paragraph 10.05. 15.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient

skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04); 2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor’s disregard of the authority of Engineer; or 4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02.A occur, Owner may, after giving Contractor (and surety ) seven days written notice of its intent to terminate the services of Contractor: 1. exclude Contractor from the Site, and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor’s tools, appliances, construction equipment, and machinery at the Site, and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), 2. incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and 3. complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient. C. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 15.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Owner arising out of or relating to completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. D. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B and 15.02.C, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice.


GC - 40

E. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability. F. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.01.A, the termination procedures of that bond shall supersede the provisions of Paragraphs 15.02.B, and 15.02.C. 15.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; 3. all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers, and others; and 4. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (i) the Work is suspended for more than 90 consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (ii) Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or (iii) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Contract and

recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph 15.03. B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.04 are not intended to preclude Contractor from making a Claim under Paragraph 10.05 for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted by this Paragraph. ARTICLE 16 - DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either Owner or Contractor may request mediation of any Claim submitted to Engineer for a decision under Paragraph 10.05 before such decision becomes final and binding. The mediation will be governed by the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association in effect as of the Effective Date of the Agreement. The request for mediation shall be submitted in writing to the American Arbitration Association and the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.05.E. B. Owner and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be concluded within 60 days of filing of the request. The date of termination of the mediation shall be determined by application of the mediation rules referenced above. C. If the Claim is not resolved by mediation, Engineer’s action under Paragraph 10.05.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.05.C.3 or 10.05.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, Owner or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any dispute resolution process provided for in the Supplementary Conditions, or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Claim to another dispute resolution process, or 3. gives written notice to the other party of their intent to submit the Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction.


GC - 41

ARTICLE 17 - MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.02 Computation of Times A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available

hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regula-tions, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 17.04 Survival of Obligations A. All representations, indemnifications, warran-ties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Docu-ments, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Controlling Law A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located. 17.06 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions.

CITY OF KENNER WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT NO. 3 GENERATOR BANKING

SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS / REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. The work under this contract consists of a base bid and three (3) alternate bids.

B. The base bid consists of the construction of facilities and installation of equipment at Wastewater Treatment Plant No. 3 in Kenner, LA associated with relocating three (3) existing generator sets, providing two (2) new generator sets, and providing additional transfer switches, distribution equipment, and paralleling switchgear and controls required for establishing a 3.4-megawatt standby power system (upgradable to 4-megawatt) complete with system monitoring, controls, and operator interfaces.

C. Alternate Bid No. 1 consists of providing facilities and equipment associated with a large capacity, on-site diesel fuel storage and distribution system complete with supply and return pumps and piping, fuel polishing system, and remote fuel fill box. This system will automatically fill the day tanks under the generator sets included in the base bid so that day tanks will not need to be manually filled.

D. Alternate Bid No. 2 consists of providing equipment for the connection of portable, roll-up generators as a backup to permanently installed equipment.

E. Alternate Bid No. 3 consists of providing lighting and associated controls for night work at the new generator pad.

F. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services, and incidentals

to complete all work required by these specifications and as shown on the drawings. G. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for continuous service,

and shall include repairs, replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused during this construction.

H. The Contractor shall furnish and install all materials, equipment, and labor which is

reasonably and properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work, whether specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or not.

1.2 CONTRACTS

A. The Contract consists of lump sum bid items. The lump sum price shall include all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to construct the work complete in place. No extras shall be granted for any additional work unless specifically defined as a unit price


SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2

item. 1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

A. All work to be done under this contract shall be done with minimum inconvenience to the plant. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with Veolia to insure plant operations are maintained, including backup power systems, to the maximum extent possible.

B. Construct work in stages to accommodate the Owner's use of the premises during the

construction period; coordinate the construction schedule and operations with the Owner's representative.

1.4 CONSTRUCTION AREAS

A. Contractor shall limit his use of the construction areas for work and storage to allow for work by other contractors and for Owner use.

B. Coordinate use of work site under direction of Engineer. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under this

contract, stored on the site. D. Move any stored products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of the

Owner or separate contractor. E. Obtain and pay for the use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations.

1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Owner will have full access to and use of all existing plant during the entire period of construction for the conduct of his normal operations. Cooperate with Owner's representative in all construction operations to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner usage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION NOT USED

END OF SECTION 01010


CONTROL OF WORK 01015 - 1

SECTION 01015

CONTROL OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK PROGRESS

A. The Contractor shall furnish personnel and equipment which will be efficient, appropriate, and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress which will insure the completion of the work within the time stipulated in the Proposal. If at any time such personnel or equipment appears to the Engineer to be inefficient, inappropriate, or insufficient for securing the quality of work required for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to increase the efficiency, change the character, or increase the personnel and equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of progress required.

1.2 PRIVATE LAND

A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements, except by permission of the Owner.

1.3 WORK LOCATIONS

A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the drawings, but the Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other reasons. Where fittings are noted on the drawings, such notation is for the Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing different or additional items where required.

1.4 OPEN EXCAVATIONS

A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary fences, barricades or caution signs, lights, coverings and other means to prevent accidents to persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating travel by pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for access to private property during construction shall be removed when no longer required. If the excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic at any point, the Engineer may require special construction procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain open overnight.



B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to open trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, or other obstacles which could be dangerous to the public shall be barricaded and well lighted at all times when construction is not in progress.

1.5 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES

A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or other related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system as little as possible. He shall notify the Engineer well in advance of any requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a utility, so that necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate agency.

B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the

Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines. Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with existing conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in scheduling work.

1.6 TEST-PITS.

A. Test pits for the purpose of locating underground pipelines or structures in advance of the construction shall be excavated and backfilled by the Contractor prior to commencement of construction. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. This work shall be considered incidental to the construction and no additional payment will be made for exploration.

1.7 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY.

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private

property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by the Contractor, at his expense to a condition similar or equal to that existing before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in another manner acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Along the location of this work all fences, walks, brushes, trees, shrubbery, and

other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as conditions permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction which have been damaged by the Contractor shall be re-graded and seeded.



C. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury. The Contractor shall trim all branches that are liable to damage because of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without prior notification of the Engineer. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting according to approved methods, using only approved tools and materials.

D. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features along the

line of work shall be a part of the work under the contract, and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the lump sum price.

1.8 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES.

A. The Contractor shall allow a thirty day notice to, and coordinate with, the Owner’s Contract Operator for obtaining water service connection. The Contractor shall provide all facilities necessary to convey the water from the source to the points of use in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall pay all costs for necessary taps, water metering and all other charges for water use associated with his work.

B. Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Owner’s Contract Operator, written

approval from the Jefferson Parish Water Department shall be obtained for water hydrant usage. Hydrants shall only be operated under the supervision of the Water Department personnel of the Parish.

1.9 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW.

A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains, and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall immediately cart away and remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure of maintaining existing flow shall be fully discussed with the Engineer well in advance of the interruption of any flow.

1.10 CLEANUP.

A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his operations in as clean and neat a condition as is possible. He shall dispose of all residue resulting from the construction work and, at the conclusion of the work, he shall remove and haul away any surplus excavation, broken pavement, lumber, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse remaining from the construction operations, and shall leave the entire site of the work in a neat and orderly condition.

1.11 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT.



A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this contract shall cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or required.

B. Cutting and patching, drilling, and fitting shall be carried out where required by the

trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated herein or directed by the Engineer.

1.12 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT

A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from damage in any way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads on it shall be allowed and all portions damaged shall be reconstructed by the Contractor at his own expense.

B. All structures shall be protected in a manner approved by the Engineer. If, in the

final inspection of the work, any defects, faults, or omissions are found, the Contractor shall cause the same to be repaired or removed and replaced by proper materials and workmanship without extra compensation for the materials and labor required. Further, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the satisfactory maintenance and repair of the construction and other work undertaken herein, for at least the guarantee period described in the contract.

1.13 MAINTENANCE OF SEWER HOUSE SERVICES

A. At all times, continuous sewer service must be maintained to all house connections.

1.14 INTERFERENCES

A. An interference, for the purposes of this project, shall be defined as any interruption

of plant functions or operations, including those that minimize plant capacity. The plant will be fully operational throughout construction, and care shall be taken not to interfere with normal plant operations.

B. Unplanned interferences shall be amended as rapidly as possible. Contractor shall bear the costs of remediating unplanned interferences up front until contract modifications, if deemed necessary, can be executed.

C. It is acknowledged that some interferences will be unavoidable. Planned interferences shall be fully coordinated with the Engineer and Owner’s Contract Operator.

D. Continuous operation of the plant during construction is a condition of this contract. Unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer and Contract Operator, the maximum time that planned interferences are allowed to remain in effect shall be limited to four consecutive hours in any 48 hour period.

E. Planned interferences less than or equal to 4 hours in duration shall be performed between the hours of midnight and 6:00 a.m. and during periods of dry weather.



F. Before implementing planned interferences in excess of 4 hours, Contractor shall provide temporary equipment, systems, utilities, etc., including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Temporary power. 2. Temporary bypasses. 3. Temporary pumping. 4. Emptying, disposing and cleaning of any existing facility or structure.

G. For all planned interferences, the Contractor shall submit an Interference Plan for review and approval by the Engineer and Owner’s Contract Operator. Plan shall be submitted a minimum of 14 days prior to the planned interference and shall include the following, at a minimum:

1. Identify functions and/or operations impacted by the planned interference. 2. Identify the equipment and / or systems that will be impacted by the planned

interference. 3. Identify the anticipated length of time the interference will be required. 4. Identify temporary equipment and / or systems that will be provided if the

interference is anticipated to last more than 4 hours. H. In all cases the written approval of the Contractor’s Interference Plan by the

Engineer shall obtained at least 24 hours in advance of the planned interference. I. The City of Kenner and plant operators will cooperate to the extent permitted by

the circumstances. However, the Contractor’s work shall be scheduled to hold the number and duration of planned interferences to an absolute minimum.





THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050-1

SECTION 01050

FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering services and field surveying required for Project. 1. Survey work required in execution of Project. 2. Civil, structural or other professional engineering services specified, or required

to execute Contractor's construction methods. 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR OR ENGINEER

A. Registered professional engineer or registered land surveyor of the discipline required for the specific service of the Project, licensed in the State of Louisiana and acceptable to the Owner.

1.4 QUALITY CRITERIA

A. Contractor shall perform the following: 1. Verify existing grades prior to beginning site preparation. If existing

grades are at variance with drawings, notify Engineer and receive instructions prior to proceeding.

2. Verify limits of the site preparation and earthwork operations. Locate adjacent buildings and appurtenances.

3. Establish bench marks outside of working limits. Establish two benchmarks, located on the project site, as widely separated as possible.

4. Verify utility locations, including new construction and existing active and inactive utilities encountered during construction activity.

B. Notify Engineer, in writing of on-site conditions which are at variance with the

Contract Documents. Compare variations in locations, level, plumbness and deflection with allowable tolerances given in the Contract Documents.



1.5 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS

A. The basic horizontal and vertical control points for the Project should be those designated on Drawings. Contractor shall verify all existing grades prior to beginning work on the site.

B. Contractor shall locate verify and protect control points prior to starting work, and

preserve all permanent reference points during construction.

1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to Engineer. 2. Report to Engineer when any reference point is lost or destroyed, or required

relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. 3. Require surveyor to replace Project control points which may be lost or destroyed. a. Establish replacements based on original survey control.

1.6 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish temporary bench marks as needed referenced to data established by survey

control points. Record all locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means. C. From time to time, as directed by the Engineer, verify layouts by same methods.

1.7 RECORDS

A. Maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey work as it progresses. 1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name and address of Surveyor and Professional Engineer to Engineer. B. On request of Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering

work. C. Submit certificate signed by Registered Engineer or Surveyor certifying that

elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance, or non-conformance, with Contract Documents.

D. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing surveys

required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for examination throughout the construction period.



E. All such data shall be submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required

for final acceptance of the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED



MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150-1

SECTION 01150

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. The project shall be constructed complete as shown and indicated on the Contract Drawings and as described in the Contract Specifications.

B. Payment shall include all compensation to be received by the Contractor for furnishing

all tools, equipment, supplies, and manufactured articles, and for all labors, operations, and incidentals as necessary to complete the various items of work all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including all costs of compliance with the regulations of public agencies having jurisdiction. The Contractor is hereby on notice that no separate payment will be made for any item not specifically called out, but that is required to properly complete the project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION NOT USED PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.1 SCOPE

A. The Total Bid Price shall cover all work required by the Contract Documents. All costs in connection with the proper and successful completion of the work, including furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and appurtenances; providing all construction equipment, and tools; and performing all necessary labor and supervision to fully complete the work, shall be included in the unit an lump sum prices bid. All work not specifically set forth as a pay items in the Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the prices bid.



4.2 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES

A. All estimated quantities stipulated in the Bid Form or other Contract Documents are approximate and are to be used only (a) as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work, and (b) for the purpose of comparing the bids submitted for the work. The actual amounts of work done and materials furnished under until price items may differ from the estimated quantities. The basis of payment for work and materials will be the actual amount of work done and materials furnished. No compensation will be given for any quantities not used.

4.3 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION (ITEM NO. 1)

A. Measurement: Measurement for payment for mobilization and demobilization will be on a lump-sum basis as specified herein.

B. Payment: Payment for mobilization and demobilization shall cover all preparatory work,

obtaining all permits, insurance and bonds, movement of personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to the project site, the establishment of temporary offices, project signs and other construction facilities necessary for work on this project. It shall include removal of all personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals from the project site, removal of temporary offices and other construction facilities necessary for work on this project, all as required for the proper performance and completion of the work.

Payment will be made at the contract lump sum price, subject to the following provisions: Partial payments for mobilization and demobilization will be made in accordance with the following schedule up to a maximum of 5 percent of the total contract amount (including this item), and payment of any remaining amount will be made upon completion of all work under the contract.

Percent of Total Contract Allowable Percent of the Amount Earned Lump Sum Price for the Item 1st Partial Estimate 25% 10% 50% 25% 75% 50% 100% No price adjustments will be made for this item due to changes in the work.



4.4 SITE WORK (ITEM NO. 2)

A. Measurement: No measurement will be made for this item. Payment shall be on a lump sum basis and shall be based on the percentage of the work completed.

B. Payment: Payment shall cover all work associated with earth movement, including, but

not limited to, excavation, fill, and grading. Site work associated with the installation of underground electrical shall be paid under Bid Item No. 8, “Earth Movement for Electrical”.

4.5 PILE DRIVING (ITEM NO. 3)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all plant, labor, equipment and materials including timber

piles, driving, pile cut-offs, test piles, pile load test and all miscellaneous items and incidentals as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

4.6 CONCRETE (ITEM NO. 4)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all plant, labor, materials and equipment for concrete work

including concrete, installation, formwork, admixtures, joints, water-stops and all required miscellaneous items and incidentals as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Concrete for underground electrical ductbanks and enclosures shall be paid under Bid Item 9, “Encasements and Enclosures for Underground Electrical”.

4.7 STEEL (ITEM NO. 5)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all work associated with furnishing and installing steel

reinforcing for new pads. Steel for underground electrical ductbanks and enclosures shall be paid under Bid Item 9, “Encasements and Enclosures for Underground Electrical”.



4.8 PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS (ITEM NO. 6)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all work associated with furnishing and installing, new

“set-in-place”, modular, precast concrete buildings covered under the base bid. Payment shall include transportation, including any required permits or escorts, and required machinery for lifting and setting the building in place. Electrical equipment and devices field-installed inside of the building shall be paid under other applicable bid items.

4.9 PRE-CAST CONCRETE BUILDING (SITE BUILT) (ITEM NO. 7)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all work associated with furnishing and installing, new

“field-assembled”, modular, precast concrete buildings covered. Payment shall include transportation, including any required permits or escorts, and required machinery for lifting and setting the building in place. Electrical equipment and devices field-installed inside of the building shall be paid under other applicable bid items.

4.10 EARTH MOVEMENT FOR ELECTRICAL (ITEM NO. 8)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all excavation, trenching, sub-base, and backfill associated

with installing underground electrical conduit and enclosures.

4.11 ENCASEMENT AND ENCLOSURES FOR UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL (ITEM NO. 9)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all manholes, handholes, concrete and steel work

associated with the encasement of underground conduits. Work associated with the installation of underground conduits shall be paid under Item 10 – Electrical Materials, Methods, Devices, and Fixtures.



4.12 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS, METHODS, DEVICES, AND FIXTURES (ITEM NO. 10)


B. Payment: Payment shall cover all conduit, wire, supports, wiring devices, light fixtures,

and other miscellaneous electrical work not identified elsewhere.

4.13 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT (ITEM NO. 11)

A. Measurement: No measurement will be made for this item. Payment shall be on a lump sum basis and shall be based on the percentage of the equipment received and installed.

B. Payment: Payment shall cover all electrical distribution equipment except the paralleling

switchgear, but including transformers, panelboards, switchboards, and safety switches. 4.14 GENERATOR PARALLELING SWITCHGEAR AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS

(ITEM NO. 12)

A. Measurement: No measurement will be made for this item. Payment shall be on a lump sum basis and shall be based on the completed percentage of work associated with the receipt, installation, testing, configuring, and commissioning of the paralleling switchgear.

B. Payment: Payment shall cover all equipment and labor to furnish and install complete the

paralleling switchgear and all associated controls, programming, and interfaces for a complete working system, including local and remote user interfaces, communication and control tie-ins to transfer switches, and connections to existing transfer switches and PLC equipment. Retrofit of existing and installation of new transfer switches shall also be included in this item.

4.15 GENERATORS (ITEM NO. 13)

A. Measurement: No measurement will be made for this item. Payment shall be on a lump sum basis and shall be based on the completed percentage of work associated with the retrofit of existing generator controls and the receipt, installation, testing, configuring, and commissioning of the new generators.



B. Payment: Payment shall cover all equipment and labor required to relocate existing generators, retrofit existing generator controls, and to furnish, install, test, configure, and commission the new generator sets.

4.16 REMOVAL OF UNFORESEEN STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS, NOT TO

EXCEED (ITEM NO. 14)

A. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Removal of Unforeseen Structures and Obstructions will be on a negotiated basis.

B. Payment: Payment for Removal of Unforeseen Structures and Obstructions will be

negotiated on a case-by-case basis with payment representing full compensation for the removal of unforeseen obstructions to construction. Payment for each occurrence shall be made on a mutually agreed-upon price and must be approved by the City of Kenner Director of Public Works before beginning removal of the unforeseen structure or obstruction. Total payment under this item shall not exceed $30,000.00 as shown in the Unit Price Form (Bid Form). Payments under this item will only be made based on the unforeseen conditions encountered and according to the mutually agreed price to remove the structure or obstruction. Money for each removal will be drawn off of the “Not to Exceed” price on the bid form.

4.17 ALTERNATE NO. 1 – FUEL STORAGE AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

(ITEM NO. 15)

A. Measurement: No measurement will be made for this item. Payment shall be on a lump sum basis and shall be based on the completed percentage of work.

B. Payment: Payment shall cover all equipment, labor, installation, testing, and

commissioning associated with furnishing a complete and automatic fuel storage and distribution system. Work shall include, but not be limited to, a fuel storage tank, fuel piping, fuel transfer pumps and controls, fuel return pumps and controls, level monitoring, fuel system polishing, concrete set-in-place building for fuel system components, and remote fuel fill.

4.18 ALTERNATE NO. 2 – PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTIONS (ITEM NO. 16)





commissioning associated with furnishing and installing portable generator connection equipment. Work shall include, but not be limited to, connection boxes, distribution equipment additions, and associated underground conduit and conductors.

4.19 ALTERNATE NO. 3 – GENERATOR PAD WORK LIGHTING (ITEM NO. 17)



commissioning associated with furnishing and installing poles with floodlights and associated manual controls. Work shall include, but not be limited to, light fixtures, wood poles, bracing, safety switches, distribution equipment additions, and associated underground conduit and conductors.



REQUESTS FOR PAYMENT 01152 - 1

SECTION 01152

REQUESTS FOR PAYMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Submit applications for payment to the Engineer in accord with the schedule established by Conditions of the Contract.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Agreement between Owner and Contractor: Lump-Sum. B. Conditions of the Contract: Progress Payments, Retainages and Final Payment.

C. Section 01700: Contract Closeout.

1.3 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED

A. Submit payment requests in the form required by owner with itemized data typed on 8 ½ x 11 white paper continuation sheets.

B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet: format, schedules, line items and

values. 1.4 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. All payment requests must be accompanied by a completed pay request checklist and must include a signed affidavit regarding previous payments received, a short progress narrative describing work performed since previous payment submittal, progress photos, current project schedule and invoices for any stored materials billed. The pay request checklist form shall be as provided on page 01152-3. All items required on the checklist must be included with each pay request for the request to be considered.

B. When the Owner or the Engineer requires additional substantiating data, the

Contractor shall submit suitable information, with a cover letter.

C. Submit one copy of all data required with a cover letter for each monthly pay request. Any additional substantiating data requested shall also be submitted as required in Part B above.

1.5 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT



A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments. B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as

specified in section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. Submit applications for payment to the Engineer at the times stipulated in the Agreement.

B. Number: One original and three copies of each application package. C. When the Engineer finds application properly completed and correct, he will

transmit certificate for payment to the owner, with copy to Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 – EXECUTION NOT USED



PAY REQUEST CHECKLIST

(CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT) PARTIAL PAY REQUEST:

Construction Schedule (Updated as needed) Progress Narrative Schedule of Values Affidavit Re: Previous Payments Progress Photos List of Stored Materials Billed Invoice for Stored Materials Billed Insurance for (off Site) Stored Materials Billed

FINAL PAY REQUEST:

Application for Payment with Final Statement of Accounts

Punch List (checked off) O & M Manuals (Date Submitted) Record Drawings (Date Submitted) Spare Parts Lists Receipt for Material

(Spare Parts) Delivered To Owner

Clear L & P Certificate Warranties & Bonds Consent of Surety to Final Payment Letter from Contractor stating that

he shall warranty the work for one year following date of Substantial Completion

Verification of Bond to Remain in effect for one year from Final Payment



CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153-1

SECTION 01153

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Promptly implement change order procedures. 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time-and-material/force account

basis. 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request.

B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization.

1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the Work. 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the contractor’s employ of the

authorization of changes in the Work.

C. Owner will designate in writing the person who is authorized to execute Change Orders.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Change order: See General Conditions. 1.3 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES

A. Owner or Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Proposal Request to Contractor. Request will include: 1. Detailed description of the Change, Products, and location of the change in the

Project. 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific statement

as to whether overtime work is, or is not, authorized. 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be considered

valid. 5. Such request is for information only, and is not an instruction to execute the

changes, nor to stop work in progress.

B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to Engineer, containing: 1. Description of the proposed changes. 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time, as



appropriate. 1.4 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS

A. Support each quotation for a lump-sum proposal, and for each unit price which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow Engineer to evaluate the quotation.

B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations:

1. Labor required. 2. Equipment required. 3. Products required. a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. b. Quantities required. 4. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. 6. Overhead and profit. 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time.

C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time-and-

material/force account basis, with documentation as required for a lump-sum proposal, plus additional information. 1. Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work, and date of the

order. 2. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 4. Receipts and invoices for: a. Equipment used, listing dates and times of use. b. Products used, listing of quantities. c. Subcontracts.

1.5 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS

A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order. B. Form: Owner's Form, to be provided to the Contractor. C. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, with

attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the change. D. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract Sum

and in the Contract Time.

1.6 LUMP SUM/FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER

A. Content of Change Orders will be based on, either:



1. Engineer's Proposal Request and contractor's responsive Proposal as

mutually agreed between Owner and Contractor. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer.

B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for the

Contractor to proceed with the changes. C. Contractor may sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement

with the terms therein. D. Contractor and Subcontractors Overhead and Profit shall not exceed 15% on

Direct Cost. Prime Contractor mark-up of subcontractors direct cost shall not exceed 10%. Performance and Payment Bond Shall not exceed 1% of Change Order sub-total.

1.7 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER

A. Content of Change Orders will be based on, either: 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes. 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineers. 3. Survey of completed work.

B. The amounts of the unit prices to be:

1. Those stated in the Agreement. 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor.

C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be

determined prior to start of the work: 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Change Order as authorization for

Contractor to proceed with the changes. 2. Contractor may sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement with the

terms therein.

D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a construction change authorization

directing Contractor to proceed with the change based on unit prices, and will cite the applicable unit prices.

2. At completion of the change, Engineer will determine the cost of such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. a. Contractor shall submit documentation to establish the number of units

of each item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in

Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 4. Owner and contractor will sign and date the change Order to indicate their

agreement with the terms therein. 5. Unit Price Change Orders shall not be allowed Profit and Overhead.



1.8 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS

A. Periodically revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work, and to record the adjusted Contract Sum.

B. Periodically revise the Construction Schedule to reflect each change in Contract Time. 1. Revise subschedules to show changes for other items of work affected by the

changes.

C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in Record Documents.




PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-1

SECTION 01200

PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Owner's Representative may schedule and administer pre-bid and pre-construction meetings, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Specially called meetings may be held at the job site during normal working

hours, as necessary to expedite the progress of the job.

B. The Owner's Representative shall direct individuals attending the meeting to: 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting. 3. Preside at meetings. 4. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 5. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes.

C. Representatives of Contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings

shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. After notification that the contract has been executed and prior to the commencement of the Work at the site, the Owner's Representative shall arrange with the Owner, Using Agency and the Contractor to conduct a Pre-Construction Conference.

B. Location: Project site or where directed by the Owner's Representative. C. Attendance:

1. Owner's Representative. 2. Using Agency's Representative. 3. Engineer, his Professional Consultants, and his Project Representative. 4. Contractor. 5. Contractor's Superintendent. 6. Principal Subcontractors. 7. Principal Suppliers and manufacturer's representatives as appropriate. 8. Others as Appropriate.

D. The Contractor shall coordinate and be responsible for the attendance of his principal

Subcontractors.



E. The Contractor shall furnish at the time of the pre-construction meeting to the

Owner's Representative, the Engineer and Using Agency six (6) copies of the following documents: 1. Schedule of Values. 2. List of Subcontractors. 3. List of major material suppliers. 4. Construction Schedule. 5. Procurement Schedule. 6. Shop Drawings and Submittal Schedule 7. Excavation Plan 8. Canal Crossing Plan

F. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a

working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda will include: 1. Contractor's tentative schedules. 2. Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals. 3. Processing applications for payment. Application format. 4. Maintaining record documents. 5. Critical Work sequencing. 6. Field decisions and Change Orders. 7. Use of premised, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Owner's

needs. 8. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 9. Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid. 10. Submitted of executed bonds and insurance certificates if not previously

submitted. 1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Progress meetings will be scheduled by the Owner's Representative or the Engineer after consulting with the Owner and the Using Agency. These meetings shall be no more often than one per week as required by progress of the work, exclusive of any other meetings scheduled by the Owner's Representative, Owner or Using Agency. 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Owner's Representative to notify the Owner,

Using Agency, and the Contractor of the time, place and date of the "Progress Meeting".

2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to notify all suppliers and subcontractors.

B. The purpose of these regular meetings is to assess, realistically, the current status and

progress of the work, to effect coordination, cooperation and assistance in every practical way and to discuss changes in scheduling, and to resolve other problems that



may develop. This should maintain the progress of the project on schedule and complete the project within the contract time.

C. These meetings will be called as required during progress of the work. D. Location of the meetings: The project field office or other location where directed by

the Owner's Representative. E. Attendance:

1. Owner's representative. 2. Using Agency's representative. 3. Engineer, his professional consultants, and his Project Representative. 4. Contractor. 5. Contractor's Superintendent. 6. Principal Subcontractors, and all subcontractors active on the site. 7. Principal Suppliers and Manufacturer's Representatives. 8. Others as appropriate.

F. Suggested Agendum:

1. Review and approve minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Note field observations, problems, or conflicts. 4. Identify problems that impede Construction Schedule. 5. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 6. Revise Construction Schedule as required. 7. Plan progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 8. Coordination of schedules. 9. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required to maintain schedule. 10. Review maintenance of quality and work standards. 11. Review proposed changes for the effect on Construction Schedule, completion

date, and coordination. 12. Complete other current business.




CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01310 - 1

SECTION 01310

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

A. A Critical Path Method (CPM) construction schedule shall be used to control the work of this Contract and to provide a definitive basis for determining job progress. The construction schedule shall be prepared, maintained, and updated by the Contractor. The construction schedule shall be reviewed by the Engineer as described herein. All work shall be done in accordance with the established CPM schedule and the Contractor and his/her subcontractors shall be responsible for cooperating fully with the Engineer and the Owner in effectively utilizing the CPM schedule. It is suggested that Primavera Project Planner, Version 1.0 (or latest) for Windows shall be the software used for the CPM construction schedule.

B. The CPM schedule to be prepared and submitted by the Contractor shall consist of a

CPM network (diagram of activities) in the Time Scale Logic and a computer-generated schedule (print-out) as specified herein.

C. Within ten calendar days following written Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall

submit to the Engineer for review and approval a Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule covering the first 60 calendar days of Work to be performed.

D. The Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule shall:

1. Illustrate a feasible CPM schedule for completion of the work under this Contract

within the time specified. 2. Provide an elementary example of a CPM schedule in the format to be used for the

detailed CPM schedule specified. The Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule is not as detailed as the CPM schedule required under this Contract.

3. Establish mandatory milestone dates. Designate milestones on the Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule with asterisks.

E. The Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule is not to be considered binding except for the time required for contract completion and the mandatory milestones.

F. Contractor shall develop his own outline of the Work and prepare his proposed CPM

schedule. The computer-based schedule shall be the product of a recognized commercial computer software producer and shall meet all of the requirements defined herein.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS



A. Have the capability of preparing and utilizing the specified CPM scheduling technique. A statement of CPM capability shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer within ten calendar days after the award of the Contract and will verify that either the Contractor's organization has in-house capability qualified to use the technique or that the Contractor employs a consultant who is so qualified. Capability shall be verified by description of the construction projects to which the Contractor or his/her consultant has successfully applied the CPM scheduling technique and which were controlled throughout the duration of the project by means of systematic use and updating of a computer-based CPM schedule. The submittal shall include the name of the individual on the Contractor's staff who will be responsible for the CPM schedule and for providing the required updating information.

1.3 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS

A. The network shall show the order and inter-dependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished as planned by the Contractor. The basic concept of a network analysis diagram shall be followed to show how the start of a given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities and its completion restricts the start of following activities.

B. Detailed network activities shall include: construction activities, the submittal and

approval of samples of materials and shop drawings, the procurement of materials and equipment, fabrication of materials and equipment and their delivery, installation and testing, start-up and training. Break the work into activities with duration no longer than 20 working days each, except as to non-construction activities (such as procurement of materials and delivery of equipment) and any other activities for which the Engineer may approve the showing of longer duration. To the extent feasible, activities related to a specific physical area of the work shall be grouped on the network for ease of understanding and simplification.

C. Separate activities shall be provided for each significant identifiable function in each

trade area in each facility. Activities shall be so identified that there will be no reasonable doubt as to how much work remains on each. Specific activities which shall be included are: all sub contract work, all interface work between subcontractors and between the Contractor and subcontractors leakage tests of tanks and pipelines, electrical connections to each item of equipment, supplier and manufacturer technical assistance, mechanical connections to each item of equipment all tests concrete finishing, each item of site work, (including restraints on other activities) and all utilities, fuels and chemicals.

D. Each activity on the network shall have the following indicated on the node

representing it.

1. A single duration (i.e., the single best estimate of elapsed time considering the scope of the work involved in the activity and the resources planned for accomplishing the activity) expressed in working days.



2. A five character (or less) code indicative of the party responsible for accomplishing the activity.

3. A cost estimate for each activity which, when accumulated with the cost of all activities, equals the total contract cost. Estimated overhead and profit shall be prorated throughout all activities. Materials costs shall be assigned to delivery activities.

4. A brief description of the activity. 5. Manpower estimate for each activity.

E. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

The detailed network shall be time scaled. In addition to the brief description, submit a separate list of all activities containing a detailed narrative of the scope of each activity, including the trades and subcontractors involved, the activity duration, and the cost of each activity as it pertains to the pay items on the Schedule of Values.

F. To the extent that the network or any revision thereof shows anything not jointly

agreed upon or fails to show anything jointly agreed upon, it shall not be deemed to have been approved by the Engineer. Failure to include on a network any element of work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor from completing all work required within any applicable completion date, notwithstanding the review of the network by the Engineer.

G. Except where earlier completions are specified, CPM schedules which show

completion of all work prior to the contractor completion date may be approved by the Engineer but in no event shall they be acceptable as a basis for claim for delay against the Owner or Engineer by the Contractor.

1.4 COMPUTER-GENERATED SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. Each computer-generated schedule submittal from the CPM activity network shall include the following tabulations: a list of activities in numerical order, a list of activity precedence’s, a schedule sequenced by Early Start Date and a schedule sequenced by Total Float. Each schedule shall include the following minimum items: 1. Activity numbers 2. Estimated duration 3. Activity description 4. Early start date (calendar dated) 5. Early finish date (calendar dated) 6. Latest allowable start date (calendar dated) 7. Latest allowable finish date (calendar dated) 8. Status (whether critical) 9. Estimated cost of the activity 10. Total float and free float



B. In addition, each schedule shall be prefaced with the following summary data:

1. Contract name and number 2. Contractor's name 3. Contract duration 4. Contract schedule 5. The effective or starting date of the schedule (the date indicated in the Notice to

Proceed).

C. The work day to calendar date correlation shall be based on an 8-hour day and 40-hour week with adequate allowance for holidays, adverse weather and all other special requirements of the work.

1.5 INITIAL CONFERENCE

A. Within ten days following the receipt of the Notice to Proceed, meet with the Engineer to discuss and agree on the proposed standards for the CPM schedule. At this conference submit to the Engineer a preliminary network defining the planned operations during the first 60 calendar days after Notice to Proceed. The general approach for the balance of the project shall be indicated. Cost of activities expected to be completed or partially completed before submission and approval of the complete network shall be included.

1.6 APPROVED CPM SCHEDULE

A. Within 45 days following the receipt of the Notice to Proceed, submit two prints of the proposed CPM activity network and a computer- generated schedule to the Engineer. Following review by the Engineer and Owner, the Contractor shall incorporate the Engineer's continents into the network and submit five prints and two reproducible of the revised network and two copies of the computer-generated schedule. This final submittal shall be delivered to the Engineer within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed.

B. CPM schedules which contain activities showing negative float or which extend

beyond the contract completion date in the computer-generated schedule will not be approved.

C. The Contractor shall participate in the initial review and evaluation of the proposed

network diagram and schedule by the Engineer. The approved network shall then be approved CPM schedule to be used for planning, organizing and directing the work, and reporting progress.

D. Approval of the CPM activity network by the Engineer is advisory only and shall not

relieve the Contractor of responsibility for accomplishing the work within the contract completion date. Omissions and errors in the approved CPM schedule shall not excuse performance less than that required by the Contract Approval by the Engineer in no



way makes the Engineer an insurer of the CPM schedule's success or liable for time or cost overruns flowing from its shortcomings. The Owner hereby disclaims any obligation or liability by reason of approval by its agent, the Engineer, of the CPM schedule.

E. The CPM activity network shall be prepared in accordance with the format used in the

Preliminary Guideline CPM Schedule noted above. The network shall be submitted on sheets 24-in by 36-in and may be divided into as many separate sheets as required.

1.7 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Progress under the approved CPM schedule shall be evaluated monthly by the Contractor and the Engineer. Not less than seven days prior to each monthly progress meeting, they shall meet at the job-site and jointly evaluate the status of each activity on which work has started or is due to start, based on the preceding CPM schedule; to show actual progress, to identify those activities started and those completed during the previous period, to show the estimated time required to complete or the percent complete of each activity started but not yet completed and to reflect any changes indicated for the network. Activities shall not be considered to be complete until they are, in fact, 100 percent complete.

B. At each progress meeting, submit a narrative report based on the CPM schedule

evaluation described above, in a format agreed upon by the Contractor and the Engineer. The report shall include a description of the progress during the previous period in terms of completed activities, and explanation of each activity which is showing a delay, a description of problem areas, current and anticipated delaying factors and their estimated impact on performance of other activities and completion dates and an explanation of corrective action taken or proposed. This report, as well as the CPM Status Report, will be discussed at each progress meeting.

1.8 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE

A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current CPM schedule and CPM Status Report that delays to the critical path have resulted and the contract completion date will not be met, or when so directed by the Engineer, Contractor shall take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the Owner. He shall submit to the Engineer for approval, a written statement of the steps intended to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule.

1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will

substantially eliminate the backlog of work. 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, working days per

week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate the backlog of work.

3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of activities and comply with the revised schedule.



B. If when so requested by the Engineer, failure to submit a written statement of the steps

intended to take or should fail to take such steps as approved by the Engineer, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to increase the level of effort in man-power (trades), equipment and work schedule (overtime, weekend and holiday work, etc.) to be employed by the Contractor in order to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule and the Contractor shall promptly provide such level of effort at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.9 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT SCHEDULE AND COMPLETION TIME

A. If the Contractor desires to make changes in his/her method of operating which affect

the approved CPM schedule, he/she shall notify the Engineer in writing stating what changes are proposed and the reason for the change. If the Engineer approves these changes, the Contractor shall review and submit for approval, without additional cost to the Owner, all of the affected portions of the CPM network. The CPM schedule shall be adjusted by the Contractor only after prior approval of his/her proposed changes by the Engineer. Adjustments may consist of changing portions of the activity sequence, activity durations, division of approved activities, or other adjustments as maybe approved by the Engineer. The addition of extraneous, non-working activities and activities which add unapproved restraints to the CPM schedule shall not be approved.

B. If the completion of any activity, whether or not critical, falls more than 100 percent

behind its approved duration, submit for approval a schedule adjustment showing each such activity divided into two activities reflection completed versus uncompleted work.

C. Shop drawings which are not approved on the first submittal or within the schedule

time and equipment which do not pass the specified tests shall be immediately rescheduled.

D. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this Contract.

In the event the Contractor requests an extension of any contract completion date, he/she shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the Engineer may deem necessary to determine whether the Contractor is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of this Contract. The Engineer will after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings offset and will advise the Contractor in writing thereof. If the Engineer finds that the Contractor is entitled to any extension of any contract completion date, the Engineer's determination as to the total number of days extension shall be based upon the currently approved CPM schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next updating of the schedule. Actual delays in activities which, according to the CPM schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network will not be the basis for a change therein.

E. Each request for change in any contract completion date shall be submitted by the



Contractor to the Engineer within 30 days after the beginning of the delay for which a time extension is requested but before the date of final payment under this Contract. No time extension will be granted for requests which are not submitted within the foregoing time limit.

1. From time to time it may be necessary for the contract schedule or completion time

to be adjusted by the Owner to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the Owner or its representatives and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments or completion time extensions. Under such conditions, the Engineer will direct the Contractor to reschedule the work or contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions and the Contractor shall revise his/her schedule accordingly. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for such schedule changes except for unavoidable overall contract time extensions beyond the actual completion of all unaffected work, in which case the Contractor shall take all possible action to minimize any time extension and any additional cost to the Owner. Available float time in the CPM schedule may be used by the Owner as defined by the Engineer, as well as by the Contractor.

F. The Owner controls the float time in the approved CPM network and, therefore, without obligation to extend either the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates set out in the CPM network, the Owner may initiate changes to the work that absorb float time only. Owner initiated changes that affect the critical path on the approved CPM network shall be the sole grounds for extending (or contracting) said completion dates. Contractor-initiated changes that encroach on the float time identified in the approved CPM network may be accomplished with the Owner's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to Owner-initiated changes competing for the same float time.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED



SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 01340-1

SECTION 01340

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DOCUMENTATION

A. Designate in a separate schedule, the dates for submission and the dates that

reviewed shop drawings, product data and samples will be needed. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Drawings shall be presented in a clear and thorough manner.

B. Minimum sheet size: 11 inches by 17 inches. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation

1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls.

B. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams.

1. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information which is not applicable to the work.

2. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work.

1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to submission. B. Determine and verify:

1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data 4. Conformance with specifications 5. Confirm compatibility of equipment to be supplied within location to be

erected.



6. Confirm and Certify American Iron and Steel Compliance

C. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and of the contract documents.

D. Notify the Engineer in writing, at time of submission, of any deviations in the

submittals from requirements of the contract documents. E. Begin no fabrication or work which requires submittals until return of submittals

with Engineer approval. 1.5 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other contractor.

B. Number of Submittals required:

1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit one (1) set of reproducibles and two (2) sets of prints of each shop drawing submittal for review. After final review in which there are no exceptions noted or referenced the contractor shall furnish the Engineer six (6) complete sets for use by the Engineer and Owner.

2. Samples: Submit the number stated in each specification section.

C. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. 2. The project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. The names of:

a. Contractor b. Supplier c. Manufacturer

5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents 10. Manufacturers American Iron and Steel Certification Letter. 11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 12. A blank space for Contractor and Engineer stamps. 13. Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal,

verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination of the information within the submittal with requirements of the work and of Contract Documents.



D. Submittals should be made using the Letter of Transmittal form attached to this section as page 01340-6. Submittals received without this submittal form will be returned to the Contractor without action. Transmittals shall be numbered in sequence for each Section of the Specifications. The number after the dash indicates the Section of the Specifications, and the number before the dash is the sequence number of the transmittal (1-15100 would be the first transmittal applicable to Section 15100 of the Specifications. 2-15100 would be the second transmittal for Section 15100, etc.)

E. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and

accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a shop drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of the Contractor.

1.6 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make any corrections or changes in the submittals required by the Engineer and resubmit until no exceptions are taken by the Engineer.

B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal.

2. Indicate any changes which have been made other than those requested by the Engineer.

C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal.

1.7 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute reproductions of Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data which carry the Engineer review stamp to: 1. Job site file 2. Record Documents file 3. Other affected contractors 4. Subcontractors 5. Supplier or Fabricator

B. Distribute samples which carry the Engineer review stamp as directed by the

Engineer. 1.8 ENGINEER DUTIES



A. Engineer will provide a timely review of shop drawings and samples in accordance with the schedule of submittals acceptable to the Engineer. Engineers review and approval will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation into the work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

B. Affix review stamp and initials or signature, and indicate requirements, if any, for

resubmittal. C. Return submittals to Contractor.

1.9 ENGINEER'S ACTION A. Final unrestricted release. Work may proceed, provided it complies with contract

documents, when submittal is returned with the following:

Marking: No exceptions taken B. Final-But-Restricted Release. Work may proceed, provided it complies with

notations and corrections on submittal and with contract documents, when submittal is returned with the following:

Marking: Revised as Noted.

C. Returned for Resubmittal. Do not proceed with work. Revise submittal in

accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not allow submittals with the following marking (or unmarked submittals where a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the work:

Marking: Amend and Resubmit or

Rejected - See Remarks PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


QUALITY CONTROL 01400-1

SECTION 01400

QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL

A. Comply with industry standards except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship on this project.

B. Perform work only by persons qualified by equivalent applicable union standards to

produce workmanship of the specified quality. C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibration, and racking. D. Comply with manufacturer's instructions in full detail, including each step in

sequence. Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, notify and request clarification from Engineer before proceeding.

1.2 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field and shall check field conditions continuously during construction. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any inaccuracies built into the Work due to his failure to comply with this requirement.

B. The Contractor shall observe related, adjacent, and appurtenant Work and shall report

in writing to the Engineer any conditions that will prevent proper completion of the Work. Failure to report any such conditions shall constitute acceptance of all site conditions, and any required removal, repair or replacement caused by unsuitable conditions shall be performed by the Contractor at their sole cost and expense.

1.3 OBSERVATION OF THE WORK

A. The Work shall be conducted under the general observation of the Engineer and shall be subject to observation by representatives of the Engineer acting on behalf of the Owner to insure strict compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Such observations may include mill, plant, shop or field observation, as required. The Engineer shall be permitted access to all parts of the Work, including plants where materials or equipment are manufactured or fabricated.



B. The presence of the Engineer or any inspector(s), however, shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for the proper execution of the work in accordance with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Compliance is a duty of the Contractor, and said duty shall not be avoided by any act or omission on the part of the Engineer or any inspector(s).

C. All materials and articles furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to rigid

inspection, and no materials or articles shall be used in the Work until they have been inspected and accepted by the Owner or his representative. No Work shall be backfilled, buried, cast in concrete, hidden or otherwise covered until it has been observed. Any Work so covered in the absence of observation shall be subject to uncovering. Where unobserved work cannot be uncovered, such as in concrete cast over reinforcing steel, all such Work shall be subject to demolition, removal and reconstruction under proper observation, and no additional payment will be allowed therefor.

1.4 TIME OF OBSERVATIONS AND TESTS

A. Samples and test specimens required under these Specifications shall be furnished and prepared for testing in ample time for the completion of the necessary tests, analyses and reporting of results before said articles or materials are to be used. The Contractor shall furnish and prepare all required test specimens at its own expense. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, performance of the required tests will be by the Owner, and all costs thereof will be borne by the Owner at no extra cost to the Contractor; except, that the costs of any tests which show unsatisfactory results shall be borne by the Contractor.

B. Whenever the Contractor is ready to backfill, bury, cast in concrete, hide or otherwise

cover any Work under the Contract, the Engineer shall be notified not less than 24 hours in advance to request observation before beginning any such Work of covering. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of any such observations shall be reasonable cause for the Engineer to order a sufficient delay in the Contractor's schedule to allow time for such observations and any remedial or corrective Work required, and all costs of such delays, including its effect upon other portions of the Work, shall be borne by the Contractor. Payment for items that are built, unobserved, or unverified may be delayed by the Engineer until satisfactory evidence of compliance is attained.

1.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING

A. When not otherwise specified, all sampling and testing shall be in accordance with methods prescribed in the current standards of the ASTM or related standard entity, as applicable to the class and nature of the article or materials considered; however, the Owner reserves the right to use any generally-accepted system of inspection



which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will insure the Owner that the quality of the workmanship is in full accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Any waiver of any specific testing or other quality assurance measures, whether or

not such waiver is accompanied by a guarantee of substantial performance as a relief from the specified testing or other quality assurance requirements as originally specified, and whether or not such guarantee is accompanied by a performance bond to assure execution of any necessary corrective or remedial Work, shall not be construed as a waiver of any technical or qualitative requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Notwithstanding the existence of such waiver, the Engineer shall reserve the right to

make independent investigations and tests as specified in the following paragraph and, upon failure of any portion of the Work to meet any of the quantitative requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be reasonable cause for the Engineer to require the removal or correction and reconstruction of any such Work.

D. In addition to any other inspection or quality assurance provisions that may be

specified, the Engineer shall have the right to independently select, test and analyze, at the expense of the Owner, additional test specimens of any or all of the materials to be used. Results of such tests and analyses shall be considered along with the tests and analyses made by the Contractor to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for materials so tested or analyzed; provided that wherever any portion of the Work is discovered, as a result of such independent inspection and investigation, and all costs of removal, correction and reconstruction, or repair of any such Work shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.6 RIGHT OF REJECTION

A. The Engineer, acting for the Owner, shall have the right, at all times and places, to reject any articles or materials to be furnished herein which, in any respect, fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether the defects in such articles or materials are detected at the point of manufacture or after completion of the Work at the site. If the Engineer or inspector, through an oversight or otherwise, has accepted materials or Work which is defective or which is contrary to the Contract Documents, such material, no matter in what stage or condition of manufacture, delivery or erection, may be rejected by the Engineer or the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall promptly remove rejected articles or material from the site of the

Work after notification of rejection.

C. All costs of removal and replacement of rejected articles or materials from the site of the Work after notification of rejection shall be borne by the Contractor.



1.7 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

A. Related Requirements: 1. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or

approvals of public authorities as mentioned in the Conditions of the Contract 2. Certification of Products indicated in respective Specification Sections 3. Section 01410, “Testing Laboratory Services”.

B. Testing laboratory inspecting, sampling, and testing is required for, but not limited to:

1. Soils Compaction and Control. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Qualification of Laboratory:

1. Meet "Recommended Requirements of Independent Laboratory Qualification," latest edition, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories,

2. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E 329, "Standard Recommended Practice for inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction".

3. Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is located.

D. Laboratory Duties: 1. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after

due notice. 2. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing and reporting of results of

materials and methods of construction: a. Comply with specified standards. b. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract

Documents. c. Tests and inspections shall be conducted in accordance with specified

requirements and if not specified, in accordance with applicable standards of American Society of Testing and Materials and other recognized authorities as applicable.

3. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products.

4. Promptly submit written reports of each test and inspection; at least one copy each to Engineer, Owner, and Contractor.

5. Perform any additional tests as required by the Engineer or Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION



NOT USED


TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410-1

SECTION 01410

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1. REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Owner will employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to perform testing specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the Specifications and may at any other time elect to have materials and equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents.

1. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of its required services.

2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor’s obligations to perform the Work of the Contractor.

1.2. LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY

A. Laboratory is not authorized to:

1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor.

1.3. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to Manufacturer’s operations.

B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.

C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.

D. Furnish copies of Products test reports as requested.

E. Costs of tests, samples and specified material, where the substitution is requested by the Contractor and the tests are necessary in the opinion of the Engineer to establish equality qualified with specified items, shall be borne by the Contractor.

F. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The


Engineer may require the Contractor to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification.

G. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the product to be

tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For protection, storage and curing of test samples.

H. Notify laboratory at least 24 hours in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor’s negligence.

I. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and testing required for the Contractor’s convenience, when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents, when required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities, and as approved by the Engineer.

J. If the test results indicate the material or equipment complies with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay for the cost of the testing laboratory. If the tests and any subsequent retests indicate the materials and equipment fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor may pay for the laboratory costs directly to the testing firm or the total of such costs shall be deducted from any payments due the Contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION

NOT USED

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 GENERAL


A. No separate measurement or payment will be made for the work to be completed under this section of the specifications.



CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-1

SECTION 01500

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01510 for requirements applicable to temporary utilities required for construction.

B. Section 01590 for requirements applicable to temporary field offices and sheds.

1.2 SUMMARY

C. This Section includes requirements for use of site, collection and disposal of waste, and identification badges and temporary controls, including security and protection.

D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Security for site and Agency. 2. Barricades and warning signs. 3. Enclosure fence. 4. Protection. 5. Environmental Protection. 6. Identification Badges for Contractors Personnel.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Health and safety regulations. 2. Utility company regulations. 3. Police, fire department, and rescue squad rules. 4. Environmental protection regulations.

B. Standards: OSHA. Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," and ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition."

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Familiarity with Site: It is understood that prior to bidding the Contractor became familiar with the conditions existing at the site, and accepts the site and access conditions as they are.

B. Use of Site: The Contractor and subcontractors shall locate offices, materials storage, equipment storage and maintenance areas, and similar major facilities in permitted areas



which do not interfere with operations required under the Contract and operations by the Owner and Owner's separate contractors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new or undamaged previously used materials and equipment in serviceable

condition. Provide materials and equipment suitable for the use intended. B. The Contractor shall furnish tools, apparatus and appliances, hoists and/or cranes and power

for same, scaffolding, runways, ladders, temporary supports and bracing and similar work or material necessary to insure convenience and safety in the execution of the Contract. All such items shall meet the approval of the Owner but responsibility for design, strength and safety shall remain with the Contractor. All such items shall comply with Federal OSHA regulations and applicable codes, statutes, rules and regulations, including compliance with the requirements of the current edition of the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" published by the A.G.C. and the standards of the State Labor Department.

C. Staging, exterior and interior, required for the execution of this Contract, shall be furnished, erected, relocated if necessary and removed by the General Contractor. Staging shall be maintained in a safe condition without charge to and for the use of all trades as needed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 USE OF SITE A. Collection and Disposal of Waste and Cleaning:

1. Collect waste within the contract limit line from construction areas daily. Provide separate containers for proper waste recycling. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.

2. Maintain areas under Contractor's control free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain in a clean and orderly condition.

3. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particulates will not adhere to wet or newly coated surfaces.

B. Traffic Ways: 1. The Contractor may use on-site paved roads and parking areas but shall not encumber

same or their access. Public highways shall not be blocked by standing trucks, parked cars, material storage, construction operations, or in any other manner.



2. Public roads and existing paved roads, drives and parking areas on Owner's property shall be kept free from scrap or debris due to construction operations and any damage to their surface caused by the Contractor shall be repaired by him at his own expense.

3. If the work of the Contract affects public use of any street, road, highway or thoroughfare, the Contractor shall confer with the police authority having jurisdiction to determine if and how many police are needed for public safety in addition to any barriers and signals that may be needed. The Contractor will be responsible for payment of any needed police services.

4. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing authority.

3.2 SECURITY AND PROTECTION A. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,

install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations." 1. Provide and locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended

purpose. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-

protection facilities, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.

4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.

5. The Contractor, during construction, shall be responsible for loss or damage by fire to the work of the Contract until completion. Any fire used within the site for working purposes shall be extinguished when not in use. Bitumen or tar shall be melted on the ground only. No flammable material shall be stored in the structure in excess of amounts allowed by the authorities. The Contractor shall assign a responsible employee to be in charge of fire protection measures.

B. Security for Site and Agency: 1. Provide security program and facilities to protect work, existing facilities and the Owner

and Agency’s operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism and theft. Coordinate with the Owner’s and Agency’s security program.

2. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for damage, loss or liability due to theft or vandalism.



C. Barricades and Warning Signs: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. 1. Barriers and enclosures shall be in conformance with code requirements. Do not block

egress from occupied buildings unless necessary to further the work of the Contract. In this case, secure the Owners approval of an alternate egress plan.

D. Enclosure Fences: Before excavation begins, install an enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Enclose the portion of the site determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering the site, except by the entrance gates. 1. Provide chain link construction fencing with posts set in a compacted mixture of gravel

and earth. Use existing fence to the extent possible. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for

theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism.

F. Protection: 1. Protect buildings, equipment, furnishings, grounds and plantings from damage. Any

damage shall be repaired or otherwise made good at no expense to the Owner. 2. Provide protective coverings and barricades to prevent damage. The Contractor shall be

held responsible for, and must make good at his own expense, any water or other type of damage due to improper coverings. Protect the public and building personnel from injury.

3. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize damage.

4. Provide protective coverings for walls, projections, jambs, sills and soffits of openings. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces and on lawn and landscaped areas.

G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result.

H. Identification Badges for Contractor's Personnel: 1. The Contractor will provide each person working at the site with an identification badge,

bearing the name of the Contractor and a number. As badges are assigns, a record shall be kept by the Contractor and given to the Agency Administrator. Update and correct the records of all badges issued on a semi-monthly basis.

2. Badges are to be worn on outer garment where visible at all times while at the construction site, return them to the Contractor’s field office at the end of each day and pick them up there each morning.


TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510-1

SECTION 01510

TEMPORARY UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01590, Field Offices and Sheds: Provide temporary utilities for services specified in the section.

1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. Comply with state and local codes. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect temporary utilities before use. Obtain any and all required certifications and permits.

B. Coordinate requirements with utility companies as necessary.

C. Contractor shall provide and maintain all temporary utilities such as heating, lighting and electricity for the operation of Contractor's plant or equipment or for any other use by Contractor. Heating, air conditioning and lighting shall be maintained at the project office and project site if applicable until the Work is granted final acceptance.

D. Contractor shall discover characteristics of available sources of electrical power (voltage, phases, amps, etc.) and shall coordinate with his needs as required.

E. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site.

1.3 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE

A. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the telephone utility for telephones in the temporary field office(s) for the duration of Project. All telephone numbers shall be in the name of the Contractor, and all charges after installation shall be billed to and paid by the Contractor.



B. All Contractors and others performing work or furnishing services at the site shall be permitted to use Contractor's telephone without charge for toll-free calls pertaining to the Work.

1.4 TEMPORARY WATER

A. All water (including extensions of lines and connections) required for and in connection with the Work to be performed and for any specified tests of piping or for any other use as may be required for proper completion of the Work shall be provided by and maintained at the expense of the Contractor. No separate payment for water used or required will be made and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the contract bid price.

B. Size piping to supply construction needs.

C. All drinking water on the site during construction shall be furnished by the

Contractor and shall be bottled water. 1.5 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES

A. Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and other performing work or furnishing services on the Project.

B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout

the construction period and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 men. Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site.

1.6 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING

A. Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with Entergy for power to the temporary field offices for the duration of Project. Contractor shall establish a temporary account and be responsible for all charges.

B. Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code."

C. Contractor shall provide all power required for construction. Contractor shall

provide extension cords, wiring, switches, disconnects, fuses, lamps and receptacles, and other items necessary to conduct electricity from connection point to the construction location.



D. Contractor shall supervise use of electricity to prevent waste and prevent injury

and damage due to improper and unsafe use, including but not limited to overloading and absence of grounding.

E. General Construction and Safety Lighting: Whenever natural light is inadequate

and existing or new overhead lighting is not in operation, provide temporary lighting with local switching as necessary for operations underway.

1. Safety Lighting: Five foot-candles minimum; 2. Construction Lighting: Adequate to ensure safety and proper workmanship.

Levels shall exceed 25 foot-candles, minimum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work and continuing use of the building. Relocate and modify facilities as necessary for properly performing the work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

C. Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or

connect to existing service. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company recommendations. Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site where the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose.

D. Temporary Water Service and Distribution: The Contractor shall provide

connections, approved backflow prevention device, meter and all facilities necessary to convey the water from the source to the points of use in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Upon completion of work, the



Contractor shall remove the temporary connections and backfill if necessary. The Contractor shall pay for the water used, as metered.

E. Temporary Electric Power and Lighting Services: Provide service required for

construction with branch wiring and distribution boxes located to provide power and lighting by construction-type extension cords. Meter shall be provided and installed by the Contractor.

F. Temporary Telephone Service and Data: Provide temporary telephone and data

service throughout the construction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

G. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: Comply with regulations and health codes for the

type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. 3.2 REMOVAL

A. Completely remove all temporary utilities when their use is no longer required. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installation.

B. Relocate temporary facilities during construction as required by progress of the

Work at no additional cost to the Owner.



FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS 01590 - 1

SECTION 01590

FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Temporary field offices, storage sheds, or work sheds furnished, installed, and maintained during the entire construction period or as needed for construction. Before installation of offices and sheds, consult with the Owner for location, access, and related facilities.

1.2 REQUIREMENTS

A. Field offices are not required but may be furnished at the Contractor’s Option. Where furnished, they shall meet the requirements of this specification.

B. Field offices and sheds shall be structurally sound, weathertight, with floor raised aboveground. At Contractor's option, portable or mobile buildings may be used. Mobile homes, when used, shall be modified for field office use. Temperature shall be regulated for the purpose (storage or office).

C. Year-round Hurricane Precautions: Provide appropriate tiedowns for temporary trailers, field offices, and sheds to be capable of withstanding wind velocity pressures according to American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 798. Provide calculations and connection details, signed and sealed by a Louisiana registered professional engineer, using wind velocity pressure values for the specific structure according to ASCE 7-98 based on a wind speed of 150 mph, exposure category "C", and a wind load importance factor of 1.15.

1.3 FIELD OFFICES

A. Contractor’s Field Office: Office shall be sufficiently sized for project meetings having a minimum of 16 attendees. In addition, office shall include the following as a minimum:

1. Telephone and data service equipment. 2. Electrical service equipment. 3. Electrical Distribution Panel: Match service voltage. Size for loads connected;

minimum 100-amps at 120/240-volts. 4. Receptacles: 120-volt, 15-amp duplex spaced no more than 12-feet on-center

along walls.



5. Interior Lighting: 50 foot-candles minimum at top of desks and tables. 6. Exterior Lighting above entry doors. 7. Air conditioning and heat equipment to automatically regulate inside temperature

for human comfort. 8. Toilet and hand-washing facilities. 9. Drinking water. 10. Telephone. 11. Photocopier. 12. Conference table and chairs. 13. File cabinets.

1.4 STORAGE SHEDS

A. Provide storage sheds as required for storage of equipment and materials for all trades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND FURNISHINGS

A. Serviceable, adequate for required purpose, and not violating applicable codes or regulations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Fill and grade sites for temporary structures to provide surface drainage.

B. Construct temporary field offices and storage sheds on proper foundations. Provide connections for utility services.

C. Secure portable or mobile buildings, when used, against break-ins and hurricane requirements per code.

D. Provide slip-resistant steps and landings at entrance doors.

E. Provide toilet tissue, wash basins with water, soap and paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material. The Contractor shall maintain the facilities in a sanitary condition.

F. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the indicated loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. Locate temporary paving for roads, storage areas, and parking where the same permanent



facilities will be located. Review proposed modifications to permanent paving with the Owner. Install temporary paving to minimize the need to rework the installations and to result in permanent roads and paved areas without damage or deterioration when occupied by the Owner.

3.2 MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING

A. Provide periodic maintenance and cleaning for temporary structures, furnishings, equipment, and services.

3.3 REMOVALS

A. Remove temporary field offices, contents, and services when no longer needed. Remove storage sheds when no longer needed

B. Remove foundations and debris, grade site to specified elevations, and complete remaining site work indicated on Construction Documents.



MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600-1

SECTION 01600

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01620 - Storage and Protection 1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work:

1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified or as specifically approved in

writing by the Engineer. 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is

designed or is specified. 5. Whenever an article, device or piece of equipment specified herein (or as

indicated on the Drawings) is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are indicated on the Drawings or required to complete the installation within the general intent of the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all materials and equipment which he has

furnished, and shall furnish necessary replacements at any time prior to expiration of the Correction Period.

C. Off-site storage arrangements shall be acceptable to Owner for all materials and

equipment not incorporated into the work but included in Applications for Payment. Such off-site storage arrangements shall be presented in writing, and shall afford adequate and satisfactory security and protection. Off-site storage facilities shall be accessible to Engineer.

D. Existing materials and equipment removed, and not reused or suitable for salvage,

shall become Contractor's property. E. Any items damaged in removal, storage or handling through carelessness or improper

procedures shall be replaced by Contractor in kind or with new items.

F. Existing materials and equipment removed by Contractor shall not be reused in the Work except where so specified or indicated.



G. All items mentioned in these Contract Documents shall be handled in conformance with this Section, Section 01620, instructions in the related Sections, and manufacturer's literature.

H. The security of Owner furnished equipment shall become the responsibility of the

Contractor upon taking delivery of the items at the office of the Owner. 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of Work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to Engineer.

1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and

until Project completion.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.

1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's

instructions, consult with Engineer for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with such Work without clear instructions.

C. Perform Work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any

preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflicts and delays with Work and conditions at the site.

B. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or

packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Labels shall indicate manufacturer and product name, description, mixing and application instructions, limitations, cautions and warnings.

C. Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipments to ensure proper material, color, type,

quantities, and to assure compliance with the Contract Documents and approved submittals and that the products are undamaged.

D. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or

damage to the product or packaging.



1.5 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION

A. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove coverings when no longer needed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EVIDENCE OF COMPLIANCE

A. All material and equipment used in the completion of this work shall be accompanied by certificates of compliance with the applicable requirements of the specifications. These certificates shall state date of manufacture, manufacturer, local representative, component sources and other pertinent specified facts of manufacture.

PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED



STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01620-1

SECTION 01620

STORAGE AND PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. All materials shall be suitably packaged (in manufacturer's original packaging with

labels and seals intact) to facilitate handling and protect against damage during storage. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

B. Each item, package, or bundle of material shall be tagged or marked as identified in

the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall accompany each shipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE, GENERAL A. Store products, immediately on delivery, in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. Protect until installed. B. Arrange storage in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored items and

for inspection. C. Store and handle paints and products subject to spillage in areas where spills will not

deface surfaces. D. Flammable or hazardous materials:

1. Store minimum quantities in protected areas. 2. Provide appropriate type fire extinguishers near storage areas. 3. Observe manufacturer's precautions and applicable ordinances and regulations.

3.2 EXTERIOR STORAGE


STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01620-2

A. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids, to support fabricated products above ground; slope to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling and staining.

B. For products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements,

cover with impervious sheet material. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid surfaces such as pavement, or on rigid

sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion, pollution by mixing and ponding of

water. E. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids. 3.3 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. B. Verify that storage facilities comply with manufacturer's product storage

requirements. C. Verify that manufacturer's required environmental conditions are maintained

continually. D. Verify that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected;

that any weathering of finishes is acceptable under requirements of Contract Documents.



STARTUP PROCEDURES 01650 - 1

SECTION 01650

STARTUP PROCEDURES

PART 1 ― GENERAL 1.1. SCOPE

A. Equipment testing and start-up are required for satisfactory completion of the contract and, therefore, shall be completed within the contract time.

1.2. RELATED WORK

A. Refer to the Drawings and to Division 16 sections regarding the requirements related to limiting interferences and project phasing.

1.3. START-UP

A. It is not the intent of the Engineer to instruct the Contractor in the start-up; however, the Engineer will be available prior to and during start-up to provide technical support to the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall be required to test all equipment, in the presence of the Owner and

Engineer. A factory-trained representative shall be present to perform initial start-up operations and testing during this period. The factory service representative shall be a factory-trained serviceman who is regularly employed in this capacity by the equipment manufacturer. Manufacturer sales representatives or sales agents, contractors, or their representatives will not qualify as the servicemen.

C. Each manufacturer shall certify that their equipment has been installed, programmed, tested, and commissioned to their satisfaction, and a formal letter from the manufacturer, on letterhead, shall be provided to the Engineer. Startup shall not be scheduled until certification has been received from all equipment suppliers.

D. The start-up shall not be commenced until all required visual inspections, pre-testing, safety testing, equipment tests, programming, and commissioning have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

E. All defects in materials or workmanship that appears during the test period shall be immediately corrected by the Contractor. The manufacturer’s service engineers shall check and approve assembly and adjustment of all equipment in writing to the Engineer before acceptance.


STARTUP PROCEDURES 01650 - 2

F. During the start-up, the Contractor shall keep records of all tests performed, test results, and corrective measures taken.

G. After the equipment has been in operation by the Owner for a period of two months, the Contractor shall schedule a follow-up operational visit between the Owner and all associated service representatives so that proper operation can be verified, additional training can be provided if necessary, equipment can be adjusted or calibrated if necessary, and any Owner-requested sequence changes can be implemented. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to prepare an agenda for the visit and insure all necessary equipment representatives and technical personnel will be available to attend the visit.

PART 2 ― PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 ― EXECUTION (NOT USED)



CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700-1

SECTION 01700

CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Comply with requirements stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the

Contract and in the Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.

1.2 RELATED WORK A. General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract. Fiscal provisions, legal

submittals and additional administrative requirements. 1.3 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove from the site and adjacent

property all surplus materials, weeds, bushes, rubbish and temporary structures; shall satisfactorily restore all property which has been worn, rutted or damaged during the work; and shall leave the site in a presentable condition. Upon completion of work in connection with drainage structures, the Contractor shall remove all obstructions to the flow of water from inside all structures, channels, and culverts whether new or old. No direct payment will be made for this work.

B. Remove all temporary labels. C. Clean site. Sweep paved areas. D. Remove all waste and surplus material from site. 1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When Contractor considers the Work is substantially complete, he shall submit to the

Engineer (3 copies each): 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is substantially

complete. 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected.

B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make an

observation to determine the status of completion.



C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 1. Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, giving the reasons

therefor. 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written

notice of substantial completion to the Engineer. 3. Engineer will re-observe the Work.

D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he may:

1. Prepare and deliver to the Owner a notification of Substantial Completion on an appropriate form with the Contractor's list of items to be completed or corrected as verified and amended by the Engineer before final payment.

2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in Conditions of the Contract, and when Engineer considers that the Work is substantially complete, he will countersign and deliver to the Owner and the contractor a definite notification of Substantial Completion with a revised list of items to be completed or corrected.

1.5 FINAL OBSERVATION A. When Contractor considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written notification

that (3 copies): 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been observed for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Work is completed and ready for final observation. 5. All items noted from the Substantial Completion observation have been

completed or corrected. B. Engineer will make an observation to verify the status of completion with reasonable

promptness after receipt of such notification. C. Should Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective:

1. Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the incomplete or defective work.

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a second written notification to Engineer stating that the Work is complete.

3. Engineer will re-observe the Work. D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents,

he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals, including Application for Final Payment.



1.6 RE-OBSERVATION FEES

A. Should Engineer perform re-observation due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 1. Owner will compensate Engineer for such additional services. 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to

the Contractor. 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER

A. General: Accurate and complete documentation of materials, devices, systems and equipment installed. Contractor shall furnish both digital and hard copies of the information. Digital copies shall be in PDF format, assembled together and copied to CDs for distribution.

B. Project Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the sets to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most suitable for showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. Record, as a minimum, the following information that is applicable to the project:

1. Depths of various foundation elements in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances which are concealed in the

completed construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Change Order and Architect's instructions for changes which

do not effect Contract amount or time. 6. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

C. Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including

addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in written form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed. Give particular attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on elements that cannot be readily identified by direct observation. Note related Record Drawing information and Product Data.



D. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal, including items submitted for record purposes. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications.

E. Maintenance Manuals: Unless otherwise specified in the Technical Sections, provide two (2) sets of maintenance manuals for the project, incorporating all maintenance, repair and operating procedures specified for the project. Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in heavy-duty 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information:

1. Emergency Instructions. 2. Spare Parts List. 3. Wiring Diagrams. 4. Inspection Procedures. 5. Maintenance Procedures. 6. Repair Procedures. 7. Troubleshooting Procedures. 8. Contact information for all vendors and suppliers.

F. Warranties, Guarantees and Bonds. All warranty periods shall begin on the date of

Final Acceptance.

G. Reports of all required tests and demonstrations.

H. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions.

1.8 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer. B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum:

1. The original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from:

a. Previous Change Orders. b. Quantity reconciliations. c. Deductions for liquidated damages.



d. Deductions for re-observation payments. e. Deductions for overtime observation payments. f. Other adjustments.

3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due.

C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the

Contract Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. 1.9 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with

procedures and requirements stated in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract.

1.10 SUPPLEMENTAL LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. After the establishment of a date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall have 30 days to complete any outstanding items of Work remaining to be completed or corrected as listed on a final punch list made a part of the Substantial Completion Package. If upon expiration of said 30 days the outstanding items of Work have not been completed, liquidated damages in the amount agreed to in this contract will be reinstated for every day in which the outstanding items of Work have not been completed. Furthermore, the Owner shall not release monies withheld until all outstanding items of Work have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED



CLEANING 01710 - 1

SECTION 01710

CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

Execute cleaning, during progress of the work, and at completion of the work, as required by General conditions.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Conditions of the Contract. B. Each Specification Section: Cleaning for specific products or work.

1.3 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS

Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti-pollution laws.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces.

B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of

the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material

manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.


CLEANING 01710 - 2

C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal disposal areas away from the site.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ skilled, workmen for final cleaning. B. Rake the surfaces of the grounds clean. C. Prior to final completion, or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an

inspection of sight-exposed exterior surfaces, and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean.



CLEARING AND GRUBBING 02231-1

SECTION 02231

CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, and materials, and performing all operations necessary for clearing and, grubbing and removing the vegetation, debris and items specified herein or indicated on the drawings, for the disposal of all cleared, grubbed and excavated materials, for filling of all holes caused by these operations, as specified herein.

1.2 QUALITY CONTROL

The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for clearing and grubbing operations to assure compliance with contract requirements.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

If regrowth of vegetation occurs after clearing and grubbing and before placement of base or surfacing, the Contractor will be required to clear and grub the area again prior to placing the new material, and no payment will be made for this additional clearing and grubbing.

PART 2 MATERIALS – Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

Clearing and grubbing shall consist of the removal of all vegetation from the natural ground that is to receive new base, crushed stone surfacing, granular fill or other surfacing. Clearing and grubbing shall also consist of the removal of the following items that conflict with the required limits of the new work: roots, buried logs, debris on land, and other unsuitable matter. All roots and other projections over 1 inch in diameter shall be removed to a depth of six (6) inches below the bottom of the new material.

3.2 BACKFILLING OF HOLES

All holes caused by grubbing operations shall be backfilled with granular material under pile supported slabs and embankment material in other areas. All holes not immediately


CLEARING AND GRUBBING 02231-2

backfilled shall have safety guards provided. See "SECTION 02300 – EARTHWORK" for additional compaction requirements.

3.3 DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS

A. General: Debris resulting from clearing and grubbing operations including all material shall be disposed of by removal from the site. No onsite burning shall be permitted.

B. Removal from Site of Work: The Contractor shall remove all cleared and grubbed

debris. Such disposal shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and Local laws. The Owner is not responsible for the protection and safekeeping of any materials retained by the Contractor. Such materials shall be removed from the site of the work before the date of completion of the work.



EARTHWORK 02300-1

SECTION 02300

EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all plant, labor, materials, tools, and equipment for performing all operations necessary for excavation and embankment work in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and thicknesses, shown on the Contract Drawings.

A. Definitions

1. Excavation consists of removal and disposal of all material conflicting with the

placement of the new work excluding materials to be removed under other sections of these specifications.

Excavation shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. Excavation operations shall be conducted so that material and construction

outside of limits of excavation is not disturbed. Adjacent material and construction affected during excavation operations shall be repaired or replaced as directed by Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Unauthorized Excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated

subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at the Contractor=s expense.

Under pile supported concrete slabs fill unauthorized excavations with clean

granular fill and compact to 95% standard proctor density, ASTM D1557. 3. Subgrade is the undisturbed earth or compacted soil layer immediately below

the crushed stone base course. 4. Structure - Buildings, foundations, slabs, tanks, curbs, or other man-made

stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. 5. Subgrade Fill - Subgrade fill is the granular fill used to bring the existing site up

to the bottom of the crushed stone base course. 1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS


EARTHWORK 02300-2

The following latest publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic designation only, form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto:

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Latest Editions

ASTM D 698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ ft3)

ASTM D 1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics

of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ ft3). B. Louisiana Department of Transportation and Development (LDOTD)

Louisiana Standard Specifications for Roads and Bridges, 2006 Edition (“Blue Book”), including latest amendment thereto.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide one (1) optimum moisture-maximum density curve for the granular material.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Testing and Inspection Service: The Owner will employ and pay for a qualified

independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations at no cost to the Contractor.


A. Quality Control: The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for excavation to assure compliance with contract requirements.

B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work.

If utilities are indicated to remain in place, the Contractor shall provide adequate means of support and protection as required during earthwork operations. Call Louisiana Call One before digging around buried utility lines. If uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities are encountered during excavation, the Contractor shall consult the utility owner immediately for directions. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and the utility companies to keep respective services


EARTHWORK 02300-3

and facilities in operation. The Contractor shall repair any damaged utilities to the satisfaction of the utility owner with no additional expense to the Owner.

C. Protection of Persons and Property: The Contractor shall provide all necessary

barricades and warning lights or other warning devices at open excavations occurring as a part of this work. Operate all warning lights as recommended by the authorities having jurisdiction. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Site fill/Structural fill material shall consist of lean clays and sandy lean clays (CL) or clayey sands (SC) having the following recommended material properties:

a. Liquid Limit: 40 maximum b. Plasticity Index: 12 to 22 maximum c. Inert Material (Non-expansive) d. Free of Organics e. Maximum Particle Size: 2 inches

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. All surfaces to receive new reinforced concrete slab shall be prepared as specified

below. B. Natural ground to receive any new material shall be compacted with mechanical

tamping devices. Field density tests shall be taken at the discretion of the Engineer. C. In cut areas to receive new base material, the top nine (9) inch layer on which base

material is to be placed shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical tamping devices and the moisture content increased or reduced as necessary. Field density tests shall be taken at the discretion of the Engineer.

D. Structural fill shall be placed in lifts of eight (8) inches of loose material. Each lift

shall be compacted and certified by the Geotechnical Engineer or a representative prior to placement of other lifts. Structural fill shall be placed at 95% of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-


EARTHWORK 02300-4

lbf/ft3(600 kN-m/m3)), and a moisture content between one (1) below and three (3) above percentages of the optimum moisture content. If water must be added, it shall be uniformly applied and thoroughly mixed into the soil by disking of scarifying. Field density tests shall be taken at a frequency of not less than one test per 2,500 square feet.

3.2 EXCAVATION

Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.

3.3 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. General - Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements

of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

B. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. C. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as

backfill or fill. D. Cut surface under pavements to comply with typical sections, elevations, and grades

as indicated. E. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less

than 35 degrees F. F. Remove trash and debris from excavation. G. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before

compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material.


EARTHWORK 02300-5

Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations.

H. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit

compaction to specified density. I. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to

permit compaction. Assist drying by disking, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.

J. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent

transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades.

K. Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of it off of the Owner’s property.



EARTHWORK 02300-6



PILE LOAD TESTS

02452 - 1

SECTION 02452

PILE LOAD TESTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pile load testing. 2. Documented test results.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02457 - Timber Piles.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D1143 - Standard Test Method for Piles Under Static Axial Compressive

Load. 2. ASTM D25 - Standard Specification for Round Timber Piles. 3. ASTM D245 - Standard Practice for Establishing Structural Grades and Related

Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber. 4. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies

Engaged in testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

5. ASTM E329 – Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection, Testing, or Special Inspection.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate test method and equipment, load type, calibration equipment, and sketch of reaction piles and beams.

B. Testing Lab shall furnish all data from each pile tested within twenty-four (24) hours after completion of each test. Pile test data shall be recorded for all items shown in paragraph 1.6. Blow counts shall be recorded for each foot of each test pile.

C. Measurements of compression loads, deflections and settlements, of the test piles shall be made by the owner’s testing lab. Reports on all test piles shall be made by the owner’s testing lab.


A. The owner shall employ an independent testing laboratory to perform the following:


PILE LOAD TESTS

02452 - 2

1. Timber Piles: Inspect at source of supply and hammer mark in the butt to indicate conformance with the requirements of these specifications.

2. Logging of pile driving: Log the driving of all piling including reaction piles and record the following: a. Date driven. b. Installation equipment including make, model, type and size of hammer; weight

of hammer and ram; stroke of ram; rated energy and operating speed of hammer; type and thickness of cap blocks and pile cushions.

c. Pile Details including dimensions of pile tip and butt measured at jobsite; total pile length; embedded pile length; deviations from vertical (if any).

d. Location of pile. e. Number of blows per foot for full length of pile. f. Depth and size of predrilling or pre-punching. g. Submit driving records daily.

B. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Compressive Load Tests: ASTM D1143 Procedure A: Quick Test. 2. International Building Code 2012 Edition and Jefferson Parish Standards. 3. The contractor shall coordinate and schedule all work in conjunction with the

owner’s testing lab.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Monitor test pile placement and elevations under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the state of Louisiana.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years documented experience which has successfully completed at least 5 other projects of similar scope within the last 2 years.

1.6 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01010 - Summary Of Work: Requirements for sequencing.

B. Sequence Work to allow other piling Work during testing.

1.7 REPORTS

The report of the load test shall include the following items where applicable:

A. General 1. Project Identification 2. Location


PILE LOAD TESTS

02452 - 3

B. Pile Installation Equipment 1. Make, model, type, and size of hammer. 2. Weight of hammer and ram 3. Stroke of ram 4. Rated energy and operating speed of hammer 5. Steamer air pressure of boiler and/or compressor 6. Type and thickness of cap blocks and pile cushions 7. Weight and dimensions of drive-cap and follower

C. Test and Support Piles 1. Identification of test pile(s) 2. Type of piles 3. Pile material including basic specifications 4. Dimensions of pile 5. Pile weight as driven 6. Degree of batter 7. Driven length 8. Embedded length 9. Tested length, and 10. Final elevation of piles butt referenced to fixed datum (identify datum)

D. Pile Installation - Test and Support 1. Date driven 2. Pre-excavation - depth, size, duration, etc. 3. Operating of hammer during final driving 4. Driving log, blows per foot 5. Final penetration resistance, blows per inch 6. Description of special installation procedures used, and 7. Notation of any unusual occurrences during installation

E. Static Pile Testing 1. Date tested 2. Type of test pile 3. Type of load application apparatus 4. Number of reaction piles 5. Instrumentation used to measure pile movement 6. Special testing procedures used 7. Temperature and weather conditions during test 8. Tabulation of all load-time-movement reading 9. Gages, scales, and reference points identified 10. Adjustment made to field data and explanation 11. Notation of any unusual occurrences during test, and 12. Test jack and other required calibration reports


PILE LOAD TESTS

02452 - 4

PART 2 GENERAL

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment Type, Load Carrying Device, Load, and Instrumentation: Conform to ASTM D1143 of same type as will be used for pile placement of the Work.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Piles: Minimum 60 foot treated timber pile. 1. Treated Timber Pile: ASTM D25 round timber, southern pine, clean peeled,

friction type.

B. Dimensions of Timber Section: 1. Minimum Butt Diameter: 13 inches measured 3 feet from the butt. 2. Minimum Tip Diameter: 7 inches.

Timber to timber splices shall not be permitted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify site conditions will support cribbing and load for testing purposes.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Establish stable working elevation for test equipment.

B. The contractor shall supply a suitable, level and stable working surface on top of the test piles.

3.3 TESTING

A. Perform load tests.

B. Design Load: 10 tons

C. Design Length: 60ft. Probe pile shall be driven to a tip elevation of 60ft below existing grade. Contractor shall order test piles with additional length required to perform load test.

D. Load Test The Following:


PILE LOAD TESTS

02452 - 5

1. Drive 3 probe piles at locations shown on drawings. Owner’s testing lab shall provide pile installation data as soon as all probe piles are driven for Engineer to review and select Test Piles.

2. Piles shall not be tested until 14 days after they are driven. 3. Test 1 probe pile at locations as directed by Engineer. Contractor shall not drive

additional piles required for load test apparatus until test pile is selected by engineer.

E. Without exceeding the safe structural load of the pile or the loading apparatus, the selected pile shall be loaded to failure or 300 percent of design load, whichever occurs first. The failure load for the purpose of terminating an axial compressive test, is the test load at which rapid continuing, progressive movement occurs, or at which the total axial movement exceeds 15 percent of the pile diameter or width.

F. When tested piles do not conform to requirements, perform additional testing of other piles as directed by Engineer.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Special inspection and verification of Timber Piles is required in accordance with Section 1705.7 of the 2012 International Building Code. The owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform Special Inspections and testing and to submit test reports. Contractor is responsible for notifying the owner’s inspection agency in sufficient time for scheduling personnel to perform required inspections.

C. An independent inspection firm will be engaged to observe and document test method and results.

D. Document test equipment used method of calibration and recording, test results, recommendations or modification of piling method used.

E. Accurately record actual dimensions and locations of tested piles and movement or distortion caused by testing.

F. Vibration Monitoring: During the driving of all piles, including exploratory piles, the owners testing laboratory shall monitor and record the vibrations to adjacent buildings and surrounding areas. The laboratory shall employ the services of a vibration specialist engineer who in conjunction with the laboratory shall render complete reports and interpretations of the data obtained, including the possible effects of the measured vibrations on adjacent and surrounding structures. The vibrations shall be measured by means of a portable Seismograph which directly measures particle velocity (rate of ground movement) in three mutually perpendicular directions (longitudinal, transverse and vertical). Probes shall be located at various locations as required to achieve meaningful readings. An air blast monitor, which measures the air pressure phenomena associated with the pile driving, shall also be employed. Vibrations will be limited to a


PILE LOAD TESTS

02452 - 6

ground peak particle velocity of 0.25 inch per second at the construction limit. The laboratory shall notify the Contractor and the Engineer when the vibrations from his operations have exceeded the above limit and the Contractor shall take immediate action to bring the vibrations within the acceptable limits. Daily reports from the laboratory showing the locations and vibrations intensities measured shall be submitted to the Engineer for immediate review. In addition to daily reports, a complete report of the vibration study, including seismograms, shall be furnished after the conclusion of the driving of the exploratory piles and after driving all remaining piles.

3.5 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL

A. Remove test and temporary load equipment from site.



TIMBER PILES 02457-1

SECTION 02457

TIMBER PILES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. ASTM D25 Class B Timber Piles. 2. Preservative treatment.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete, and placement

of pile caps and grade beams. 2. Section 02452 - Pile Load Tests: Requirements for pile load tests.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D25 - Standard Specification for Round Timber Piles. 2. ASTM D245 - Standard Practice for Establishing Structural Grades and Related

Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber. 3. ASTM D1760 - Standard Specification for Pressure Treatment of Timber Products.

B. American Wood-Preservers’ Association: 1. APWA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood. 2. AWPA M4 - Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products.

C. Forest Stewardship Council: 1. FSC Guidelines - Forest Stewardship Council Guidelines.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Drive all piles full depth as described on the Drawings or to refusal of not less than 25 blows per foot. Perform vibration monitoring in accordance with paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Requirements for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate details and schedule of pile installation sequence. Identify pile length and diameter.



C. Submit confirmation letter of pile-driving Contractor's experience and qualifications.

D. Confirm that appropriate test analyses are performed by the independent testing agency charged to test and analyze pile driving operations specified in these Documents. Submit record which has been compiled and analyzed by a registered Professional Engineer.

E. Reports: Provide daily reports for pile driving operations including vibration monitoring.

F. Certificate: Submit evidence of preservative treatment certification.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following: 1. Sizes, lengths, and locations of piles. 2. Sequence of driving. 3. Number of blows per foot for entire length of piles. 4. Drilling: Hole diameters, start and tip elevations. 5. Final tip and head elevations. 6. Driving force of each hammer blow. 7. Type and size of equipment. 8. Alignment deviations.


A. Perform Work in accordance with IBC 2012 and Jefferson Parish standards.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Engage a pile-driving Contractor with minimum 5 years documented experience performing work of this section and which has successfully completed at least 5 other projects of similar scope within the last 2 years.

1.8 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this section.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A. Section 01310 - Construction Schedules: Requirements for scheduling.

B. Schedule test piles.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Piles: Treated, round, clean-peeled, one-piece from butt to tip, complying with ASTM D 25, with length, circumference of butt, and diameter of tip and treatment as indicated below.

B. Preservative Treatment: Piles shall be pressure treated with Copper Chromium Arsenate at a retention rate of 0.8 pcf. 1. Round Timber Piles: Commodity Specification E, Use Category 4C. 2. Field-Applied Wood Preservative: Treat field cuts, holes, and other penetrations in

accordance with AWPA M4.

C. Dimensions: 1. Length: 60 feet. 2. Minimum Butt Diameter: 13 inches. 3. Minimum Tip Diameter: 7 inches

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

B. Grade piles in accordance with ASTM D245.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform vibration monitoring in accordance with paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.

B. Site Conditions: Delay pile driving operation until earthwork has been completed in areas in which piles are to occur.

C. Stop earth excavation at an elevation of 6 - 12 inches above bottom of footing before piles are driven.

D. Perform final excavation of required elevation of footing bottoms after piles have been driven.

E. Mark each pile's length with a horizontal line, at 1'-0" intervals, and indicate the number of feet from pile point at 5'-0" intervals.

F. Obtain prior approval of hammer type to be used.



G. Use driving method which will not cause damage to nearby structures.

H. Notify adjacent and affected land owners and building occupants with 14 days’ notice before proceeding with the Work.

I. Protect structures near the Work, from damage.

3.2 DRILLING

A. Predrilling is required for all piles.

B. Predrill to a depth of 25ft using dry auger methods.

C. Predrill bit diameter shall be no larger than 6”.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Drive piles at locations indicated on the Drawings, in one continuous operation, to the full length of the pile, and without damage to the pile.

B. Protect pile head during driving, with full bearing on pile butt for even distribution of hammer blow.

C. Deliver hammer blows to central axis of pile.

D. When driving is interrupted before refusal, drive an additional 12 inches before resuming recording of performance data.

E. Re-drive piles which have lifted due to driving adjacent piles, or by soil uplift.

F. Cut off tops of piles to elevations indicated on the drawings.

G. Prevent surface damage to treated piles.

H. Apply preservative to exposed ends of cut-off piles in accordance with AWPA M4.

3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Maximum Variation From Vertical For Plumb Piles: 1inch in 10ft.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 3 inches.




A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Special inspection and verification of Timber Piles is required in accordance with Section 1705.7 of the 2012 International Building Code. The owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform Special Inspections and testing and to submit test reports. Contractor is responsible for notifying the owner’s inspection agency in sufficient time for scheduling personnel to perform required inspections.

C. Perform load tests to requirements of Section 02452 - Pile Load Tests.

D. Vibration Monitoring: During the driving of all piles, including exploratory piles, the owners testing laboratory shall monitor and record the vibrations to adjacent buildings and surrounding areas. The laboratory shall employ the services of a vibration specialist engineer who in conjunction with the laboratory shall render complete reports and interpretations of the data obtained, including the possible effects of the measured vibrations on adjacent and surrounding structures. The vibrations shall be measured by means of a portable Seismograph which directly measures particle velocity (rate of ground movement) in three mutually perpendicular directions (longitudinal, transverse and vertical). Probes shall be located at various locations as required to achieve meaningful readings. An air blast monitor, which measures the air pressure phenomena associated with the pile driving, shall also be employed. Vibrations will be limited to a ground peak particle velocity of 0.25 inch per second at the construction limit. The laboratory shall notify the Contractor and the Architect when the vibrations from his operations have exceeded the above limit and the Contractor shall take immediate action to bring the vibrations within the acceptable limits. Daily reports from the laboratory showing the locations and vibrations intensities measured shall be submitted to the Architect for immediate review. In addition to daily reports, a complete report of the vibration study, including seismograms, shall be furnished after the conclusion of the driving of the exploratory piles and after driving all remaining piles.

E. Test Piles: Same diameter and type as specified for other piling, placed in same manner.

F. Job piles shall have the same minimum butt and tip diameter as the load tested pile and shall be driven in the same manner and with the same equipment as the test pile.

G. Accepted test piles may be used in the Work.

H. Unacceptable Piles: Piles that fail tests, are placed out of position, are below cut-off elevations, or are damaged.

I. Provide additional piles or replace piles to conform to specified requirements.


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1

SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 DESCRITION OF WORK

A. The extent of concrete work required is shown on drawings and includes but is not limited to: 1. Formwork. 2. Reinforcing. 3. Placing concrete. 4. Finishing.

B. Examine the Drawings and the Structural General Notes in particular, for details which describe the extent of concrete work.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division – 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 304 – Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 3. ACI 304.2 – Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 4. ACI 305 – Hot Weather Concreting. 5. ACI 306.1 – Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 308.1 - Standard Specification for Curing Concrete. 7. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 8. ACI SP-15 – Field Reference Manual: Standard Specifications for Structural

Concrete 9. ACI SP-66 – Detailing Manual

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C31 – Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in

the Field. 2. ASTM C33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.



5. ASTM C143 – Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 6. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM C172 – Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 8. ASTM A615 – Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed

Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 10. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by

the Pressure Method. 11. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for

Concrete. 13. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural

Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. 14. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made By Volumetric

Batching and Continuous Mixing. 15. ASTM C989 - Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for

Use in Concrete and Mortars. 16. ASTM C1017/C1017M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in

Producing Flowing Concrete. 17. ASTM C1064/C1064M - Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed

Hydraulic-Cement Concrete. 18. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-

Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 19. ASTM C1157 - Standard Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. 20. ASTM C1218/C1218M - Standard Test Method for Water-Soluble Chloride in

Mortar and Concrete. 21. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious

Mixtures. 22. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for

Concrete (Bituminous Type).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01340 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data for materials and all proprietary items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures and, patching compounds, joint systems, curing compounds, including dry-shake finish materials and others as requested by Engineer.

C. Submit concrete mix designs for each concrete strength. Submit separate mix designs when admixtures are required for Hot or Cold weather concrete work, or air entrained concrete work.



D. Shop Drawings: 1. Meet requirements of applicable portions of “Details and Detailing of Concrete

Reinforcement” by ACI 315, latest edition, and of Division 1 thereof. 2. Show bending, assembly, splicing, sizes, bar lengths and markings of bars. Indicate

bar spacing by dimension. 3. Locate sleeves, holes, accessories and anchors by dimensions. 4. Furnish prints of approved shop drawings to trades that have items to be embedded

in, or connected to concrete work. 5. Reproduction of the Contract Drawings for use in producing shop drawings is

prohibited, shop drawings submitted for review in this manner will be rejected without review.

E. Samples: Submit samples of materials as requested by Engineer, including names, sources and descriptions.

F. Laboratory Test Reports: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.

G. Materials Certificates: Provide materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Engineer. Materials certificates shall be signed by Manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certificates from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.


A. Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.” 2. ACI 318 “Building Code Regulations for Reinforced Concrete.” 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, “Manual of Standard Practice.” 4. ACI SP – 15 “Field Reference Manual: Standard Specifications for Structural

Concrete ACI 301-10 with Selected ACI and ASTM References.” Maintain one copy of each document on site.

B. Concrete Testing Service: Employ, at Contractor’s expense a testing Laboratory acceptable to Engineer to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1. The following tests will be required.

a. Sampling: Per ASTM C 172 b. Slump: Per ASTM C 143, one (1) test for each load at point of discharge.

C. Air Content: Per ASTM C 173, one (1) test for each set of compressive strength specimens.



D. Compressive Strength: Per ASTM C 39, one set for each 10 cu. yds. or fraction thereof of each class of concrete; test two (2) specimens at 7 days, test three (3) specimens at 28 days, retain one (1) for later testing if required.

E. If total quantity for a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds, strength tests may be waived at the Engineer’s discretion.

F. Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer, Contractor, and concrete producer on the same day tests are made.

G. Defective concrete may require additional tests. Additional tests will be at the Contractor’s expense.


A. Comply with applicable requirements of “Cold Weather Concreting”, ACI 306, and “Hot Weather Concreting”, ACI 305.

B. Do not place concrete if temperature is below 40 degrees F except with specific approval by the Engineer, and then be prepared to maintain concrete temperature as recommended in ACI 306.1.

C. Reduce concrete temperatures to prevent rapid evaporation of water in hot weather.

D. Protect persons from injury and property from damage. Repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged by the Contractor’s operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.7 DELIVERING AND STORING

A. Deliver unopened, packaged materials to site in manufacturer’s original labeled containers. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays and to prevent greater accumulations than can be suitably stored at site.

B. Arrange deliveries to provide sufficient quantities to permit continuity of placing for phase of work. Do not change suppliers or brands for any phase of work, without specific approval from Engineer.

C. Store materials to prevent damage to other materials or to structure. Store cementitious material in dry, weather-tight, ventilated spaces. Store aggregates to exclude foreign matter and to maintain gradation. Do not store reinforcing in contact with the ground.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or I/II. Use one brand of cement throughout project.

B. Normal weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide 1” maximum size aggregate from a single source for exposed concrete

C. Water: Potable.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add at batch plant only.

E. Water Reducing Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 494, Type A and contain not more than 1% chloride ions. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products, which may

be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. “Pozzolith 322N”; Master Builders b. “Plastocrete 161”; Sika Chemical Corporation c. “Chemtard”; Chem-Masters Corporation

F. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F of the sulfonated melamine formaldehyde condensate based materials type and containing not more than 1% chloride ions.

G. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D and containing not more than 1% chloride ions.

H. Calcium Chloride not permitted.

I. Fly Ash up to 25% by weight of cement shall be allowed. Type C or F, ASTM C 618.

J. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag up to 50% by weight of cement shall be allowed. ASTM C 989.

K. A maximum combined total of 50% by weight of cement of Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace slag shall be allowed.

2.2 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Sealer & Hardener-Aqueous acrylic non-yellowing coating, 30% solids, compliance with TT-C800A, 5yr warranty against Dusting. Minimum coverage of 300 sq. ft. per gal. Products: L&M Dress & Seal, Kure-N-Seal 30 by Sonneborn and Thoroglaze H by Thoro System Products:



B. Non-Corrosive, Non-Stain, Non-Shrink precision grout compliant with CRD-C-621. Acceptable products Crystex/Duragrout by L&M, Master-Flow713 by Master Builders, 5 Star by U.S. Grout.

C. Bonding Compound – Non-Reversible Acrylic. Everbond by L&M, Acryl set by Master Builders, Sika Latex by Sika.

D. Epoxy Joint Filler – T-250LCS by Permagile, Epoflex by L&M. Two part, 100% solids flexibilized compound meeting ASTM D2240 shore hardness 80 + 10.

E. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive – Bond-1 by Permagile, Sika-Dur 32 Hi-Mod by Sika, Epobond by L&M. Adhesive shall be used to eliminate cold joints, 2 part, 100% solids for use on DAMP or DRY surfaces.

F. Form Release Agent – Shall be non-transferring, non-staining, and 100% chemically active. “Debond” by L&M, “Magic Coat” by Nox-Crete, and “Pro-Cote” by Protex.

G. Patching & Repair Mortar – One component, fiber-reinforced, rapid setting and non-shrinking. Shall be non-corrosive and resist sulfate attack. Durapatch Industrial by L&M, Set 45 by Master Builders, and Patch by Sonneborn.

H. Curing: 1. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Waterproof paper or polyethylene film complying with

ANSI/ASTM C 171. 2. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane-forming

compound complying with ANSI/ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A with minimum 30% solids content unless other type acceptable to Engineer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following: “Masterkure” by Master Builders “Kure-N-Seal” by Sonneborn-Contech “L&M Cure R” Construction Chemicals

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mix designs for each concrete strength required shall be prepared by an independent testing laboratory and submitted to the Engineer for his approval. No concrete shall be poured until Engineers approval has been received. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1 and as prescribed herein.

B. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 4000psi 28-day compressive strength; maximum 5% air content; W/C ratio 0.48

maximum.



C. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant; at no additional cost to owner and as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer before using in work.

D. Admixtures: Include admixture types and quantities indicated in concrete mix designs only when approved by Engineer. 1. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer’s prescribed rate to result in concrete

at point of placement having air content of not more than 4%.

E. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 4”. 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 2” and not more than 4”. 3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): Not more than 8”. 4. Other Concrete: Not less than 2” and not more than 4”.

F. Ready Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C 94.

2.4 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. 1. Do not add additional water to the batch at the job site above the amount shown in

the approved mix design without the approval of the Engineer.

B. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C 94 may be required. 1. When air temperature is between 85 degrees F (30 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32

degrees C) reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 degrees F (30 degrees C) reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FORMS

A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support all vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structures.

B. Construct forms complying with ACI 347, to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings,



rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide tab forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyless, reglets recesses to prevent swelling and for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete. Locate temporary openings at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

F. Provide ½” radius tooled edge at exposed edges of slabs on grade.

G. Form Ties: Factory – fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. 1. Provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is at least 1-1/2”

inside concrete and which will not leave holes larger than 1” diameter in concrete surfaces.

H. Provisions for other trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

I. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or other debris just before concrete is placed.

3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute’s recommended practice for “Placing Reinforcing Bars”, for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.



C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverage for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier. Conform to ACI 318 for concrete cover over reinforcement.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on drawings, so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Engineer. Place joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcing across construction joints unless noted on drawings to the contrary.

B. Provide Keyways at least 1-1/2” deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings.

C. Construct Isolation Joints in slabs on ground at points of contact between slabs on ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 of these specifications.

E. Form contraction joints by inserting pre-molded hardboard or fiberboard strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.

F. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:

A. Set and build into forms anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.



B. Edge Forms, Screed Strips and Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds.

3.5 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES

A. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before placing reinforcement. 1. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and

under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer’s directions. 2. Do not allow excess form-coating materials to accumulate in forms or to come into

contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Coat steel forms with non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Pre-placement Inspection, inspect formwork installation, and reinforcing steel for completeness. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used.

B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

C. General: Comply with ACI 304, ACI 304.2 and as herein specified.

D. Deposit continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit as nearly as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation.

E. Placing Concrete in Forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24” and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

F. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI recommended practices.



G. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6” into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

H. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.

I. Consolidate concrete during placing operation so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

J. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

K. Maintain Reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations.

L. Cold Weather Placing: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306. 1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be

caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperature, in compliance with ACI 306 R-78 and as herein specified.

2. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and not more than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement.

3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

4. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

M. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 R-77.

N. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing.



O. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked retarding admixture (Type D) when required by high temperatures, low humidity or other adverse placing conditions.

3.7 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish (RfFm-Fn): For formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work of other construction, unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fin and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Form Finish (SmFm-Fn): For formed concrete surfaces exposed-to-view, or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Smooth Rubbed Finish (SmRbd-Fn): Provide smooth rubbed finish (SmRbd-Fn) to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish (SmFm-Fn) treatment, not later than one day after form removal.

D. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces.

F. Provide ½” radius tooled edge at exposed edges of slabs on grade.

3.8 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Scratch Finish (Sc-Fn): Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material and as otherwise indicated.

B. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerances for floor flatness (F) of 20 and floor levelness of 15. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.



C. Float Finish (Flt-Fn): Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo and as otherwise indicated. 1. After screening, consolidating and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until

ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of F20-F15. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.

D. Trowel Finish(Tr-Fn): Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thin film finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin

final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel, marks uniform in texture and appearance and with a surface plane tolerances F20-F17. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

E. Non-Slip Broom Finish (NSBrm-Fn): Apply non-slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and rams, elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming

with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordination required final finish with Engineer before application.

F. Chemical-Hardener Finish (ChHd-Fn): Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior concrete floors when indicated. Apply liquid chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water, and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3 strength; second coat, 1/2 strength; third coat, 2/3 strength. Evenly apply each coat and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. 1. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions. 2. After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is applied and dried remove surplus

hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water.

G. Non-Slip Aggregate Finish (NSA-Fn): Apply non-slip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps and elsewhere as indicated. 1. After completion of float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly

spread 25 lbs. of dampened non-slip aggregate per 100 square feet of surface. Tamp



aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified.

2. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose non-slip aggregate.

3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. 1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after

placing and finishing. Weather permitting; keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.

2. Continue final curing for at least seven (7) days in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period

B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover or by membrane curing.

C. Provide moisture curing by following methods. 1. Continuous water-fog spray. 2. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating

cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

D. Provide curing compound to slabs as follows: 1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final

finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer.

E. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound. 1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use

of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.

F. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing method.

G. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.



H. Sealer and Dustproofer: Apply a second coat of specified curing and sealing compound only to surfaces given a first coat.

3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provide concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joints, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimen representative of concrete location or members.

C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.

3.11 RE-USE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re-used in work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Engineer.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling-In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to



template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. Use 3000 psi 28-day compressive strength pea gravel grout.

E. Grout base plates and foundations indicated, using specified non-shrink, non-metallic grout.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Engineer. 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, holes left by tie

rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried.

B. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

C. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie hoes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

D. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.

E. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness using a template having required slope.

F. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, included crazing, cracks in excess of 0.001" wide or



which penetrate to reinforcement or completely through non-reinforced section regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

G. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

H. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when acceptable to Engineer.

I. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place compact and finish blending with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.

J. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place compact and finish blending with adjacent finish to blend with adjacent finish concrete.

K. Use the following specified applicable methods for conditions A through J for COATING, PATCHING and REPAIRING. 1. Injection Applications -Contractor to have five (5) years experience and job

references. PERM-INJECT by Permagile Ind., Sikadur 52 Injection System by Sika are acceptable. Others require written approval by Engineer.

2. Epoxy Grouting where shown or as required shall equal or exceed MMM-G¬650a. Acceptable products include 1-270 Epoxy Grout by Permagile, Ind. and approval by Engineer.

3. Epoxy Bonding Agents -Shall be moisture insensitive, 100% reactive solids, waterproof complying with ASTM C-881. Manufacturer shall offer all grades and types. 1-215 HM bond 1 by Permagile, Ind. and Sika-Dur-32-Hi-Mod are acceptable Products. Others require written approval by Engineer.

4. Epoxy Decorative, Protective & Waterproof Coatings -100% solids, solvent free, flexibilized Epoxy Coating which equal or exceeds ASTM D 638 (tensile strength), ASTM D 695 (Compressive strength) and ASTM D 790. Shall be offered in all grades, types, and colors. CAT COAT by Permagile, Ind., Sikagard-62 by Sika and Duraltex by Dural are acceptable. Other Products require written approval by Engineer.



5. Epoxy Acid Resistant coating & Resurfacing System where shown or as required will be 100% solids, have superior resistance to ORGANIC AND MINERAL ACIDS, ALKALIES, SUGAR SOLUTIONS, FATTY ACIDS, ANIMAL & VEGETABLE OILS, SOAPS AND DETERGENTS. Product shall equal or exceed ASTM D-695-61 (compressive) ASTM D-638-61 (tensile), ASTM D¬790-61 (flexural) and Shore D. ASTM D-2240 (hardness) and shall be offered in all grades, types, and colors. PG-2112-2 by Permagile, Ind., #1305 by Concressive Products and Dural 313 by Dural is acceptable. Other Products require written approval by Engineer.

3.14 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. The owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform other tests and to submit test reports. Provide special inspection and verification of concrete construction in accordance with Section 1704.4 of the International Building Code.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete include the following, as directed by Engineer.

C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test for each concrete load at point of discharge; and one

test for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight

concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.

3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and below, and when 80 degrees F (27 degrees C), and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made.

4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 5 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.

5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 10 cu. yds. or fraction thereof, or 2500 sq. ft. of slab, of each concrete class placed in any one day; 2 specimens tested at 7 days, 2 specimens tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

6. When frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are used.

7. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., strength test may be waived by Engineer if, in his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.



8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85% of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer and Contractor on same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

E. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified.



PRECAST CONCRETE BUILDING (SITE BUILT) 13120-1

SECTION 13120

PRE-CAST CONCRETE BUILDING (SITE BUILT)

PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for the design, fabrication and installation of a pre-cast, post-tensioned concrete building. The building shall be field erected on the pile supported foundation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. See the structural drawings and specifications for the structural design of the foundation. Pre-cast building to be LPMI Model 242010 as manufactured by Lonestar Prestress Mfg., Inc., Houston, Texas or approved equal. Building to be provided by manufacturer with all necessary openings as specified in conformance with manufacturer's structural requirements.

1.2 CODES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

A. ACI-318-11, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete”. B. ASCE-7-10, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.

C. 2012 IBC, “2012 International Building Code”.

D. PCI Design Handbook, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. 5th Edition.

E. UL 752, Standard for Safety for Bullet Resisting Equipment, Underwriters Laboratories

Inc.

F. “Manual of Standard Practice”, Concrete Reinforcing Institute.

G. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. C150 - Standard Spec. for Type I and Type II – Low Alkali Portland Cement. 2. C33 - Standard Spec. for Concrete Aggregates.

3. A36 - Standard Spec. for Carbon Structural Steel.

4. A615 - Standard Spec. for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.

5. A706 - Standard Spec. for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

6. A416 - Standard Spec. for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire for Prestressed

Concrete.



7. A185 - Standard Spec. for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. 8. A307 - Standard Spec. for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile

Strength.

9. A123 - Standard Spec. for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

10. A153 - Standard Spec. for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.


A. Fabricator must be a producer member of the National Precast Concrete Association (NPCA).

B. Building fabricator must have a minimum of 10 years of experience manufacturing

pre-cast concrete buildings. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimensions:

Exterior: 24' x 20' x 12’-6”

Interior: 22'-11" x 18'-11" x 10’-1/2”

B. Standard Design Loads:

1. Standard Wind Loading - Vult = 150 MPH (Vasd = 108 MPH) Category II, Exposure C, Enclosed Building

2. Standard Roof Live Load - 60 PSF.

3. Standard Floor Live Load - 250 PSF

4. Seismic Design Category ‘B’, Seismic Importance Factor, I=1.0

C. Roof: Roof panel shall slope 7” in 12’-0” direction from peak to edge. The roof shall

extend a minimum of 4" beyond the wall panel on each side and have a turndown design which extends 3/4" below the top edge of the wall panels to prevent water migration into the building along top of wall panels. Roof shall also have an integral architectural ribbed edge. The roof shall have a minimum required thermal performance (R-value) of R-30.

D. Keyway Roof Joints: Grout in keyway shall be polymer concrete placed after coating



keyway with a methyl methacrylate resin and isocyanate resin.

E. The building shall be erected on the pile supported cast-in-place concrete foundation as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The building manufacturer shall coordinate with the contractor and the foundation drawings for the anchoring of the building walls. Building manufacturer shall provide all hardware and require anchors at time of erection of panels.

F. Walls to be of an insulated precast concrete sandwich panel type. The walls shall have

an extruded polystyrene core sandwiched between interior and exterior concrete wythes. The wall panels shall have a minimum thickness of 6”. Minimum wythe thickness shall be 2”. The walls shall have a minimum required thermal performance (R-value) of R-19 (2009 IECC, Zone 2).

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 01340, “Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples”, shop drawings and calculations detailing all aspects of the building including but not limited to the layout of the anchor bolts shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer of Record. Design shall be performed and Calculations and Shop Drawings shall be stamped by a Registered Louisiana Professional Engineer. If necessary, blockouts and embedded items will be adjusted during the submittal phase.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Steel-reinforced, 6000 PSI minimum 28-day compressive strength.

B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, grade 60 or ASTM A185, grade 80 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Post-tensioning Strand: Roof and floor shall be post-tensioned in field after keyway is

filled and has cured to required strength (psi). Post-tensioned cable shall be 41K Polystrand CP5O, .50 in., 270 KSI, 7-wire ungreased strand (ASTM A416). There will be a minimum of three post-tensioning cables connecting roof and floors together to provide watertight joint.

D. Sealant: All joints between panels shall be sealed on the exterior and interior surface of

the joints. Sealant shall be SIKAFLEX-IA elastic sealant or equal. Exterior sealant joint to be 3/8" x 3/8" square so that sides of joint are parallel for correct sealant adhesion. Back of joint to be taped with bond breaking tape to ensure adhesion of sealant to parallel sides of joint and not the back.



E. Panel Connections: All panels shall be securely fastened together with 3/8” thick steel brackets. Steel is to be of structural quality, hot-rolled carbon complying with ASTM A36 and hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. All fasteners to be 1/2" diameter bolts complying with ASTM A307 for low-carbon steel bolts. Cast-in anchors used for panel connections to be Dayton-Superior #F-63, or equal. All inserts for corner connections must be secured directly to form before casting panels. Floating of connection inserts will not be allowed.

F. Walls to be of an insulated precast concrete sandwich panel type. The walls shall have

an extruded polystyrene core sandwiched between interior and exterior concrete wythes. The wall panels shall have a minimum thickness of 6”. Minimum wythe thickness shall be 2”. The walls shall have a minimum equivalent wood framed wall R-value of R-19 per the 2009 International Energy Conservation Code.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Door and Frame: Shall comply with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI-l00), and as herein specified. The building shall be equipped with single and double 8’ tall minimum doors, width as shown on the electrical drawings. Doors shall be 18-gauge stainless steel doors. Doors shall open as noted on drawings. Frames shall be 16-gauge stainless steel. Doors and frames shall be unpainted.

B. Door Hardware:

1. Handle: Lindstrum pull-handle stainless steel, 8-1/2” x 2”, or passage knob or

equal.

2. Lockset: Thumb latch panic hardware.

3. Hasp-Type Locking System: On single exterior doors for accepting padlock furnished by owner.

4. Hinges: Hagar stainless steel five knuckle ball bearing with non-removable pins

or equal.

5. Threshold: Hagar or National Guard Products extruded aluminum with neoprene seal or equal.

6. Overhead Door Holder: Yale surface mounted overhead slide type with safety

release or equal.

7. Drip Cap: Hager or National Guard Products aluminum with stainless steel screws or equal.

8. Door Closer: Norton 7500 or Yale 4410 with hold open or equal.

9. Surface Bolts (Upper and Lower): Magnokrom Inc. 400-401 cadmium plated finish or equal, as required for double doors.



10. Astragal: Removable, Galvanized steel, same finish and brand as door, as

required for double doors.

11. Door Stop: Ives 445B26D brushed chrome (inactive leaf only) or equal, as required for double doors

2.3 FINISHES

A. Interior of Building: Steel form finish on all interior panel surfaces (some form marks allowed).

B. Exterior of Building: Exposed aggregate.

2.4 VENTILATION

A. Exhaust Fan: In-wall, fixed pitch, direct drive with hurricane-rated, gravity type backdraft damper.

1. Propellers: Statically balanced, constructed of cast aluminum alloy attached to shaft via a taper lock bushing to assure positive rotation.

2. Motor: Standard NEMA in TEFC enclosure. 3. Electrical: HP and voltage ratings to match electrical drawings. 4. CFM: As required by the volume of the building to achieve 6 air changes

per hour at a static pressure of 0.25”.

B. Louvers: Hurricane-rated, drainable type, with removable insect screen. 1. Size: Intake louvers shall be sized to limit the air velocity to a maximum of

500 fpm.

C. Equipment shall be rated for extreme duty (hot environment, corrosive atmosphere).

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCESS

A. Contractor must provide level unobstructed area large enough for crane and tractor/trailer to park adjacent to pad. Crane must be able to place outriggers within 5'-0" of edge of pad and truck and crane must be able to get side-by-side under their own power. No overhead lines may be within 75’ radius of center of pad.

3.2 INSTALLATION



A. Contractor to ship the precast building to the site as located on the drawings.

B. All cost related to permitting, escorts, law enforcement, carrier, etc. to be part of the contractors price.

C. All items to be shipped disassembled and installed in the field by the contractor.

D. Off-loading building from shipping equipment and erecting in its permanent resting place is the responsibility of the contractor.



PRE-FABRICATED CONCRETE SHELTERS

13343 - 1

SECTION 13343


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall provide all labor, equipment and materials for the fabrication of two transportable, prefabricated reinforced concrete, bullet resistant, vandal resistant concrete equipment shelters. The shelters shall be designed for the explicit use of housing, electrical equipment and other related components. The concrete shelters will be constructed in one piece and transported to the location as shown on the drawings. Concrete shelters shall arrive at the site fully completed with all interior walls, doors, louvers, and ventilation equipment necessary to achieve a minimum of 6 air changes per hour without exceeding a velocity of 500 FPM so that rain is not intentionally drawn in by ventilation. All electrical/wiring and light fixtures as called for in the specifications and drawings will be provided by the Contractor and installed in the field. Building penetrations required for conduits and other field-installed penetrations shall be furnished by the building supplier and fully coordinated with the Contractor before preparing shop drawings. Contractor shall install the equipment shelter at the site using adequate cranes and rigging for the shelter loads. Lifting points and loads shall be coordinated with the contractor requirements.

B. See the Structural Drawings and specification for the structural and foundation design for shelters. Shop drawings shall be submitted to engineer of record for review and approval. Final design shall be submitted within two weeks of "notice to proceed".

C. Shelters shall be delivered to the site fully complete and ready for installation. Interior components not required to be integrated into the construction of the shelter can be completed on-site if necessary to meet completion schedule.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ACI-318-11, “Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete”. B. ASCE-7-10, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”.

C. 2012 IBC, “2012 International Building Code”.

D. PCI Design Handbook, Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute. 5th Edition.

E. UL 752, Standard for Safety for Bullet Resisting Equipment, Underwriters Laboratories

Inc.



13343 - 2

F. “Manual of Standard Practice”, Concrete Reinforcing Institute.

G. ASTM, American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. C150 - Standard Spec. for Type I and Type II – Low Alkali Portland Cement. 2. C33 - Standard Spec. for Concrete Aggregates.

3. A36 - Standard Spec. for Carbon Structural Steel.

4. A615 - Standard Spec. for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete

Reinforcement.

5. A706 - Standard Spec. for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

6. A185 - Standard Spec. for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete

Reinforcement. 7. A307 - Standard Spec. for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile

Strength.

8. A123 - Standard Spec. for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

9. A153 - Standard Spec. for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with the requirements of Section 01300 -Submittal Procedures, shop drawings and calculations detailing all aspects of the Concrete Shelter including layout of the anchor bolts shall be submitted for review and approval by the A/E. Design shall be performed and Calculations and Shop Drawings shall be stamped by a Registered Louisiana Professional Engineer. Additionally, test results of any building mock-ups shall be submitted for review as well. If necessary, blockouts and embedded items will be adjusted during the submittal phase.


A. Section 01700 - Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures

B. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit recommended cleaning maintenance procedures, operation instructions, manufacturer data, color name, warranties, etc.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years of documented experience.



13343 - 3

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five (5) years of documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. The contractor must plan for and is solely responsible for the delivery and erection of the concrete shelter. Contractor shall verify that existing access routes and bridges are wide enough and capable of carrying the building. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with utility company to remove overhead clearance conflicts during shipping and erection.

B. Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

C. Schedule delivery to coincide with completion of foundation work. Do not store concrete shelter on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE SHELTER

A. Manufacturers: 1. The quality and standards of the basis of the current design is as per Sabre Industries,

Sioux City, IA,51111, (718) 258-6690, www.sabreindustries.com. 2. Manufacturers meeting or exceeding the basis of design manufacturer.

2.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

A. Shelter Type: 1. The shelter shall be precast reinforce concrete, preassembled concrete prior to

arriving at the site. 2. Shelter Size - Heights shall be 9'-0" minimum from finished floor to finished ceiling. 3. Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate minimum interior and maximum

exterior dimensions for shelters. Comply with indicated dimensions. 4. Corrosion Resistance: Shelter will be placed in close proximity to salt water and

sewer gases.

B. Floors, walls and roof shall be concrete to meet prescribed load requirements

C. Shelter shall include tie down plates if required to meet wind load requirements.

D. Ballistics tested for U.L. 752 (HPR - 30.06) (this requirement is being specified to accommodate high velocity projectiles during peak wind loads and due to the remote location of the shelters).



13343 - 4

2.3 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Reinforced Concrete Shelter shall follow the following design criteria: 1. Structural design and manufacturing shall conform to requirements of ACI 318-11

and PCI Design Handbook 5th Edition. 2. Wall sections shall be a minimum 6" solid concrete, cast in one piece to minimize

joints, with an exterior exposed smooth finish. 3. The walls shall overhang the floor a minimum of 7" from the top floor surface.

There shall be no exposed wall to floor joint. 4. Floor section shall be a minimum 8" waffled structural precast concrete section.

Ribs shall be a minimum 2'-0" O.C. transverse and a minimum 4'-0" O.C. longitudinal. All surfaces shall be smooth.

5. Roof section shall be 5” minimum concrete with a minimum slope of 1/8" per foot. 6. Roof section shall provide a 2" overhang on all sides. The roof will be a hip type

sloping 4 directions. It shall be a cap and fit over the walls, leaving no exposed roof to wall joint/wall sections.

7. Coordinate connection requirements of selected building with foundation details shown on the structural drawings.

B. Design Loading 1. Floor Live Load 250 lbs. per sq. ft. 2. Roof Live Load 60 lbs. per square foot. 3. Wind-Per ASCE 7-10 Basic Wind Speed of 140MPH (ULT), 109 mph (ASD),

Exposure C, Risk Category II. 4. All reinforcing shall meet Grade 60 ASTM-615

C. Concrete specifications 1. Compressive strength shall be a minimum 5000 PSI at 28 days. 2. Mix design shall be 114-118 lb./cu.ft. structural lightweight concrete.

D. Materials specifications 1. Cement used in concrete shall be standard portland cement conforming to the

requirements of the "Standard Specifications for Portland Cement," ASTM Designation C150 Type I/II.

2. Concrete aggregates shall conform to one of the following specifications: "Specifications for Concrete Aggregates," ASTM Designation: C33 or "Specifications for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete," ASTM Designation C330.

3. Water shall be free from injurious quantities of oil, alkali, vegetable matter and salt. Non-potable water shall not be used in mixing concrete.

4. Reinforcement bars shall be deformed steel bars conforming to the requirements of the "Specifications for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," ASTM Designation: A615.



13343 - 5

5. Welded smooth wire fabric shall be steel wire fabric conforming to the requirements of the "Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement," ASTM Designation: A185.

6. Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to prior approval by the quality control supervisor and shall be shown capable of maintaining essentially the same composition and performance throughout the work as the product used in establishing the concrete proportions in the mix design.

7. Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to "Specifications for Air-entraining Admixtures for Concrete," ASTM Designation: C260.

8. Water reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures, accelerating admixtures, and water reducing and accelerating admixtures shall conform to "Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete," ASTM Designation: C494.

9. Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall conform to "Specifications for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement Concrete," ASTM Designation: C618.

E. Sealing 1. Joints- All joints shall be sealed with a compressible, resilient sealant and installed in

accordance with strict manufacturers requirements (See Specification 079000-Joint Protection).

2. There shall be no exposed roof to wall or wall to floor joints.

F. Exterior Shelter Finish: 1. Walls: Washed aggregate concrete, sealed from elements. 2. Roof: Surface shall be smooth and sealed from elements. Surface shall be sloped to

eliminate "ponding" of water. 3. Roof shall be finished with an industry standard coating to prevent water migration

into shelter. 4. Roof coating shall have a minimum 15 year manufacturer warranty.

G. Roofing 1. Membrane roof system equal to a Duro-Last manufactured system or acceptable

equal in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions, unless otherwise noted. Roof System shall be solidly adhered to the roof deck surface and attached with non-corrosive termination strips to the side face of the roof panel anchors on 6” centers with non-corrosive fasteners.

2. Roof system shall be designed to meet ASCE 7-10 wind load requirements- Design criteria is 140 MPH/3 sec gusts.

3. Provided Manufacturer’s 20 year warranty that the roof system in accordance with the design requirements.



13343 - 6

2.4 ARCHITECTURAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Insulation 1. Exterior Walls-Standard wall thickness shall be 1" extruded polystyrene (closed cell

foam) in contact with all concrete surfaces with an additional layer of ½” polyisocyanurate insulation with a R16 (minimum) Wall Insulation Rating.

2. Ceiling-Standard ceiling thickness shall be 4” extruded polystyrene foamboard with ¾” plywood sheathing and surfaced with fiberglass reinforced panels (FRP) and a R22 (minimum) Ceiling Insulation Rating.

2.5 SHELTER ACCESS

A. Doors shall include: 1. Stainless steel non- corrosive stainless steel ball bearing hinges. 2. Hydraulic door closers 3. Each door shall include a door stop 4. Each door shall include a door tie-back device

B. Doors/ Frames 1. Frames

a. Doors and frames shall comply with Steel Door Institute “Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” (SDI-100). Frames shall be16 gauge (minimum) stainless steel.

2. Doors a. Doors shall be minimum 8’ tall and widths as shown on the electrical drawings.

Doors shall be 18 gauge (minimum) stainless steel. 3. Doors and frames shall be unpainted.

2.6 SHELTER VENTILATION

A. Exhaust Fan: In-wall, fixed pitch, direct drive with hurricane-rated, gravity type backdraft damper.

1. Propellers: Statically balanced, constructed of cast aluminum alloy attached to shaft via a taper lock bushing to assure positive rotation.

2. Motor: Standard NEMA in TEFC enclosure. 3. Electrical: HP and voltage ratings to match electrical drawings. 4. CFM: As required by the volume of the building to achieve 6 air changes per

hour at a static pressure of 0.25”.

B. Louvers: Hurricane-rated, drainable type, with removable insect screen. 1. Size: Intake louvers shall be sized to limit the air velocity to a maximum of

500 fpm.

C. Equipment shall be rated for extreme duty (hot environment, corrosive atmosphere).



13343 - 7

2.7 SHELTER ACCESSORIES

A. Shelter walls shall be capable of anchoring equipment. Shelter manufacturer shall provide appropriate documentation on proper mounting of equipment to walls including limitations.

B. Conduit Penetrations: Pre-drilled and prepare openings for insertion of conduits up to 5-inches (trade size). See electrical plans for required quantity and locations.

C. Field Penetrations: Walls will be field-penetrated with a maximum of 1-inch trade size conduit for connections to exterior-mounted receptacles and light fixtures. Provide adequate documentation for Contractor to avoid reinforcing and properly penetrate walls without impacting shelter wind resistance rating.

D. Provide State approval and Inspection for the LA State Fire Marshal's Office for all applicable systems.

E. Provide all required permits for all shelter systems.

2.8 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS

A. Source inspection 1. Source inspection will be required for local state and federal regulatory authorities. 2. Coordinate shelter anchoring details with details shown on structural drawings. 3. Provide all hardware, concrete embeds or any miscellaneous items required to

anchor building to structural slab.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify all surfaces are ready to receive work.

B. Protect Surrounding work from damage.

3.2 SHIPPING AND INSTALLATION

A. Contractor to ship the fabricated pre-fabricated concrete shelter to the site as located on the drawings.

B. All cost related to permitting, escorts, law enforcement, carrier, etc. to be part of the contractors price.

C. Items extending beyond the shelter which will exceed legal shipping widths and/or heights shall be pre-fitted and packed inside the shelter for shipment.



13343 - 8

D. All items that have to be shipped disassembled shall be installed in the field by the contractor.

E. Off-loading shelter from shipping equipment and setting the Shelter in its permanent resting place is the responsibility of the contractor.



MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 1

SECTION 15000

PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This section as well as the Drawing and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 – General Sections included in Division 15 Specifications are for plumbing and related work particular to the City of Kenner – Generators for the Waste Water Treatment Plant. Coordinate with plans and other specifications sections.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 15000 - PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15050 - PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15450 - PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work covered by this Division of the Specifications consists of furnishing all plant, labor, equipment, supervision, appliances, and materials, and in performing all operations in connection with the plumbing systems complete and in strict accordance with this Division of the Specifications and the applicable drawings.

B. All control work, switches, transmitters and control wiring required for equipment that is associated with the bulk fuel oil storage tank shall be provided and installed as part of Division 15 work. All conduit and power wiring shall be provided and installed as part of Division 16 work.

1.4 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the Contract Documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the plumbing work, and in its interface with other work, including electrical and civil/structural work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

B. The Contract Documents contain specific manufacturers and model numbers in order to establish a “Basis of Design” for the project. The intent is not to limit competition, but



to establish performance and physical size requirements using products that will fit the available space and perform as required.

C. Pipe sizes and locations are based on information provided by the manufacturers of the equipment selected as part of the “Basis of Design”. The contractor shall make adjustments as required to accommodate changes to equipment based on the actual equipment supplied.

D. Existing piping and equipment is not to be taken out of service or removed without prior approval from the Owner.

E. Submit coordination drawings prior to purchase-fabrication-installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination.

F. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

G. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

I. Provide concrete housekeeping pads for all equipment. Where housekeeping pads are specified under the structural work, coordinate with that division for sizes required.

J. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to installing piping or other equipment.

K. Install equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

L. Contractor shall visit the site before bidding to familiarize himself with conditions under which he will have to perform his Contract.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The utilities and information shown on the drawings are based on information provided to the designers by the Owner or utility company. The Contractor shall field verify existing conditions and notify the Engineer in writing of any discrepancies prior to commencing with new work.

B. All existing piping and materials not to be reused and becoming surplus or abandoned shall be removed from the premises and shall be property of the Contractor, unless otherwise noted.



1.6 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES

A. All work shall be accomplished at a time most convenient to the Owner and so that the interruption of service shall be minimum and only for changeover.

B. No service shall be interrupted or changeover begun until the time and duration of service interruptions have been agreed to, in writing, signed by the Owner’s Representative, the Engineer, and the Contractor.

C. Temporary connections, or temporary rerouting, to serve existing facilities will be required as the work progresses. Make due allowances in bid.

D. The Contractor is responsible for re-connecting all existing plumbing systems or items to remain such that they are in the same operable condition as prior to construction. It is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to trace the existing systems prior to demolition to ensure that all existing systems to remain will remain operable. At no additional cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall extend existing or new systems to serve those components should any portion of those systems be removed.

1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Workmanship, material and equipment shall be in accordance with Specifications and Drawings, and in some instances the requirements exceed those required by codes and standards. Where not exceeded, the codes and standards shall be considered as absolute minimum requirements.

B. The Contractor shall submit plans and applications to all Parish, State and Federal agencies requiring same and shall obtain all permits that are required. The Contractor shall include in his bid all permit and review fees.

C. The Contractor apply for, pay for and obtain all permits required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.

1.8 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Refer to Division 16 for all electrical work as it pertains to work specified in this section.

1.9 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install all materials and components of the work in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer following the best modern construction practices and conforming to the Contract Documents. Workmanship shall be first class, in both function and appearance, whether finally concealed or exposed and shall be performed by experienced workmen skilled in the type of work. As practicable, the lines of all



exposed components of the system shall be perpendicular or parallel to the lines of the building.

1.10 DRAWINGS

A. Contract Drawings and details are shown to limit and explain structural conditions, requirements, and manner of erecting work. Drawings are intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangements of equipment and piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and devices. Trades shall follow these drawings in laying out their work, check general construction drawings to familiarize themselves with all conditions affecting their work, and shall verify spaces in which their work will be installed.

B. It may be necessary to shift pipes or devices and this is permissible, and may be required under the general contract, but all such changes must be referred to the Engineer for approval. Where rearrangement of piping or equipment is required, Contractor shall prepare and submit approval drawings of the proposed arrangement.

C. Where the Contractor is not certain about the method of installation, he shall ask for details. Lack of details, not requested, will not be an excuse for improper installation, and any such work must be corrected.

1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS AND DATA TO BE SUBMITTED

A. Submit adequate engineering data on each piece of equipment to allow a careful check of compliance with the technical requirements of the Contract Documents. Clearly indicate on submitted data the manufacturer's name, piece number, equipment capacity, and other applicable technical data. Refer to individual sections for specific requirements.

B. Contractor shall clearly identify which item is used on submittals showing multiple items.

C. Corrections or comments made on shop drawings during the review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, Plans and Specifications. Shop Drawings will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with information given in the contract documents. Review of Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, coordinating work with that of all other trades, and performing work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Review of shop drawings shall not permit any deviation from Plans and Specifications. Shop Drawings must be accompanied by signed statement from Contractor, stating that he has reviewed the submittal and checked it for compliance.



D. Any item not specified herein but submitted as a substitute for the specified item shall be accompanied by manufacturer’s documentation starting/illustrating the following applicable information in addition to the specific information requested in other sections. 1. Dimensions/weight. 2. Electrical ratings-voltage, amperage, short circuit capability, etc. 3. Construction - gauge of steel/aluminum, paint finish/application method, color,

NEMA type, etc. 4. Warranty.

1.12 INSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide formal training sessions for all plumbing systems. Training shall be provided by competent instructors who will give full instructions to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements of the equipment or system specified. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Owner for regular operation. The length of training session(s) shall be as long as required to review the plumbing systems to the Owner’s satisfaction with the exception of systems with specified training requirements. There is no limit to the number of attendees on behalf of the Owner.

B. Training sessions shall be coordinated to provide the Owner with sequential training of all plumbing systems and equipment. Impromptu training without proper documentation is not acceptable as formal training.

C. The Contractor is solely responsible for initiating, coordinating, and documenting Owner training sessions. The Contractor shall: 1. Schedule the training session with the Owner’s representative in writing, allowing

sufficient time for the Owner to notify the necessary attendees. 2. Provide a written agenda outlining the systems to be addressed in a given session. 3. Provide a sign in sheet and minutes of the training session. 4. Distribute the above documentation to the Owner and Engineer as proof of

completing formal training. 5. Provide video tapes of the train sessions for future use by the Owner.

1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Bind in loose leaf binders with the words, "Operating and Maintenance Manual" and the project identification imprinted on the cover. Prepare three complete sets of records for the Owner, with table of contents, index, and tabbed section dividers.

B. During the construction period, accumulate the following for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals:



C. Copies of warranties and guarantees on each piece of equipment installed. 1. Plumbing. 2. Wiring and control diagrams. 3. Shop Drawings. 4. Operating instructions for:

a. Plumbing Systems. b. Recommended maintenance procedures.

D. Submit the manuals for approval at approximately 85 percent job completion. Each manual shall consist of: 1. Complete description of each item of equipment and apparatus furnished and

installed - including ratings, capacities, and characteristics. 2. Fully detailed parts list, including all numbered parts of each item of equipment

and apparatus furnished and installed. 3. Manufacturer's printed instructions describing operation, servicing, maintenance

and repair of each item of equipment and apparatus. 4. Provide serial and model numbers for all equipment.

1.14 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications, adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.

C. Coordinate deliveries of materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion.

1.15 GUARANTEES

A. Contractor shall guarantee all materials, workmanship, and equipment furnished under Division 15 for a period of one (1) year after the date of final acceptance or beneficial use by the Owner, whichever date is the earliest.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are scheduled or specified for the purpose of establishing a “Basis of Design”, quality, appearance, performance and serviceability,



and not to limit competition. Scheduled products (as may be modified by detailed Specifications) are those selected as the basis for system design with respect to physical size and space arrangements, required capacity and performance characteristics, and the product quality intended.

B. The Drawings indicate specified products physically arranged in the spaces, as catalogued by Specific manufacturers, generally as listed in the equipment schedules.

C. Listed "Acceptable Manufacturers" are those considered capable of manufacturing products conforming to detailed Specifications, and as such, are invited to compete on an equal basis provided the offering is comparable in every respect to scheduled or specified products and actually conforms to the detailed Specifications and schedule requirements. Listing herein as "acceptable manufacturers" does not imply "accepted," "approved," "prior approval," or any other such connotation.

2.2 AUXILIARY STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS

A. Provide auxiliary structural supports as necessary to support plumbing systems. Supporting members shall be Type 316 stainless steel metal strut framing or standard Type 316 stainless steel structural shapes, designed to support imposed loads with a working stress no greater than 25 percent of ultimate stress values of the members, and articulation with the building structure without exceeding structural limitations at the point of attachment to the building structure.

2.3 SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Furnish a set of special tools and devices required for the proper maintenance of the major pieces of equipment and install on adequate tool board. This shall include only tools which cannot normally be purchased "over-the-counter" at hardware stores.

2.4 EQUIPMENT GUARDS

A. Provide equipment with exposed moving parts with belt guards, coupling guards, fan guards or other enclosures as necessary for personnel safety.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Protect equipment and materials from physical damage, water damage and deterioration after it is delivered to the project, and during the installation.



B. The equipment shall be kept clean. Motors and electrical devices shall be covered with suitable materials to prevent dirt or dust accumulation within equipment. Machinery and devices shall be properly oiled and maintained to prevent rusting and deterioration.

C. Repair scratches, mars, or paint deterioration.

3.2 MATERIAL DAMAGE

A. The Contractor shall immediately report in writing to the Owner and Engineer any incident involving equipment or material damage including rain water damage, pipe leaks, physical damage, etc.

B. At a minimum the report shall include the areas and extent of damage and proposed resolution.

C. Water damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials without exception.

3.3 EQUIPMENT AND PIPE SPACE

A. The Drawings indicate specified products physically arranged in the spaces, as catalogued by specific manufacturers, generally as listed in the equipment schedules.

B. Drawings show pipe diagrammatically.

C. Adhere to Drawings as closely as possible in layout of work.

D. Vary run of piping, run and make offsets during progress of work as required to meet structural and other interferences per reviewed shop drawings.

E. Run exposed piping parallel to or at right angles to equipment or equipment slabs.

F. Solenoid coils shall be oriented in an upright position and installed to allow for easy removal and access.

3.4 FINISHING AND CLEANING

A. Surfaces shall be left clean, debris shall be removed, and equipment shall be furnished in prime coat finish unless otherwise specified.

B. Hangers and Supports: Provide stainless steel metal strut framing system with stainless steel hardware to support all exterior piping systems. Refer to Section 15450 “Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for further details and requirements.



C. Piping and Equipment: Clean exterior of piping and equipment, removing rust, debris and dirt by wire brushing. Remove grease, oil, and similar materials by wiping with clean rags and suitable solvents.

D. Motors, Pumps, Filters and other items with factory finish: Remove grease and oil and leave surfaces clean and polished. Provide touch-up painting of pre-finished mechanical products.

3.5 START UP SERVICE

A. The Contractor shall furnish factory authorized technicians to align, set, check and start up all major pieces of plumbing equipment. Alignment shall be performed prior to installing and connecting piping. Refer to Section 15450 “Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for further details and requirements.



PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 - 1

SECTION 15050

PLUMBING BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Labels and nameplates. 3. Concrete. 4. Grout. 5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following 1. Labels and nameplates.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.




A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Protect stainless steel pipe from weather during storage to prevent corrosion and damage.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with other trades to accommodate piping and electrical requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall be listed by UL Laboratories Inc. in categories for which standards have been set by that agency. Methods of installation shall be in full accordance with the latest and best electrical and mechanical engineering practices.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Section 15450 “Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials for diesel fuel service: ASME B16.21, spiral wound gaskets, equal to “Flexitallic” style CGI constructed in accordance with Military Specifications MIL-G-24716 and MIL-G-15342, Class 150, with stainless 316 inner ring and winding material, series CGI 316/316/FG/CRS suitable for use with diesel fuel.

C. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

D. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.4 LABELS AND NAMEPLATES

A. Pipe Labels:



1. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

2. Pre-tensioned Pipe Labels: Pre-coiled, semi-rigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

3. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

4. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. a. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to

accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

b. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

B. Stencils: 1. Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum

letter height of 3/4 inch for equipment labels, and similar operational instructions. a. Stencil Material: Aluminum or Type 304 stainless steel. b. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint

may be in pressurized spray-can form. c. Identification Paint: Exterior enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1

unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valve Tags: 1. Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers. 2. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch or Type 304 stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum

thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 3. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or S-hook.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve, normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

E. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 CONCRETE

A. All formed and poured in place concrete work shall be provided under CONCRETE. All concrete equipment bases shall be provided under this Section, unless specifically detailed on the Structural drawings.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all required templates and dimensional drawings for housekeeping pads.



C. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger

in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength

2.6 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping and equipment at right angles or parallel to the equipment slabs. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.



G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

I. Verify final equipment locations prior to roughing-in.

J. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

K. Identify all pipes and valves. Pipes shall be identified every 10 feet on center.

L. Expansion and Contraction of Piping: 1. Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe.

Horizontal runs of pipe with expansion loops or joints shall be anchored to the supporting construction to force expansion toward the expansion joints or loops. Horizontal runs of piping without expansion joints or loops, over 50 feet in length, shall be anchored in the middle of the run to force the expansion evenly toward the ends.

2. All pipes shall be installed so that they may contract or expand freely without damage to any other work or injury to itself. Any swing joints, expansion joints, or bends necessary shall be installed whether shown or not.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry

seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.



F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2 and larger, at key locations to allow for dis-

assembly of the main distribution piping.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

C. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger

in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.



5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 15450 - 1

SECTION 15450

PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fuel pipe and fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Flexible joints. 4. Strainers. 5. Supports. 6. Diesel fuel oil tank. 7. Fuel oil filtration system. 8. Packaged fuel transfer pumps. 9. Fuel pump control panel. 10. Fuel tank monitoring and alarm panel. 11. Miscellaneous items.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16232, “Packaged Generator Fuel Pumps and Controls” for requirements pertaining to fuel system generator day tank return pumps and controls.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated in paragraph above.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.



C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Fuel Oil Pipe and Fittings:

1. Piping shall be schedule 40, Type 316 stainless steel pipe conforming to ASTM A312/ASME SA312, ends to suit type of fittings used.

a. Threaded fittings shall be schedule 40, Type 316 stainless steel screwed fittings conforming to Class 150, ANSI B16.3.

b. Welded fittings shall be schedule 40 Type 316 stainless steel butt weld fittings conforming to ASTM 403, Class WP.

c. Flanges shall be Class 150, ANSI B16.5 forged flanges conforming to ASTM 182/ASME SA182.

d. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12.

B. Fuel Oil Gaskets: ASME B16.21, spiral wound gaskets, equal to “Flexitallic” style CGI constructed in accordance with Military Specifications MIL-G-24716 and MIL-G-15342, Class 150, with stainless 316 inner ring and winding material, series CGI 316/316/FG/CRS suitable for use with diesel fuel.

C. Pipe Joint Compound: Contractor shall use pipe joint compound or tape that is suitable for fluid being carried in the pipe. For fuel oil, hydraulic oil or other hydrocarbons, pipe joint compound shall be “Oatley” Great-Blue pipe joint compound or approved equal



2.3 VALVES

A. Manual Fuel Oil Valves:

1. Fuel oil valves NPS 2 and smaller shall be “Morrison Bros.” figure 691BSS, or approved equal, UL Listed, full port ball valves with stainless steel body and ball and PTFE Teflon seals. End connections shall be threaded. Working pressure shall be 1000 psig WOG.

B. Solenoid Valves:

1. Fuel oil service solenoid operated ball valves NPS 2 and smaller shall be “ASCO” 8210G129 series, or approved equal, UL Listed, pilot operated, general service, two-way ball valves with stainless steel bodies, PTFE seals and discs, stainless steel core tube, core, plug, nut and springs. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X, 120 VAC, 1 phase, 60 Hz for electrical characteristics.

C. Check Valves:

1. Check valves, except non-slamming check valves, NPS 2 inches and smaller shall be in-line type, Class 125 (125 PSI SWP / 200 PSI WOG) stainless steel body and trim, threaded ends, and conform to MSS SP-80.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Provide UL Listed, stainless steel braided flexible connectors on fuel oil system connections to allow for movement and to prevent transmission of vibration to the piping systems. Flexible connectors shall be NAFTA approved and equal to “OPW” FC series with male swivel on one end.

2.5 STRAINERS

A. Y-pattern strainers shall be rated for 125 psig minimum working pressure, bronze or Type 316 stainless steel.

B. End connections shall be threaded or flanged.

C. Screens shall be stainless steel with round perforations, sized as recommended by the manufacturer to suit fluid being conveyed.



2.6 SUPPORTS

A. Perforated or band hangers on any piping will not be permitted.

B. Supports shall be designed to permit movement due to expansion and contraction. Where drawings show details of supports and anchors, conform to details shown. Where details are not shown, conform to general requirements specified below.

C. Type 316 Stainless Steel Pipe Supports:

1. Horizontal Piping: Cold formed, 12 gage, ASTM A240 Type 316 stainless steel strut channels with nominal dimensions of 1-5/8” wide by 1-5/8” high with continuous slot with in-turned lips to allow for attachments at any point on the channel. Provide 9/16” diameter by 1-1/8” long slots at the bottom of the channel for anchoring horizontal channel to vertical channel risers. Provide post bases to anchor support structures to the concrete slab.

2. Pipe Clamps: Two piece, 12 gage, ASTM A101, Type 316 stainless steel pipe clamps suitable for use with strut channel complete with stainless steel recessed hex head machine screws and square nuts.

D. Hold piping in place by using approved supports and anchors, designed to support the combined weight of the fluid and weight of the pipe. Anchor strut channels to concrete slabs using adhesive anchoring system, equal to “Hilti” model HIT-Z-R 1/2” x 4-1/2” SS316 safe set system with type Z rods having 1/2” by 4-1/2” embedment. Anchor to slab using HY-200 adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Support piping at each change of direction, at ends of branches, at base and top of riser pipes and drops and wherever necessary to prevent sag, bending or vibration, in addition to above-listed hanger spacing.

2.7 DIESEL OIL FUEL TANK

A. Above ground Main Fuel Storage Tank shall be a horizontal, cylindrical, protected double-wall, steel storage tank with a nominal capacity of 20,000 gallons storage. The tank shall be in conformance with the Underwriters Laboratories' UL-2085 for protected above ground tanks. Both inner and outer shells shall be built per UL-142 specifications and so labeled. Refer to the Drawing details for tank size and number, sizes and locations of connections and accessories.

1. The tank shall be supported on the tank manufacturer’s standard UL listed support saddles that shall elevate the tank above the underlying concrete slab



a minimum of 6 inches to allow for visual inspection and pipe routing. The saddles shall be installed by the tank manufacturer prior to shipping the tank from their fabrication facility.

2. The tank shall be provide with lifting lugs. 3. The tank shall be provided with an OSHA approved ladder and catwalk. 4. The interior of the tank shall be coated per API Std. 1631 requirements. 5. The exterior of the tank shall be coated with a three part coating system

(primer-intermediate coat-final coat). The tank shall be sand blasted to a near white finish (SSPC-SP-6) prior to applying the coating system.

6. The tank shall be provided with a wooden stick gage. The gage length shall allow for measurement of the entire level of the fuel within the tank. The gage shall be compatible with the fuel to be measured (no swelling or damage from fuel contact). The gage shall be graduated in feet and inches. The smallest unit of measure shall be 1/16 inch. Provide a calibration chart to convert the stick gage readings into gallons of product.

7. Tank shall be pressure tested at the factory and shall be re-tested with air at the jobsite prior to installation.

2.8 FUEL FILTRATION SYSTEM

A. The fuel filtration unit shall be as manufactured by “RCI Technologies” model FRS-11, or approved equal, to serve the new 20,000 gallon main fuel oil storage tank. The unit shall be designed to automatically circulate and clean fuel at a rate of 11 gpm for a single tank.

B. The unit shall be designed to remove up to 99.8% of free water and up to 95% of other heavy contaminants down to 10 microns.

C. The control system shall be housed in a NEMA 4, key-lockable enclosure which shall be provided with the following:

1. Fuel purifier rated for 40 gpm flow with 1/2” water drain valve. 2. Continuous-duty, TEFC, capacitor start motor, 1 Hp, 120 volts, 1 phase, 60

Hz. 3. Fuel pump rated for 11 gpm flow. 4. UL 508A PLC controller with 6” monochrome Operator interface touch pad

to allow for programming and alarm monitoring. 5. H-O-A keyed selector switch with summary light. 6. Programmable 7-day, 24 hour, real-time clock with user definable start and

run times. 7. Four relay alarm outputs to include “general” alarm, “programmable” alarm,

“purifier high water level” alarm and “fuel catch basin leak” alarm.



8. Test rest alarm button and audible alarm horn. 9. Relays to allow for remote monitoring.

D. The PLC controller shall be housed in a NEMA 4XC enclosure.

E. The cabinet shall be provided with a powder-coated finish, dual doors, a leak float switch set to detect 1/8” liquid level and a pressure switch factory set to alarm at 75 psig. Unit shall be floor mounted.

2.9 PACKAGED DUPLEX FUEL TRANSFER PUMPS

A. Provide a “Phillips Pump Co.” model DP-44, or approved equal, duplex, skid mounted fuel oil transfer set complete with heavy duty rotary gear pumps having cast iron construction with iron rotor and idler, steel shaft and pin, BUNA-N mechanical seal, carbon graphite idler bushing, inner ball bearing, radial thrust bearing, plain head and 2” ports.

B. Pumps shall be rated for nominal 45 gallons per minute at a differential pressure of 50 psig with a 3 Hp, 208 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 1725 rpm motor. Pumps shall be suitable for use with No. 2 diesel fuel.

C. The packaged unit shall be mounted on a common steel base comprised of heavy gauge steel plate with 3” high drip lip and 1/2” NPT drain. Provide a float type, pump set leak detection sensor, with protective shroud and control panel pump set “Leak Detected” indicating alarm.

D. Suction side equipment shall include the following mounted in a 2” suction header: 1. Two Basket strainers with 40 mesh strainer basket screen and differential

pressure gage across strainer. 2. Two full port, 600 psig rated ball valves constructed of two-piece brass body

with PTFE seat, UL Listed. 3. Two 30” Hg/0-30 psig compound gauges with 4” face, liquid filled with brass

internals and 1/4” gauge ball valves, 600 psig rated, two-piece brass construction with PTFE seat, UL Listed.

4. Suction header constructed of schedule 40 carbon steel piping and nipples, 150 pound malleable iron screwed fittings and Class 125/150 flanges where applicable.

E. Discharge side equipment shall include the following mounted in a 2” discharge header: 1. Three spring check valves, 400 psig rated, bronze body, PTFE poppet.



2. Two full port, 600 psig rated ball valves constructed of two-piece brass body with PTFE seat, UL Listed.

3. Two, in-line internal relief valves, continuous by-pass type, cast iron body, stainless steel spring.

4. Pressure gauge, 4” face, liquid filled with brass internals and 1/4” gauge ball valves, 600 psig rated, two-piece brass construction with PTFE seat, UL Listed, 0-160 psig range.

5. Discharge header constructed of schedule 40 carbon steel piping and nipples, 150 pound malleable iron screwed fittings and Class 125/150 flanges where applicable.

6. Flow Switch, low pressure type suitable for use up to 100 psig, NEMA 1 brass housing, stainless steel vane with junction box, 120 volt AC SPDT switch installed to provide “Proof of Flow”.

2.10 FUEL TRANSFER PUMP CONTROL PANEL

A. Provide a duplex control panel with a NEMA/CSA 3R enclosure that is UL (UL 508) Listed with the following components: 1. Individual disconnect switches, motor protectors and transformers with

“through-the-door” operation and control circuit fuse (208 volts through 575 volts, 3 phase.

2. Two magnetic motor starters. 3. Hand-Off-Automatic (HOA) selector switch. In “Hand” mode the selected

pump shall operate in manual mode, by-passing all level sensor settings and run until the selector switch is set to the “off” mode.

4. One white “Power ON” pilot light. 5. Two green “Pump RUN” pilot light. 6. Terminal strip. 7. Control circuit fuses. 8. Pump selector switch (FTP1 – FTP2) 9. Automatic alternation feature. 10. Lead pump “Failure” pilot light & manual reset button with automatic Lag

pump “Start”. 11. Low flow signal to start lag pump with timers, red pilot lights and reset

buttons. 12. Low flow alarm signals.

B. Alarm signals shall be audible and visual type, with a silence button to silence the audible signal. Visual signals shall require manual reset.



2.11 FUEL TANK MONITORING AND ALARM PANEL

A. The Automatic Tank Gauge and Leak Detection System shall be designed for use in single fuel storage tanks, associated piping, and containment areas containing petro-leum hydrocarbons but configured to monitor four tanks.

B. It shall be in accordance with USEPA Federal standards for (USTs) described in

Subpart D, 40 CFR Part 280. It shall be independently third party certified.

C. The System shall be comprised of a console with printer, magnetostrictive inventory probe and leak sensor. The System components shall have capabilities as described in the sections below.

D. The Console shall provide "supervised fault detection" for the leak sensors and asso-

ciated field wiring. The Console alarm display and reports shall differentiate be-tween alarms caused by faults and leaks.

E. The Console shall provide an interface to the existing PLC via ModBus in addition

to providing the Transfer Pump Control Panel “programmable” dry contact relays and 4-20 mA continuous level outputs.

F. The System manufacturer shall have been in the liquid gauging business for a mini-

mum of 50 years and shall provide documentation, upon request, of third party certi-fication and Underwriters Laboratories Listing. The manufacturer shall have an In-staller and Service Provider Certification Program, in addition to Installation and Operation Manuals that provide details on the manufacturer's recommended installa-tion and operation practices.

G. Console shall be equal to “Pneumercator” model Series TMS 2000.

H. Fuel Inventory Probes:

1. Rigid (Stainless Steel) Inventory Probes shall be of the Magnetostrictive type

used for gauging liquids in above and below ground storage tanks. Probe to con-sole communication shall employ digital transmission techniques carried over standard, two-conductor, twisted pair, shielded cable, with a maximum cable length restriction of no less than 4000 feet. The probes shall interface to the con-sole through a "universal" probe/sensor board that accepts any type of “Pneumer-cator” magnetostrictive probe and leak switch or solid-state leak sensor. The board shall be capable of interfacing up to four (4) inventory probes and up to eight (8) sensors or switches to the console. Probe operating temperature and pressure shall be -40 to +175 degrees F and 150 PSIG respectively. The probe



shall be UL approved for use in Class I, Division I, Group C & D hazardous lo-cations.

2. Probe shall be designed for AST applications. Probe shall have continuous gaug-

ing accuracy of +/- 0.0005 inches for product, +/- 0.001 for water and +/- 0.001 degrees F. for (relative) temperature. The AST probe shall contain at least one (1) temperature sensor along its length to determine volumetric temperature compensation and require a single (2) inch Stainless Steel product float with leader cable with watertight connector, and a 2” direct mount probe kit.

3. AST Probe shall be equal to “Pneumercator” model MP450S–11 for tanks with

ID’s of 12 to 216 inches.

I. Leak Sensors:

1. Leak sensors shall be used for liquid detection in interstitial space of the tank. The sensors shall interface to the console through a "universal" probe/sensor board that accepts any type of “Pneumercator” leak switch or solid-state leak sensor and magnetostrictive probe or a Universal Sensor Only Card.

J. Non-Discriminating Type Liquid Leak Sensor (Float Switch):

1. The Non-Discriminating Leak Sensor shall be cylindrical in design utilizing reed

switch technology for detecting liquids in dry areas such as tank piping, transi-tion sumps, containment areas and the interstitial spaces of doublewall steel tanks. The sensor assembly shall provide a twenty-five (25) foot, 2-conductor, #22 AWG gage wire cable. The supervised wiring feature shall be provided. It shall detect “Open” or “Short-circuited” conditions in the sensor field wiring.

2. Leak sensor shall be (Non-Discriminating type), equal to “Pneumercator” model

LS 600 LDBN-F. M. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Fuel Port: Provide a “Simplex” fuel port cabinet assembly to allow for filling of the main fuel storage tanks. The unit shall consist of the following:

1. A weatherproof, lockable, Type 316 stainless steel box with spill containment.

2. NPS 3 tank truck dry quick-connect fitting. 3. NPS 3 shut off valve.



4. 1 gpm hand pump to allow any spilled fuel accumulated in the fill port to be pumped into the fill line.

5. Surface mounting wall bracket.

B. Overfill Alarm: Provide a “Pneumercator” model RA400, or approved equal, overfill alarm capable of monitoring the bulk fuel storage tank. The unit shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant/environmentally resistant housing with stainless steel fittings and be UL listed. Housing shall be NEMA 4X. The alarm shall consist of the following:

1. Alarm signals to monitor overfill condition. 2. Power light. 3. 100 decibel (measured at four feet from device) alarm horn. 4. Alarm light to signal overfill condition. 5. Liquid level float switch to alarm at 90% liquid level.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping and equipment. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and equipment, to calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping and equipment as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping at right angles or parallel to equipment and foundation slab. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

D. Install piping to allow for drainage.

E. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install pressure gages, pressure transducers, flow regulators, back-pressure valves, filters, etc. as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.



H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install unions, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment and machine.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

D. Flanged Joints: Use asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket suitable for compressed air. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install shutoff valves and unions or flanged joints at connections to equipment.

B. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of flow to and from piping specialties and equipment.

3.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible pipe connectors as indicated on the Drawings

B. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible pipe connectors in piping.



3.5 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling and at maximum 8’-0” intervals.

3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.7 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for piping, valves, and specialties.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust pumps and filters to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

C. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.

D. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.

E. Adjust initial flow or pressure set points.

F. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.


A. Perform field tests and inspections.

B. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired.



C. Cap and subject piping to pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Re-inspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection.

E. Ensure that all fuel piping weld integrity test and coating inspections have been performed.

1. Evacuate all accumulated water from fuel tanks, piping and valves. 2. Verify that connections are tight and leak free. 3. Prior to flushing fuel piping, the Contractor shall remove rust, corrosion and

construction debris from the interior of the fuel piping system. 4. Remove solenoid valves from piping prior to flushing. Flush system for a

minimum of 30 to 45 minutes at a flow velocity 3 to 5 times greater than normal flow velocity.

5. Flushing shall continue until the fuel being delivered is free of construction debris with the final particle count meeting ISO 4406-09 requirements.

6. After successful completion of the fuel system flushing, the Contractor shall re-install the control solenoid valves. Electrical and mechanical component adjustments shall be made and the following equipment and performance test shall be performed: a. Static and continuity ground verification. b. Solenoid valve operation. c. Back-pressure regulating valve operation. d. Level alarm activation. e. On – Off staging of pumps by tank level alarms/probes. f. Pump shut down on tank critical high level conditions. g. Level probe interconnection with flow control (solenoid) valves. h. Tank overfill valve closure upon tank high level conditions. i. Tank gaging system calibration.

F. Perform Fuel Tank Tightness Test as follows:

1. The tank manufacturer shall perform tightness test on each above ground fuel tank and waste oil storage tank. Testing shall be in accordance with STI R912.

2. Repair leaks discovered during the tests. Following any repair, re-test the tank until the tank successfully passes the test requirements.

3. The manufacturer shall provide written reports of the test performance.



G. Perform Fuel Tank Fill Test as follows:

1. Tank fill test shall not be performed until after the flushing, cleaning and adjusting to the fuel system has been completed.

2. Fuel shall be supplied by Contractor. 3. For the tank fill test, the Contractor shall fill each tank with fuel in order to

verify that all alarms and level probes are functioning correctly. 4. Correct and re-test any problems detected during the initially testing. 5. Verify that all tank gages or level indicators are calibrated and operating

properly and that all solenoid valves operate correctly.

3.10 INSTRUCTIONS AND DEMONSTRATIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide formal training sessions for all plumbing systems. Training shall be provided by competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance, including pertinent safety requirements of the equipment or system specified.

B. Refer to Section 15000 Plumbing General Requirements for further requirements.



ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010 - 1

SECTION 16010

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

A. This specification is for electrical and related work particular to KENNER WWTP NO. 3 – GENERATOR BANKING. Coordinate with other plans and specifications sections.

1.2 THE REQUIREMENT

A. The Contractor shall take into consideration at all times the nature of the work and shall provide all tools, supplies, materials, equipment, and all labor necessary for the furnishing, construction, installation, testing, and operation of all electrical work and appurtenant work necessary to provide a complete unified and operable system, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all electrical items specified in the various Sections of Division 16 of these Specifications, except where otherwise specified or shown in the Contract Documents.

C. Where drawings and specifications contain conflicting information, Contractor shall include the most expensive option in the bid price.


A. The general provisions of the Contract, including Contract Requirements, and other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section. Sections included in DIVISION 16 of the Project Manual are as follows:

SECTION 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 16055 POWER SYSTEM STUDY SECTION 16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING SECTION 16111 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES (UNDER 600-VOLTS) SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES SECTION 16160 CONTROL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION 16231 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS



SECTION 16232 PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR FUEL PUMPS AND CONTROLS

SECTION 16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES SECTION 16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES SECTION 16416 PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION EQUIPMENT SECTION 16430 PARALLELING LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR SECTION 16440 PANELBOARDS SECTION 16441 SWITCHBOARDS SECTION 16460 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SECTION 16491 FUSES SECTION 16510 LIGHTING SECTION 16902 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS

1.4 REFERENCE CODES, AND STANDARDS

A. General: All work specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the following recognized standards and codes to the extent that provisions thereof are not in conflict with other provisions of these specifications. In addition to standards specified in individual work sections, the following standards are imposed, as applicable to the work in each instance:

1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection

Facilities 3. Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities (10 States Standards) 4. NEMA/ANSI/ASTM.

a. Electrical material shall be built and tested in accordance with the applicable standards of the National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA); the American National Standards Institute (ANSI); and the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM).

5. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL). a. Electrical materials shall be new and unused and shall be listed, inspected,

approved and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., where such labeling service is available.

6. NFPA-101, Life Safety Code. a. OSHA Code of Federal Regulations (for construction practices) b. Applicable state and local codes/ordinances.

7. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA). 8. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 9. Instrument Society of America (ISA). 10. Standards and Practices for Instrumentation. 11. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Requirements.

a. Construction and installation shall comply with all applicable provisions of 29CFR1910 and 29CFR1926.



12. Any other applicable local code and / or standard not identified above but enforced by the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).

1.5 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This Section specifies several categories of provisions for electrical work, including: (1) Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 1, (2) General performance requirements within the electrical systems as a whole, and (3) General work to be performed as electrical work because of its close association.

B. This Project Manual and accompanying Drawings are intended to describe complete workable systems of the various types. Items of materials, work, or equipment not mentioned but normally necessary for the proper execution of this work, shall be provided as if specifically called for, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.6 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Drawings: 1. Refer to the Electrical Drawings for graphic representations, schedules and

notations showing electrical work. 2. The Drawings show approximate locations only of feeders, branch circuits,

outlets, etc., except where specific routing or dimensions are indicated. The Owner reserves the right to make reasonable changes in locations indicated before roughing-in without additional cost to the project.

3. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all of the offsets, fittings, and accessories required. The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing fittings, bends, junction boxes, pull boxes, access panels, and accessories required to meet such conditions.

4. The Contractor shall allow in its bid, procurement, installation and testing work for variations in site dimensions, layout, ease of access, and construction utilities available at the various sites. In no case will extra payments be made to the Contractor because of site variations.

B. Project Manual: 1. Refer to the Division 16 Sections for the primary technical Sections of electrical

work. 2. General Outline: This section of the Project Manual covers furnishing materials,

equipment, constant competent supervision, special tools, test equipment, technicians, and labor necessary for installation of a complete working electrical system, all as indicated on the plans of in this Project Manual.

C. Scope: 1. Under this part of the contract, electrical facilities will be constructed to provide a

banked standby power system to provide backup power to the Kenner WWTP.



2. The work shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following: a. Packaged Engine Generators b. Paralleling Switchgear c. Standby System Control Equipment d. Standby power distribution systems - feeder & branch circuits, panels,

wiring, transformers, devices, etc. e. Power wiring and connections of motors and mechanical equipment. f. Grounding systems. g. Raceway systems. h. Lighting systems-fixtures/lamps/auxiliaries wiring/connections/etc. i. Temporary electrical services for construction.

1.7 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install all materials and electrical components of the work in accordance with instructions of manufacturer following the best modern construction practices and conforming to the Contract Documents. Workmanship shall be first class, in both function and appearance, whether finally concealed or exposed and shall be performed by experienced workmen skilled in the type of work. As practicable, the lines of all components of the system shall be perpendicular or parallel. In general, workmanship shall conform to guidelines set forth in N.E.C.A. manuals.

B. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with printed recommendations of the manufacturer. The installation shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the type of work and installation shall be coordinated in the field with other trades so that interferences are avoided.

C. All work, including installation, connection, calibration, testing, and adjustment, shall be accomplished by qualified, experienced personnel working under continuous, competent supervision. The completed installation shall display competent work, reflecting adherence to prevailing industrial standards and methods.

D. The Contractor shall provide adequate means for and shall fully protect all finished parts of the materials and equipment against damage from any cause during the progress of the work and until acceptable by the Engineer. All materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, shall be covered in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or splattered with water foam, mud, concrete, paint, etc. All moving parts shall be kept clean and dry. The Contractor shall clean, replace, or have refinished by the manufacturer, all damaged material or equipment at no expense to the Owner.

1.8 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: Refer to Division 1 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in



showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and in its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with exposed conduit and similar services running parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 8'-0" overhead clearance.

C. All conduit and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve head room and keep openings and passageway clear.

D. Where the Drawings do not indicate equipment locations, such locations shall be obtained from the Engineer. Where equipment is installed without instruction and must be moved, it shall be moved without additional cost to the OWNER.

E. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of electrical work (equipment).

F. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

G. Refer to equipment installation manuals for rough-in requirements.

H. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

I. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for electrical installations.

J. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

K. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.

L. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of electrical equipment and materials.

M. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install electrical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

N. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.



O. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

P. Field Control of Location and Arrangement: Location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items shall be determined by the Contractor in the field, based on the physical size and arrangement of equipment, equipment clearance requirements, finished elevations, and obstructions.

1.9 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY

A. Furnish and install all necessary temporary power, metering, lighting or wiring that is required to insure quality workmanship everywhere.

B. Furnish and install area distribution boxes with ground fault protection so located that the individual trades may use their own construction-type extension cords to obtain proper power and artificial lighting at all points where required by inspectors and for safety.

1.10 EXISTING EQUIPMENT AND INFRASTRUCTURE:

A. All existing equipment and infrastructure at the plant shall be protected throughout construction.

B. Where selective demolition is required by the documents, extend conduits and conductors to maintain electrical continuity of electrical equipment serving areas and equipment not demolished. This applies to both power and communications circuits.

C. All existing distribution equipment, and communications equipment, and associated circuits shall remain in good working order unless otherwise noted.

1.11 INTERFERENCES

A. Definition: Any electrical work that disrupts normal operations of the existing plant shall be considered an interference.

B. Care shall be taken to limit interferences as much as possible. Where interferences are necessary to execute the work, such interferences shall be fully coordinated with Plant Operations. Notification of any required interference shall be in writing and shall include the reason for the interference, the nature of the interference (what systems will be affected), and expected duration of the interference.

C. The Plant reserves the right to delay scheduled interferences based on weather, availability of key personnel, and other factors that would result in an extended duration of the interference or in the plant’s inability to respond appropriately to a weather event.



D. The plant reserves the right to request that an interference be performed at a date or time outside of normal working hours.

E. Interferences of longer than 8 hours will not be acceptable. Contractor shall plan for temporary services where longer interferences are necessary.

F. Existing generators may be available for mitigating interferences. If acceptable to the plant, Contractor shall be responsible for replenishing fuel used.

G. All interferences shall be amended as rapidly as possible.

1.12 SITE VISIT

A. Prior to bidding, Contractor shall visit the site to thoroughly review the scope of work and observe existing conditions. The Contractor shall be familiar with the scope identified on the drawings prior to visiting the site and shall become familiar with existing field conditions impacting the scope of work, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Location of control and power sources relative to the location of new devices and equipment.

2. Location of existing devices to be removed within the areas of work. 3. Structural and Architectural conditions such as locations of masonry walls,

beams, etc. 4. Modifications required to existing equipment to accomplish the work. 5. Requirements set forth by the Quality Assurance Standards that are not clearly

identified on the drawings. 6. Existing equipment, devices, conduit, etc. that must be relocated in order to

accomplish the work. This shall apply to conditions that are visually apparent in the field without the need for selective demolition.

B. Additional compensation will not be considered for additional work required by the Contractor as a result of the Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement.

C. Any items discovered that require additional work not clearly identified by the drawings shall be brought to the immediate attention of the Engineer prior to bid for issuance of an Addendum.

1.13 LOAD MEASUREMENTS

A. Where new branch circuits or feeders are added to existing distribution equipment, Contractor shall take load measurements in accordance with NFPA 70: 220.87 (1), Exception. Load measurement readings shall be delivered to the Engineer for verification of existing distribution equipment sizes. Electrical rough-ins for new circuits and feeders shall not begin until existing distribution equipment capacities are verified by the Engineer.



1.14 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Submittals will be accepted only when submitted by the Contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly will not be processed.

B. The Contractor shall submit complete material lists for the work of this Division. Such lists shall state manufacturer and brand name of each item or class of material. The Contractor shall also submit shop drawings for all grounding work not specifically shown.

C. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of all equipment, apparatus, and fixtures which it proposes to use. The list shall include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items.

D. Shop drawings are required for materials and equipment listed in other sections. Shop drawings shall provide sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications.

E. Catalog data shall be submitted to supplement all shop drawings. Catalog custom bulletins, brochures, or the like or photocopies of applicable pages thereof shall be submitted for mass produced, non-custom manufactured material. These catalog data sheets shall be stamped to indicate the project name, applicable Specification section and paragraph, model number, and options. This information shall be marked in spaces designated for such data in the stamp.

F. Corrections or comments made on submittals and shop drawings during the review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, Drawings, and Project Manual.

G. Shop Drawings will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with information given in the contract documents. Review of Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions, coordinating work with that of all other trades, and performing work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Review of shop drawings shall not permit any deviation from Plans and Project Manual. Shop Drawings must be accompanied by signed statement from contractor, stating that he has reviewed the submittal and checked it for compliance.

H. Only firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years, shall be utilized.

1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS/PRIOR APPROVALS



A. Only firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical products of types required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years, will be considered.

B. Any item submitted for approval as a substitute for the specified item shall be accompanied by manufacturer's documentation stating/illustrating the following applicable information in addition to the specific information requested in other sections: 1. Dimensions/weight. 2. Electrical ratings-voltage, amperage, short circuit capability, etc. 3. Construction - gauge of steel/aluminum, paint finish/application method, color,

NEMA type, etc. 4. Warranty. 5. Local manufacturer's representative or nearest stocking distributor. 6. Length of time the product has been available to the public. 7. Documentation to adequately demonstrate that the proposed item is equivalent to

the one specified.

C. Where appropriate to demonstrate equivalency, calculations shall be provided.

D. Engineer reserves the right to reject equipment submitted as a substitution if insufficient information is provided to demonstrate compliance with requirements of the plans and specifications. Right of rejection shall also be reserved if insufficient data is provided to demonstrate proposed equipment will perform equal to or better than the specified equipment.

1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications, adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.

C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion.

1.17 RECORD DOCUMENTS:

A. Refer to other Division 16 sections, and Division 1 for requirements.

B. In addition to the requirements of other sections, the Contractor shall show depths and routing of all concealed below-grade electrical installations. Drawings shall include



measurements from fixed locations that will be easily identifiable in the future (distance from faces of columns, fuel containment dikes, etc.).

C. Record drawings shall be available to the Engineer during construction.

1.18 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA:

A. Refer to other Division 16 sections, and Division 1 for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

1.19 WARRANTIES:

A. Refer to other Division 16 sections, and Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties.

B. All electrical equipment, devices, installation, labor, and workmanship provided by the Contractor as part of this division shall be warranted free from defects in work and materials for 12 months from the date of final acceptance. Equipment, materials, and/or devices that fail within the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost.

1.20 CLEANING

A. Refer to other Division 16 sections, and Division 1 for general requirements for final cleaning.

B. Clean and restore to original finish all equipment prior to final acceptance.

C. During the progress of the work the Contractor shall clean the premises and shall leave the premises and all portions of the site free of debris.

D. In addition to the requirement of other sections, all parts of the materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Exposed parts shall be thoroughly cleaned of concrete, grout, adhesives, and other materials. All oil and grease spots shall be removed with a non-flammable cleaning solvent. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out.

1.21 GUARANTEE:

A. The work installed shall be kept in perfect working order for one year from date of substantial completion Guarantee shall be based upon defective materials and/or workmanship. Furnish free of cost to the Owner materials and labor necessary to comply with this guarantee.



1.22 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS:

A. Electrical service for all equipment furnished under this Project manual shall be roughed-in and connected under this Section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain correct roughing-in dimensions and requirements for this equipment.

B. Some equipment will be furnished under other divisions of work. Connection / interconnection of that equipment shall be part of Division 16 and shall comply with Division 16 Sections.

1.23 TESTING

A. The contractor shall conduct operating tests to demonstrate that the electrical systems are installed and will operate properly and in accordance with the requirements of this Project Manual. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish instruments and personnel required for such tests. The Contractor shall pay all associated costs, including all replacement parts and labor required as a result of damages caused by tests, and to correct faulty installation.

B. Any work and materials tested and found varying from the requirements of the Drawings and Project Manual shall be replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. Corrections, repairs, and/or replacements shall be made in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

C. Standard factory test reports for mass-produced equipment shall be submitted along with the shop drawings for such equipment. Submit field test reports to the Engineer for review prior to final acceptance of the project.

D. The requirements of this paragraph are in addition to specific tests which may be called for in other sections.

1.24 MOUNTING HEIGHTS:

A. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, the following mounting heights shall apply. Upon approval, mounting heights may be adjusted.

B. Heights of Outlets - all heights measured from finish floor to bottom of device. 1. Wall Switches 46" 2. Receptacle Outlet 16"

C. Heights of Disconnect Switches, Protective Devices, Controllers, etc. 1. The mounting height of disconnect switches, circuit breakers, motor controllers,

push button stations, and other similar devices and equipment will vary depending upon location and whether individually or group mounted. For convenience and



safety operating levers, handles or buttons shall be mounted no more than 78 inches above the finish floor line.

D. Panelboards shall be located so that the highest overcurrent protective device is a maximum of 72" above the floor.

1.25 SAFETY

A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to do all things necessary in the pursuit of the installation or testing to provide safe conditions in which to work.

1.26 FIRESTOPPING

A. Firestopping of all openings in fire-rated floors, walls, and ceilings accommodating penetrating items such as conduits shall be required as part of Division 16 work. Provide Firestop installation as required to meet ratings equal to the floor or wall being penetrated.

B. Fire stop materials shall be manufactured for that purpose and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation in order to provide a U.L. listed fire stop at all openings equal to or exceeding the rated floor, wall or ceiling.

C. Plastic sleeves/pipe shall not be used within the building when penetrating a fire-resistant-rated wall, ceiling, partition, or floor.

1.27 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Demonstration and training for operation and maintenance of equipment and systems specified as part of Division 26 shall be provided under this Division of Work and as specified in other Division 26 sections.

B. Where specific training is required by other Sections of this Division, such training shall be video recorded for future reference. A separate DVD shall be provided to the plant for each training session (multiple sessions shall not be placed on a single DVD). Each DVD shall be clearly labeled to identify the training session contained on it.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All equipment and materials shall be new, shall be listed by UL, FM or CSA and shall bear the appropriate label, where such requirements apply. All equipment and materials shall be the products of experienced manufacturers. Similar items in the project shall be



products of the same manufacturer. All equipment and materials shall be of industrial grade and standard of construction; shall be of sturdy design and manufacture; and shall be capable of reliable, trouble-free service.

2.2 FACTORY COATINGS

A. Equipment and component items shall be provided with corrosion-resistant finishes which shall withstand hours of exposure to the salt spray test specified in ASTM B 117 without loss of paint or release of adhesion of the paint primer coat to the metal surface in excess of 1/16 inch from the test mark. The scribed test mark and test evaluation shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1654 with a rating of not less than 7 in accordance with TABLE 1, (Procedure A).

2.3 EARTHWORK MATERIAL

A. Subbase Material: A graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag.

B. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to required densities, and complying with AASHTO Designation M 145. Group A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, or A-3.

C. Drainage Fill Material: Washed and uniformly graded gravel, crushed stone or crushed slab, with 100% passing a 1-1/2" sieve and not more than 5% passing a No. 4 sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING

A. Perform all excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered to the depths indicated on the Drawings or as otherwise specified. During excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be piled in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. All excavated materials not required or not suitable for backfill shall be removed and wasted or removed from jobsite as indicated on the drawings or as directed by Architect, at no additional cost to Owner.

B. Sheeting and shoring shall be done as necessary for the protection of the work and for the safety of personnel. Provide necessary pumping at all times to maintain a dry working condition in all trenches. Unless otherwise indicated, excavations shall be by open cut except that short sections of a trench may be tunneled if, in the opinion of the Architect, the conduit can be safely and properly installed and backfill can be properly tamped in such tunneled sections.

C. No excavation or trenches shall be cut near or under footings without first consulting Architect.



D. Bottom of trench shall be shaped to give substantially uniform support to ductbank. Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner as to form a close concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offset to flow line. As work progresses, interior of pipe shall be cleared of dirt and superfluous materials of every description.

E. Wherever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting the ductbank, as determined by the Architect, is encountered in the bottom of the trench, such soil shall be removed to the depth required and the trench backfilled to the proper grade with coarse sand, fine gravel, or other suitable material, as approved by the Architect.

F. Backfill shall be installed in layers 6" deep, adequately wetted (if approved by Architect) and tamped using materials as noted above. The surfaces shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounting over trenches left in a uniform and neat condition as approved by the Architect.

G. Restore all hard finished surfaces such as roadway, sidewalks, grass, shrubbery, etc., removed for installation of utilities (and not shown on Drawings or specified to be reworked under other sections of the work) to their original condition using the same type as original materials.

H. Carefully plan all work to avoid existing utilities and other interferences. Engineer has attempted to indicate all existing underground utilities. Existing utility lines to be retained that are shown on the Drawings or the locations of which are made known to the Contractor prior to excavation, as well as all utility lines uncovered during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during excavation and backfilling and, if damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. Prior to doing any excavation with power tools, carefully investigate and locate any existing conduit, pipes, and other lines, so as to avoid them during excavation.

I. Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in a manner which will ensure that no damage to personnel or property, or service interruption, will result from excavating, trenching, or backfilling.

J. Protect persons from injury at excavations by barricades, warnings, and illumination.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Perform cutting and patching as necessary for electrical installation, including, but not limited to, such that may be required to remove and/or replace defective work.

B. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.



C. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of electrical installation.

D. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.

E. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.



POWER SYSTEM STUDY 16055 - 1

SECTION 16055

POWER SYSTEM STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current, arc-flash, and overcurrent

protective device coordination studies, and the setting of these devices. The work of this section is to be performed by a Louisiana registered professional Electrical Engineer having a minimum of 3 years experience in coordinated power system and arc flash hazard studies. Work of this section also includes gathering of all necessary data for preparation of the studies specified herein.

B. Short Circuit Fault Current Analysis: Perform analysis as specified and verify

equipment ratings exceed available fault currents. C. Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis: Perform analysis as specified and provide proper warnings

on equipment. D. Distribution System Coordination Study and Device Settings: Provide study as

specified and set protective devices accordingly. E. No time extensions or similar contact modifications will be granted for work arising out

of the requirements for these studies. Final approval of distribution equipment and protective devices proposed will be based on recommendations of these studies. The Owner shall not be held responsible for any changes to equipment, device ratings, settings, or additional labor for installation of equipment or devices ordered and/or procured prior to approval of these studies.

1.2 SCOPE OF STUDY

A. Existing Study: A Power System Study has previously been performed for the plant. The study was performed in ETAP and will be made available to the Contractor.

B. Short Circuit Study: Study shall look at all available sources. Study shall also include all existing motors rated 250HP and larger and assume that they are running at the time of the fault. Available short circuit shall be calculated at the bus of each new distribution equipment panel, disconnect switch, transformer, switchboard, etc. furnished as part of this project. Available short circuit shall also be re-calculated for existing 480-volt distribution equipment. Existing equipment shall be re-evaluated.



C. Coordination Study: Study shall include all distribution equipment identified in the Short Circuit Study, except existing adjustable trip breakers and digital relays located within existing distribution equipment shall not be evaluated for adjustment. Contractor shall investigate existing settings, document, and include documentation of those existing settings in the reports. Existing breaker settings and proposed settings for new equipment shall be utilized to prepare the Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis.

D. Arc-Flash Analysis: Analysis shall include all distribution equipment identified in the Short Circuit Study. All equipment included in the analysis shall be provided with Arc-Flash Hazard Labels in accordance with these specifications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

E. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

F. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the conditional approval of distribution equipment and system protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets. 2. Short Circuit Study and equipment evaluation reports. 3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and sealed

by a qualified professional engineer. 4. Overcurrent protective device setting report. 5. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets. 6. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer.

G. Submit all data, studies and reports prior to receiving final approval of the distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, a preliminary submittal will be allowed. All assumptions made for the preliminary study shall be identified in the report and shall assume “worst case” conditions where information is not available. Submittal shall include sufficient data to ensure that the proposed equipment and protection devices will be satisfactory for the application.

H. Qualification Data: For System Study Engineer and Field Commissioning Technician.

I. Product Certificates:

1. For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.



2. For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.


A. "As-Built" System Analysis and Settings Report. This report shall document the system as installed and shall indicate actual device settings.

B. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the equipment manuals.

C. The final as built report documentation shall include an electronic copy of the short

circuit computer modeling file

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. One-line diagram. 2. Protective device coordination study. 3. Time-current coordination curves. 4. Power system data.

1.6 REPORT RESUBMITTALS

A. What-If Analysis: Allow for one (1) report resubmittal for each location / study to address “what-if” analysis questions posed by the Design Engineer. This requirement shall be in addition to any required resubmittals resulting from inaccurate data or assumptions used for software input.

B. Changed Equipment or Protective Device: Allow for one (1) report resubmittal for each location / study as required to address changes in equipment and/or protective devices made subsequent to, and perhaps resulting from, the original report issued for review and approval. This requirement shall be in addition to any required resubmittals resulting from inaccurate data or assumptions used for software input.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.

Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. System Study Engineer Qualifications: A Louisiana licenced professional engineer

experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. All elements of the studies shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.



C. Field Commissioning Technician: A manufacturer-trained and -authorized service

technician, employed by the manufacturer of the equipment to be set, with a minimum of 10 years experience in setting protective devices.

D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures. E. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. The Power System Study shall be performed using software developed by ETAP.

2.2 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with IEEE 1584, IEEE 242 and IEEE 399. B. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall include

"mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399, Table 7-4. C. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices.

2.3 STUDY AND REPORT CONTENTS AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Studies shall address all available power sources that can be connected to the system.

The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

B. Contents: Report shall include the following at a minimum: 1. Executive Summary: Reports shall include a narrative describing the analyses

performed; the bases and methods used; and the desired method of coordinated protection of the power system

2. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

3. The reports shall include descriptive and technical data for protective devices proposed. The data shall include manufacturers published data, nameplate data, and definition of the fixed or adjustable features of the existing or new protective devices



4. One-line diagram, showing the following: a. Protective device designations and ampere ratings b. Cable size and lengths. c. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. d. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. e. Motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

5. Study Input Data. 6. The reports shall document utility company data including system voltages, fault

MVA, system X/R ratio, and time-current characteristic curves 7. Short-Circuit Study Output and Equipment Evaluation Report: Indicate whether

or not proposed equipment ratings are sufficient for the calculated short circuit current.

8. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.

9. Protective Device Coordination Study: Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent protective devices when available. a. Indicate recommended trip settings, including all adjustable pickups and time

delays. b. Provide Time Current Curves for all over-current protective devices. Color

code for ease of reading. c. Provide comments and recommendations for system improvements.

10. Arc-Flash Study Output: Indicate the required PPE Level and recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction. Include fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout

11. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: a. Arcing fault magnitude. b. Protective device clearing time. c. Duration of arc. d. Arc-flash boundary. e. Working distance. f. Incident energy. g. Hazard risk category.

C. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective

devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:



1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the

system covered. 2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical

or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed. 3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function,

and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended. 4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device. b. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's

tolerance bands. c. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-

fault protection curves. d. Cables and conductors damage curves. e. Ground-fault protective devices. f. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points. g. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage curve. h. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.

5. Illustrate adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is achieved.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16195 " Electrical Identification." Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage 3. Flash protection boundary 4. Hazard risk category 5. Incident energy 6. Working distance 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical

distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with studies only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled.

Overcurrent protective devices not submitted for approval may not be used in studies. 3.2 POWER SYSTEM STUDY DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device studies. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the studies. The list below is a

guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 and NFPA 70E for the amount of detail required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study. 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices. Use equipment designation tags

that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance and available short circuit curent of utility service entrance. 3. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit

material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 4. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 5. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance,

rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 6. Full-load current of all loads. 7. Electrical distribution system diagram showing the following:

a. Load current that is the basis for sizing continuous ratings of circuits for

cables and equipment. b. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection

type, impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Cables. Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor insulation,

and length. e. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

8. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced

with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:



a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.

e. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility company.

f. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices to be coordinated. g. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,

ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for adjustable circuit breakers.

h. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

i. Generator damage curves. j. Panelboards, ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical. k. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,

ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY

A. General: Perform a short circuit study to verify equipment ratings and to check the adequacy and correct application of protective devices and system components. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault current.

B. Method: The fault current analysis shall be performed in accordance with the methods described in IEEE Std 242, and IEEE Std 399.

C. Assumptions: 1. Obtain available fault currents from the utility company. Do not assume source

impedance as an infinite bus on primary side of utility transformer. 2. For fault contribution from motors, assume that all motors are operating during

the maximum demand condition.

D. Provide the following in tabular form:

1. The available fault current at each bus. 2. The momentary and interrupting rating of each protective device.



3. The adequacy of the electrical protective devices to withstand the maximum available fault at the terminals of the equipment.

4. Confirmation that the equipment and each protective device is rated no less than the available fault current.

E. Fault Current Availability: Balanced three-phase fault, bolted line-to-line fault, and line-

to-ground fault current values shall be provided at each source, voltage transformation point and at each power distribution bus. The maximum and minimum values of fault available at each location shall be shown in tabular form on the diagram or in the report.

F. Equipment Evaluation Report: Prepare a report on the adequacy of equipment, overcurrent protective devices and conductors by comparing fault-current ratings with calculated fault-current momentary and interrupting duties. Demonstrate adequacy of motor-control centers and panelboard bus bars to withstand short-circuit stresses. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings shall comply with the following:

1. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.50. 2. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46. 3. Circuit Breakers: IEEE C37.13.

3.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform both preliminary and final as built coordination studies in accordance with

ANSI Standards C37.010 and C37.13 to determine device settings for selective coordination. Selective coordination is considered to be no less than 0.3 sec coordination time interval between devices in series between the source and faulted bus. The study shall address all possible system power sources that can be connected at any single time

B. The study shall demonstrate that the maximum possible degree of selectivity has been

obtained between devices specified, consistent with protection of equipment and conductors from damage from overloads and fault conditions. The study shall include a description of the coordination of the protective devices in this project. A written narrative shall be provided describing: which devices may operate in the event of a fault at each bus; the logic used to arrive at device ratings and settings; situations where system coordination is not achievable due to device limitations (an analysis of any device curves which overlap); coordination between upstream and downstream devices; and device settings. Recommendations to improve or enhance system reliability, and details of where such changes would involve additions or modifications to the contract (addition or reduction) shall be provided. Composite coordination plots shall be provided on log-log graph paper.

C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.



D. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

E. Perform coordination study and prepare a written report using the results of fault-current study and approved computer software program. Comply with IEEE 399

F. Comply with NFPA 70 for overcurrent protection of circuit elements and devices. G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,

whichever is specified for that transformer. b. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions. 2. Device shall protect transformer according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault currents.

H. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to

ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents, equipment grounding conductors, and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

I. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 7 J. The study shall result in recommended settings of all new, adjustable protective devices.

3.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SETTING

A. Field Commissioning Technician: Engage a factory-authorized service representative,

meeting the qualifications stated herein, to set overcurrent protective devices within equipment.

B. Technician shall adjust protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.



C. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with studies.

D. Testing: Engage Technician to perform the following:

1. After installing overcurrent protective devices and during energizing process of

electrical distribution system, perform the following: a. Verify that overcurrent protective devices meet parameters used in studies. b. Adjust devices to values listed in study results.

2. Adjust devices according to recommendations in Chapter 7, "Inspection and Test

Procedures," and Tables 10.7 and 10.8 in NETA ATS.

3.6 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study. Calculate the maximum and minimum fault currents and evaluate each condition for each protective device to deterime the worst-case arc-flash hazard condition. Maximum fault current calculations shall assume maximum available fault current from motors (all motors operating at the time of the fault).

B. The System Study Engineer shall analyze the available arc-flash potential and shall provide the appropriate arc flash hazard labels / signs to the Contractor for installation on the equipment. Labels shall be provided for each bus and protecting device.

C. Perform arc flash analysis using the system models of utility source and each utility standby generator source and unique settings recommended for each configuration. The arc flash study shall be made in accordance with the latest edition of IEEE Std 1584-2002and referenced in NFPA 70E.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

F. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three

to five cycles.



2. Fault contribution from synchronous generators should be decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible.

G. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

H. Apply arc-flash hazard labels to distribution equipment. Install under the direct supervision of the System Study Engineer.



GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-1

SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Provisions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Electric Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code

requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, and NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to systems, circuits and equipment.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards No.'s

467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment", pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment In addition, comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide grounding and bonding products, which are UL-listed and labeled for their intended usage.

C. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended

installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 151 and 152 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment.

1.03 NEMA COMPLIANCE: A. Stds. Pub/No. LA1 Surge Arresters Stds. Pub/No. FB1 Fittings, Cast metal boxes

and conduit bodies for conduit assembly.

1.04 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Main electric service equipment, conduit work, motors, panelboards and other

electrical equipment shall be effectively and permanently grounded. Grounding connections and conductor sizes shall be in accordance with requirements of these construction documents where indicated, but not less than the National Electrical Code, Article 250, and local ordinances.

B. A separate grounding conductor, sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-122,

unless indicated otherwise, shall be provided in the conduit with the circuit



conductors for all circuits. The grounding conductor covering shall be a green color. Conduit runs shall be increased in size where necessary to accommodate the grounding conductor in addition to circuit conductors.

C. All electrical equipment enclosures and conductor enclosures shall be grounded.

This includes but is not limited to metal raceways, outlet boxes, cabinets, switch boxes, motor frames, transformer cases, metal back panel of fiberglass enclosure and metallic enclosure for all electrical equipment.

D. Under no circumstances shall neutral conductors again be grounded after they

have been grounded once at the transformer secondary (or main distribution panel, as indicated).

E. Types of grounding in this Section include the following:

1. Grounding: a. Metal building and structure frames. b. Grounding electrodes. c. Grounding rods. d. Grounding loops. e. Separately derived systems. f. Service equipment. g. Enclosures. h. Systems. i. Equipment. j. Metallic conduits of control and specialty systems.

F. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified

elsewhere in these specifications.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING: A. Materials and Components: General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each electrical grounding system

indicated, with assembly of materials including, but not necessarily 1imited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper, flexible braid, and other items and accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, NEMA and established industry standards for applications indicated.

B. General: Provide conduit, tube, duct and fittings complying with other Division

16 sections. C. Electrical Bonding Jumpers D. Bonding Jumper Braid: UL-listed copper braided tape, constructed of 30-gage

bare copper wires and properly sized for indicated applications. E. Flexible Jumper Strap: UL-listed flexible flat conductor, 480 strands of 30-gage

bare copper wire, 3/4" wide, 9-1/2" long, 48,250 CM. Protect braid with copper bolt hole ends with holes sized for 3/8" dia. bolts.

F. Electrical Grounding Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for

grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC.

G. Bonding Connectors, Terminals and Clamps:

1. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

2. Provide electrical UL-listed bonding plates, connectors terminals and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications. Materials shall be bronze.

3. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

4. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

5. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.



6. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. 7. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with

hex head bolt. H. Ground Rods: UL-listed steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" dia. x 10'. I. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical UL-listed

insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, solder, soldering flux, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS: A. Install electrical grounding systems as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer’s written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure grounding and ground-fault protection devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, NESC, and NEMA standards for installation of grounding and ground-fault protection systems and devices.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of

grounding system and ground-fault protection devices with other work. C. Weld or bolt cable connections to ground rods. D. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to

ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. E. Bond electrical service entrance system neutral, grounding and grounding

electrode conductors at one point in the service entrance equipment enclosure. Use bonding bushing with lay-in lug on all metallic conduits entering service entrance enclosure and at the other end of said conduits.

F. Ground each separately derived system neutral to:

1. Transformer housing. 2. Concrete foundation resteel. 3. Grounding Grid.

G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment-grounding conductors

with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. H. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and

bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not



indicated, tighten connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.

I. Route grounding connections and conductors to ground and protective devices in

shortest and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises. J. Where a common connection point requires multiple grounding conductors,

provide a grounding bar with at least the same number of terminal connection barrels as there are conductors. Multiple conductors under one barrel lug will not be acceptable.

K. Apply oxide inhibiting compound (i.e. T & B’s Contax or equal by ILSCO, or

Penn-Union to field-connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are subjected to corrosive action.

L. Apply oxide-inhibitor compound to all connections made outdoors or in damp

locations according to manufacturer’s instructions. M. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and

maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 3.02 APPLICATIONS

A. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.

B. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as

otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.03 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator.

B. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.



C. Ground metal parts of equipment to ground grid, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Fuel Tanks. 2. Distribution Equipment Enclosures. 3. Transformers. 4. Control Equipment Enclosures.

3.04 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, non-shrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls.


A. Perform tests and inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

4. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

5. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.



B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports. Report measured ground resistances that exceed 5 ohms.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 16111 - 1

SECTION 16111

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 4. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC): Provide rigid aluminum conduit of 6063 alloy in temper designation T-1 with threaded ends, thread protector and matching fittings in compliance U.L. 6A and ANSI C80.5.

C. LFMC: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; a listed raceway of circular cross-section constructed of a single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped aluminum core; coated with sunlight-resistant, liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC), and complying with UL 360.

D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings and Conduit Bodies for RAC: Threaded, galvanically compatible with conduit material; cast, copper-free aluminum for RAC. Conduit Bodies shall have stainless steel screws.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or copper-free aluminum to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.



3. Transition fittings to mate aluminum to PVC conduit, and PVC access fitting, shall be as furnished or recommended by the manufacturer of the PVC conduit.

E. Joint Compound for RAC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. RNC: Type EPC-80-PVC complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit type and material.

D. PVC Utilities Duct Fittings: ANSI NEMA TC 9, match to duct type and material.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

C. Cast-Metal Conduit Bodies, Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, aluminum for RAC, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

2.4 HANDHOLES, MANHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.



B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a combination of the two.

1. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77. 2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise

indicated. 3. Cover: Weatherproof, heavy-duty, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices

and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. 4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50. 5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC." 6. Load Rating: Tier 15, minimum.

C. Precast-Concrete Manholes: 1. Concrete Strength: 5000 PSI at 28 days. 2. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 3. All conduit terminations shall have bell ends flush with inside wall. 4. Joints shall be sealed with butyl rubber or equivalent. 5. Load Rating: AASHTO HS20-44. 6. Cover: Airport-rated. 7. Cover Legend: “ELECTRIC”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed conduit: RAC. 2. Underground conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC. 3. Underground conduit, encased in concrete: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC 4. Connection to vibrating equipment: LFMC. 5. Outlet Boxes: Cast Aluminum 6. Large Boxes, Cabinets and Enclosures Located Outdoors for Power: NEMA 250

Type 4X, type 316 stainless steel.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed: RAC. 2. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 3. Outlet Boxes: Cast Aluminum 4. Large Boxes, Cabinets and Enclosures Located Indoors for Power: NEMA 250,

Type 12, constructed of aluminum or stainless steel, except top hat on top of switchboard may be of the same material and finish as the switchboard enclosure.



C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Use threaded conduit fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

D. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

E. Minimum raceway size shall be 3/4-inch exposed, 1-inch below grade, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

3.2 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Isolate raceways and boxes from dis-similar metals.

B. Where aluminum conduits enter steel or stainless steel boxes, provide insulated grounding bushings.

C. Where conduits and supports are of different materials, use isolation clamps or wrap conduit in electrical tape for isolation.

D. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat the interface of all dissimilar surfaces with corrosion inhibitor compound before assembly.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

B. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, boxes, and panel work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work.

C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

E. Comply with requirements in Section 16190 "Supporting Devices" for hangers and supports.

F. Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for heavy wall conduit deep and clean.



G. Field-bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary internal diameter. For RNC, any field bends shall be made using conduit heating and bending equipment manufactured specifically for that purpose. Factory elbows shall be used for all conduits smaller than 1-inch.

H. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible.

I. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run. Support conduits within 12 inches of changes in direction.

J. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps, or clips. Support conduits on each side of bends.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Upper edge is to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. Bushing of standard or insulated type shall have screw type grounding terminal.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways, for enclosing the conductors. Connect conduits to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets to provide an effective mechanical assembly.

Q. Use aluminum thread lubricant for making up all joints in aluminum conduit.

R. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

S. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use. Test conduits required to be installed, but left empty, with ball



mandrel. Clear any conduit, which rejects ball mandrel. Pay costs involved for restoration of conduit and surrounding surfaces to original condition.

T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install where raceways pass between pile supported structures and non-pile-supported locations (i.e. underground)

2. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints.

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

W. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Flexible liquid-tight conduit shall be used for the connection of equipment such as motors, transformers, instruments, valves or pressure switches subject to vibration or movement during normal operation or servicing. Flexible conduit may be used in length up to a maximum of 18 inches without approval by the Engineer. With Engineer approval, a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit may be used.

X. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

Y. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3-piece unions, split couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application and they are UL listed. Install expansion fittings in exterior raceways every 100’ linear run or wherever structural expansion joints are crossed.

Z. Fasten conduit terminations in NEMA 4X enclosures using Meyers hubs. Match raceway and enclosure material when selecting body and nut material.

AA. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings, supplied by raceway manufacturer.

BB. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after review of dimensions and after checking location with other trades.



3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Install Schedule 80 PVC elbows for stub-ups.

B. Non-metallic conduit installed underground shall be installed in concrete envelope, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

C. All RNC raceway runs shall have an adequate number of expansion coupling joints with the optimum piston opening and, when possible, mount in the horizontal and level position according to manufacturer’s requirements to compensate for temperature variations.

D. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: Set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade.



WIRES AND CABLES (UNDER 600-VOLTS) 16120 - 1

SECTION 16120

WIRES AND CABLES (UNDER 600-VOLTS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Provisions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of

each Division 16 section making reference to wires and cables specified herein. C. Refer to Section 16195, “Electrical Identification,” for wire and cable color-

coding instructions. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of electrical wire and

cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with successful installation experience with

projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling work similar to that required for this project.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Std. 83,

“Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables,” and Std. 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.”

D. UL Compliance: Provide wiring/cabling and connector products which are UL-

listed and labeled. E. ETL Compliance: Provide wiring/cabling and connector product, which are ETL-

listed and labeled. F. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Std. Pub. /No.’s WC 5,

“Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy,” and WC-30, “Color Coding of Wires and Cables,” pertaining to electrical power type wires and cables.

G. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds. 82, “Test

Procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors,” and Std. 241,



“IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Systems in Commercial Buildings” pertaining to wiring systems.

H. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 3, 8

and D-753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20° C (68°F).

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IPCEA S-61-402 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

B. IPCEA S-19-81 - Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers, or

wound on NEMA-specified type wire and cable reels. B. Store wire and cable in clean and dry space in original container according to

manufacturer’s recommendations. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic.

C. Handle wires and cables carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing, and tearing wire

and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure dielectric resistance integrity of wires/cables is maintained.

D. Unloading equipment should not come in contact with the cable or its protective

covering, E. If crane type equipment is used to unload the cable, Contractor shall use a shaft

through the arbor hole of the reel or a cradle evenly supporting both reel flanges. F. If forklift type equipment is used for unloading, the Contractor shall have the

equipment forks to evenly contact both flanges. Forklift supporting the reel from only one flange in any way shall not be acceptable,

G. Reel shall be rolled evenly on the ends of both reel flanges, H. Reels shall not be rolled off any elevated platform on to the ground, I. Multiple cable reels shall not be stacked on top of one another nor shall the reel be

allowed to rest on the flat side of one flange, both flanges shall always be used to support the cable reel,



J. Cable reels shall be stored out of harm’s way to prevent both physical and environmental hazards,

K. In storage, cable ends shall always be effectively sealed to prevent the entrance of

moisture. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide UL-listed wire, cable and connectors of manufacturer’s standard materials, as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as required for the installation.

B. Conductors: All Conductors, including ground conductors, shall be copper. Insulation shall bear the manufacturer’s trademark, type voltage rating, and conductor size.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR POWER:

A. Provide factory-fabricated wire of sizes, ratings, materials and types indicated for each service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project’s installation requirements and NEC standards. Select from the following types, materials, conductor configuration, insulation and coverings:

1. UL Type: THHN/THWN-2. 2. Material: Copper. 3. Conductors: Concentric-lay-stranded (standard flexibility).

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR CONTROLS:

A. Control wire shall be stranded, coated copper, AWG #16 (minimum), machine tool grade Type MTW, UL approved. Conductor insulation shall be rated for 600 volts.

B. Multi-conductor control cable shall be rated at 600-volts and shall consist of AWG #16 stranded copper conductors individually insulated with polyethylene, a polyester film tape, and an overall PVC jacket. Multi-conductor cable shall be identified either by IPCEA color coding or ink imprinting.

C. Unless otherwise required by the equipment manufacturer, shielded control and communication cables shall consist of 2 or 3 AWG #18, stranded, tinned-copper conductors, individually insulated with polyethylene and a 100-percent aluminum



foil tape, AWG #20 tinned copper drain wire, all under a PVC jacket. Color coding shall be red-black, or red-black-clear. The shield shall be continuous and shall be grounded only at the receiver.

2.3 CONNECTORS: A. Provide UL-type, solderless, factory-fabricated, metal connectors of sizes,

ampacity ratings, materials, type and classes for applications and services indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with project’s installation requirements, NEC and NEMA standards.

B. Compression connectors shall be Burndy “Hi Lug or equal.

C. Mechanical Connectors: For #6 and smaller conductors, use pre-insulated thread-

on connectors. For larger conductors, use two-bolt connectors insulated with rubber tape and covered with vinyl plastic electrical tape. Do not use split-bolt type connectors.

D. For control wiring terminations, use terminal blocks with 20-ampere, screw-

pressure box terminals with insulating barriers and numbered terminals. Provide ten percent spare terminals with a minimum of two spare terminals.

E. General purpose insulating tape shall be Scotch No. 33, Plymouth “Slipknot”, or

equal. High temperature tape shall be polyvinyl by Plymouth, 3M, or equal.

F. Submersible Tap Connectors shall be Burndy Unitap series or NSI Industries Polaris series. Connectors shall be listed for terminating copper conductors of sizes required to be terminated and have sufficient ports for the required splice, plus a minimum of one spare port.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install electrical cables and wires as indicated, in compliance with

manufacturer’s written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Conductors shall not be pulled until the raceway system has been freed of

moisture and debris.

C. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation work, as necessary for proper interface.



C. Do not pull conductors into raceways until raceway system (including all outlets, cabinets, bushings and fittings) is completed. Verify that all work of other trades, which may cause conductor damage, is completed. Use only approved cable lubricants when necessary.

D. Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway. E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary; compound must not

deteriorate conductor or insulation. F. Use UL-listed pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope, which cannot

damage raceway. G. In general, conductors shall be of the same size from the last protective device to

the load. H. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. I. The system shall be properly grounded and continuously polarized (phase)

throughout. J. Branch circuit conductors for power shall not be smaller than #12 AWG and shall

be sized as required by the load served and for specific N.E.C. requirements. K. On termination at branch circuit outlets leave a minimum of eight inches (8”) free

conductor for installation of devices and fixtures. L. Cover uninsulated splices, joints and free ends of conductor with rubber tape and

PVC electrical tape. Plastic insulating caps may serve as insulation for wire sizes through #6, in combinations listed by the insulating cap manufacturer.

M. Do not use mechanical means to pull wire No. 8 or smaller. N. All single conductor cables shall be installed in conduit. O. Grounding conductors shall either have green insulation, or shall have green tape

applied at all accessible places. P. Control circuit conductors, unless indicated otherwise, shall be #16 AWG,

minimum. Q. Shielded cables shall be installed with outer jacket and shield tape cut back no

more than 6 inches from terminations and dressed with heat shrink tubing or lapped insulating tape so that only conductors and drain wire protrude and cut end of jacket and shield are concealed.



R. Control devices which are normally supplied with conductor pigtail, shall be terminated using spring connectors.

S. Solid conductors shall be terminated at equipment terminal screws with proper

care that conductor is tightly wound around screw and does not protrude beyond screw head. Stranded conductors shall be terminated directly on equipment box lugs making sure that all conductor strands are confined within lug. Use fork-tongue lugs where equipment box lugs have not been provided.

T. Wire in panels, cabinet and gutters shall be neatly grouped using nylon tie straps,

and shall be fanned out to terminals. U. The Contractor shall provide, install, and terminate the conductors required to

interconnect control and instrumentation equipment specified in any section of these specifications excepts as may be otherwise specified in other sections. Control conductors shall not be spliced and shall be terminated only terminal strips of vendor furnished and existing equipment. Control conductors are defined as conductors operating at 120-volts or less in circuits that indicate equipment status or that control the electric energy delivered to a power consuming devices.

V. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published

torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

W. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6-inches of slack.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Branch Circuit Power Wiring and Control Circuit Wiring:

1. Prior to energization, test conductors and cables for continuity and for short circuits.

B. Feeder Circuit Wiring:

1. Prior to energization, test cables and wire for continuity of circuitry, and also for short circuits

2. Megger test all new feeder conductors and record results. Submit results to Engineer for record purposes. All cable tested shall read 50 (fifty) mega-ohms or better, at 1000 volts DC, after 60 seconds. Use 120 volt motorized megger.

C. Conductors will be considered defective if they do not pass tests.



D. Submit test results to Engineer for record purposes.



WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1

SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Provisions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of

each Division 16 section making reference to wiring devices specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of wiring device is indicated by drawings. Wiring devices are defined

as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems, which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.

B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:

1. Receptacles. 2. Switches.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES: A. General: Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and

electrical ratings for applications indicated and complying with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. WD 1. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and complying with NEC and NEMA standards for wiring devices. Provide ivory color devices and wallplates except as indicated otherwise. Color selection of devices and wallplates shall be verified by Contractor with the plant. All devices of similar types shall be by the same manufacturer.



2.2. RECEPTACLES:

A. Duplex: Duplex “industrial grade” heavy duty receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw terminal screw heads shall be straight and Phillips #2 for optimum torque, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke and mounting yoke provided with automatic grounding feature between mounting screws and yoke, 20 ampere 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, back and side wiring with serrated backwiring clamps for superior contact and conductivity, yoke shall be one piece brass construction, receptacle face shall be heavy duty high impact nylon. NEMA configuration 5-20R. Do not use “stab-in” wiring method.

B. Ground-Fault Interrupter: Ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCI) receptacle,

feed-thru type, “industrial grade”, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, grounding type UL-rated Class A, 20-amperes rating, 120-volts, 60 Hz, with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling, with 5 milliamperes ground-fault trip level; equip with 20-ampere plug configuration, NEMA 5-20R and with local test/reset buttons.

C. Weatherproof: Weather-resistant. All current carrying metal parts (contacts,

terminals and screws) shall be corrosion resistant and nickel-coated, 2-pole 3-wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke and mounting yoke provided with automatic grounding feature between mounting screws and yoke, 20 ampere 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, back and side wiring, yoke shall be one piece brass construction, receptacle face shall be heavy duty high impact nylon. NEMA configuration 5-20R.

D. Combination receptacles: Receptacles required to be rated weatherproof and GFI

type shall meet the requirements of both paragraphs above. 2.3 SWITCHES: A. General: All switches shall be provided with automatic grounding clip on

mounting yoke; silver cadmium oxide contacts; neoprene bumper pads to cushion handle; one piece rivetless spring contact arm and terminal plate.

B. Single Pole Toggle: Provide “specification grade” flush, quiet, AC-type, single-

pole toggle switches, 20-amperes, 120/277-volts AC, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism; equip with plaster ears, switch handle, side-wired screw terminals and back-wiring with clamp type terminals.

2.4 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:



A. Wall Plates: Provide wall plates for wiring devices, matching the types, size, and ganging of devices. Secure plates to devices with metal screws; provide wall plates possessing the following additional construction features:

B. Material and Finish: Cast aluminum. C. Weather Proof: Rain-tight while-in-use box and cover, except where part of an

assembled product (for example, conduit type pole bases). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer’s written

instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA’s “Standard of Installation,” and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer’s published torque-tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std. 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean, free from excess

building materials, dirt and debris. 3.2 MOUNTING ORIENTATION OF WIRING DEVICES: A. Receptacles shall be positioned, as you face the device, in a vertical position with

the grounding terminal at the top and neutral terminal at the right. B. Toggle switches shall be positioned, as you face the device, in the vertical

position with switch toggle lever in the down (“off”) position. 3.3 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES: A. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding

proper and cautious use of GFI outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items, which have been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.

3.4 GROUNDING:



A. Provide electrically continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 TESTING: A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and

proper polarity connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.



CONTROL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160 - 1

SECTION 16160

CONTROL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Back panel. C. Terminal blocks. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16902 - Electrical Controls and Relays. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA 1-2000 (National Electrical Contractors Association) - Standard Practices

for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use

stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide two (2) keys for each lockable cabinet. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 12, Type 316 stainless steel, unless indicated

otherwise on drawing. B. Covers: Continuous stainless steel hinge, held closed by hasp and staple for

padlock, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. C. Provide interior metal panel (min. 11 gauge) for mounting terminal blocks and

electrical components; finish with white enamel. D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. E. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments for wiring of different

systems and voltages. F. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment. 2.3 BACK PANEL OF ENCLOSURE A. Mounts to the rear wall of enclosure on weldnuts. B. Sized according to enclosure dimensions. 2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure

screw connectors, rated 30 amp 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel

mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts, 20 amps.



D. Provide grounding bus terminal block, with adequate terminals for each grounding

conductor and bond terminal block to metal of enclosure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. C. Install proper label to exterior of enclosure door indicating if control panel has more

than one source of power and specifically identify the power source or sources. 3.2 CLEANING A. Refurbish any damage to exterior of enclosure to match original finish. B. Vacuum clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Vacuum clean dirt and debris from enclosure.



SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1

SECTION 16190

SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Provisions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-16 Basic Materials and Methods sections, and is a part of each Division-16 section making reference to supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified herein.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves and seals is indicated by drawings, schedules

and/or these Division-16 sections. B. Supports, anchors, sleeves and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated

equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division-16 sections.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and

installation of electrical supporting devices. B. ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of

ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub. No. FB 1, “Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies”.

C. MSS Compliance: Comply with applicable MSS standard requirements pertaining

to fabrication and installation practices for pipe hangers and supports. D. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association's

"Standard of Installation:” pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting.

E. UL Compliance: Provide electric components, which are UL listed and labeled. PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. General: Provide supporting devices complying with manufacturer’s standard

materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer’s option.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stainless steel,

C-strut of the following, unless otherwise noted on the drawings:

1. Power Strut - PS200 series, PS500 series 2. Unistrut Div. - P1000 series, P4100 series 3. B-Line - B22 series, B54 series

C. Slotted Support Systems (Unistrut): Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated

components for field assembly. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. Channel Dimensions shall be selected for applicable load criteria.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable iron.

E. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

F. Conduit Straps: Stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES: A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for installation of supporting devices.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as

necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work.



C. All equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from foundations and supports as specified herein and/or as required on the electrical drawings.

D. Furnish all angles, channels and other materials necessary for the proper support

and erection of disconnects, cabinets, panels, and any other electrical equipment and/or materials.

E. Panelboards, disconnects, cabinets, large pull boxes, cable support boxes, etc.

shall be secured to structure and floor slab and not supported from conduits. Racks for support of conduit and heavy electrical equipment shall be secured to building construction by substantial structural supports.

F. Supports for conduit shall consist of conduit clamps of an approved type, conduit

hangers, trapeze hangers with all-thread rod hangers, clevis hangers, or wall brackets, as required to suit special conditions.

G. Outlet boxes shall be supported to masonry or concrete construction by stainless

steel expansion anchors and by hot-dip galvanized clamps to steel beams. H. Provide a wrap of 3M heavy duty corrosion tape on all aluminum conduit

fastened to stainless steel strut, i.e where dissimilar metals are bolted together. H. Dissimilar Metals: Isolation shall be provided between dissimilar metals to

prevent galvanic corrosion. This requirement shall include not just supporting hardware, but also supported conduits, boxes, cabinets, and enclosures.

I. Wall-mounted panels that weigh more than 500 pounds or which are within 18

inches off the floor shall be provided with fabricated support pedestal(s). If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet and enclosed with removable side plates, it shall match supported equipment in physical appearance and dimension. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria specified in the printed recommendations of the equipment manufacturers shall be a part of the work of this Contract.

J. Secure raceways and cables to supports with two-bolt conduit clamps. K. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components

so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lbs.

L. Application: Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and

supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 16111 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems”. Unless noted otherwise on drawings, supports shall be per the following:



1. Unistrut channel in contact with concrete: Stainless steel. 2. Conduit straps: Match strut material. Provide isolation between strap and

conduit where they are of a different material. 3. Hanger rods embedded in concrete: Threaded, stainless steel. 4. Brackets and anchors in contact with concrete: Stainless steel. 5. Clevis hangers: Same material as rod. 6. Trapeze hangers (strut): Same material as rod. 7. U-Bolts: same material as strut or plate connected to. 8. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway:

Space supports for raceway as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings that are less than those stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

9. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with strut, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding design load limits.

M. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code.

1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and

expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. Drill holes for expansion

anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for reinforcing bars.

4. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

N. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. O. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.



ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1

SECTION 16195

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Provisions and Division 1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of

each Division 16 section making reference to electrical identification specified herein.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of electrical related identification is indicated by drawings, schedules and

within this Section. B. Approval: Identification of wires, cables, and equipment shall be submitted to and

approved by the plant prior to purchase or installation. The plant reserves the right to change color coding schemes or methods of identification prior to submission for approval by the Contractor, and the right to request changes to what was submitted by the Contractor.

C. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following:

1. Cable/Conductor identification. 2. Operational instructions and warnings. 3. Danger signs. 4. Equipment/system identification signs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard products

of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer’s option, but provide a unified manufacturer selection for each application.



B. Color-Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer’s standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2” wide. Provide color as required to identify conductor/conduit.

C. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands: 1. Wire Markers: Provide computer-generated vinyl or plastic sleeve,

slipover type, white background with black imprinting as required for specific application.

2. Color-Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer’s standard self-adhesive vinyl tape. Unless otherwise indicated, provide colors according to applicable codes or standards.

D. Operational Instructions and Warnings: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard pre-printed, accident-prevention and

operational tags, of plasticize card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4” x 5-5/8”, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples: “DANGER”, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE”).

2. Provide manufacturer’s standard, self-adhesive or pressure-sensitive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational instructions or warnings, of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for visibility, with proper wording for each application (examples: “208V”, “EXHAUST FAN”, “RECTIFIER”). Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide orange signs with black lettering.

E. Danger and Caution Signs: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard “DANGER” signs of baked enamel

finish on 20-gage steel, of standard red, black and white graphics, 14” x 10” size except where 10” x 7” is the largest size which can be applied where needed and except where larger size is needed for adequate vision, and with/wording: “DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL KEEP OUT.”

2. Provide manufacturer’s standard “CAUTION” signs of pressure sensitive polyester, with adhesive back coating, 2-1/4” x 9”. (Example: Caution-480 Volts; Caution-Buried Cable).

3. Provide arc-flash hazard warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 70E requriements.

F. Equipment/System Identification Signs: 1. Provide engraved stock melamine plastic-laminate, complying with FS L-

P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver’s



standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated black and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

All panelboards, disconnect switches, contactors, starters, control panels,

dry type transformers, and each individual load in motor control centers shall be identified with engraved, plastic laminate labels. Embossed tape labels are not acceptable. All labels shall be sized to accommodate the lettering. Labels shall have white lettering on a black field, unless shown otherwise. Name of switchboards and switchgear shall be 1/2” high, panelboard names shall be 1/4” high, and shall be on the first line of the label. Use 1/8” lettering for volts, amps, source of feed, and mo./yr. installed, on the 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th lines, respectively.

EXAMPLE: PANEL “A” 208Y/120 VOLTS, 3φ, 4W 100 AMPS - M.L.O. FED FROM “MFDS” INSTALLED 3/2005

The labels shall be secured to the front cover of the device using poprivets, smooth side outside the enclosure cover, or “RTV” type clear silicone sealant, completely covering the rear of the label. Glue or double-sided tape is not acceptable.

The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a schedule of

proposed equipment labels for review, amending and approval, before making the labels.

2. Thickness: 1/16”, for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8” length, 1/8” for larger

units. G. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.

H. Underground Warning Tape: Identification tape for protection of buried installation shall be a 6 inch wide, detectable tape imprinted “CAUTION-ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”, or similar.

2.2 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A. Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical

identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not



otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION: A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which

require finish, install identification after completion of painting. 2. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of

governing authorities for identification of electrical work. 3. The completed electrical installation shall be provided with adequate

identification to facilitate proper control of circuits and equipment and to reduce maintenance effort.

B. Cable/Conductor Identification: 1. Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable and conductor (line

and load) in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires are present, except where another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project electrical work.

2. Conductors shall be clearly and permanently identified. 3. All control and communication circuit terminations shall be identified on

both ends of each conductor according to control drawing. 4. For conductors #6 and smaller, conductor color-coding shall be color

insulation. For conductor color-coding of wire larger than #6, use self-adhesive wraparound tape markers. Use markers at all panelboards, transformers, boxes, outlets, switches, circuit breakers and control centers.

5. All spare conductors shall be terminated on terminal screws and shall be identified with a unique number as well as with destination.

6. The Contractor shall assign to each control wire and cable a unique identification number. Said numbers shall be shown on all shop drawings. Identification numbers shall appear within 3 inches of conductor terminals. “Control” shall be defined as any conductor used for alarm, annunciator or signal purposes or any connect switch or relay contacts or any relay coils.

C. Equipment/System Identification Signs: 1. Provide engraved plastic-laminate, in sizes and thicknesses indicated,

engraved with engraver’s standard letter style of sizes and wording



indicated black and white core (letter color; except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

2. Thickness: 1/16” for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8” in length, 1/8” for larger

units. D. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except use contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. 3.2 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS:

A. Coordinate names, abbreviation and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment.

B. Conductor color coding shall be per NEC and as specified below,:

Phase Conductors (208-volt system): Black, Red, Blue (A-B-C) Phase Conductors (480-volt system): Brown, Orange, Yellow (A-B-C) Low Voltage Power Conductors: Black and Red Conductors used for controls: Per plant, not any color designated above. Control Cables: Jacket color per plant.

C. Junction Box Identification: 1. Apply panel and circuit identification numbers on the cover of all boxes.

Use indelible ink marker pens. D. Equipment/System Identification: Install engraved plastic-laminate tag on each

major unit of electrical equipment unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, ½” high lettering on 1-1/2” high sign (2” high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field or white letters in red field, per direction of the Parish. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide tags for the following pieces of electrical equipment as a minimum:

1. Switchgear 2. Panelboards 3. Switchboards and Distribution Boards 4. Disconnect Switches 5. Contactor Enclosures 6. Transformers



7. Control Panel Enclosures 8. Remote Control Enclosures 9. Operator Interface Panels 10. Large junction boxes, terminal cabinets, and enclosures (labels indicated

on drawings).

E. Install tags at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate.


PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS 16231 - 1

SECTION 16231

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following features:

1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted and remote-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Fuel system. 5. Parallel generator sets. 6. Outdoor enclosures.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 16415 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

2. Section 16430 "Paralleling Low-Voltage Switchgear" for controls and paralleling equipment for multiple parallel engine generators.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Include thermal damage curve for generator. 3. Include time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. 4. Include fuel consumption in gallons per hour at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75 and

1.0 times generator capacity. 5. Include generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75 and 1.0 times

generator capacity.


6. Include air flow requirements for cooling and combustion air in cfm at 0.8 power factor, with air supply temperature of 95, 80, 70, and 50 deg F. Provide drawings showing requirements and limitations for location of air intake and discharge.

7. Include generator characteristics, including, but not limited to kw rating, efficiency, reactances, and short-circuit current capability.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans and elevations for engine-generator set and other components specified. Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel tank.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain. 4. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration

isolation bases. 5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. 6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic,

wiring, and interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for equipment and functional relationship between all electrical components.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

B. Source quality-control reports, including, but not limited to the following:

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but

not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 4. Report of sound generation. 5. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 6. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


1. Include the following:

a. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

b. Operating instructions laminated and mounted adjacent to generator location.

c. Training plan.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written permission.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for generator sets, including clearances between generator sets and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation for the following conditions:

1. Ambient temperature not exceeding 104 deg F.

D. Unusual Service Conditions: Equipment and installation are required to operate under the following conditions:

1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be near salt water and sewer gases.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance, Testing and Service Contract: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide a five-year full maintenance, testing, and service agreement. All maintenance, testing and service shall be performed by skilled employees of the manufacturer's designated service organization. Provide written reports of all maintenance, testing, and service performed. Contract shall include the following: 1. As part of acceptance testing, in addition to the test recommended by the

manufacturer or otherwise specified herein, include an initial load bank test to verify that generators can produce full rated output. Provide and connect a portable load bank for testing.

2. Include an annual load bank test (portable load bank to be provided by manufacturer's designated service organization).

3. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer. Replace belts, hoses, batteries, filters, etc. due to wear or malfunction in accordance with the manufacturer’s operational limits and component specifications.

4. Include and provide service as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies identical to those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPATIBILITY

A. Equipment specified herein shall be compatible with the Multiple-Generator Paralleling Monitoring and Control System specified in Section 16430. The entire standby system shall be completely monitored and controlled from consoles to be located with the Generator Paralleling Switchgear Building and in the Control Building.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets, generator set controls, and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Existing generators and transfer equipment are manufactured by Cummins Power Generation.

D. Basis of Design for new packaged engine generators is Cummins Power Generation Model DQCC (800kW).

E. Basis of design for existing generator control system replacement is the Cummins Genset PowerCommand 3.3 Paralleling Control System.



A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B15.1.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. Comply with NFPA 37. 2. Comply with NFPA 70. 3. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply

system.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 2200.

D. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with EPA requirements for non-road, emergency, standby engine generators.

E. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C.

F. Unusual Service Conditions: Engine-generator equipment and installation are required to operate under the following conditions:

1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be near salt water and sewer gases. 2. High Winds: Equipment shall be rated to withstand 150 MPH wind loads.

2.3 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, water-cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Aspiration: Turbocharged and air-to-air aftercooled.

D. Governor: Digital, electronic, isochronous, with speed sensing.

E. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving.

F. Capacities and Characteristics:


1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated at 0.8 power factor excluding power required for the continued and repeated operation of the unit and auxiliaries.

2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name

and address, and model and serial number of component.

G. Generator-Set Performance:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.

a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load.

a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.

2.4 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.


C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.

F. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.

1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

4. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and non-collapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

G. Muffler/Silencer: Industrial type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 12 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at 25 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is

complete shall be 90 dBA or less.

H. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

I. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.


1. Components: Sized so they are not damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: 60 seconds. 4. Battery: Lead acid, with capacity within ambient temperature range specified in

"Performance Requirements" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35 A minimum continuous rating.

7. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type designed for lead-acid batteries. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:

a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

e. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.5 DIESEL FUEL-OIL SYSTEM

A. Comply with NFPA 30.

B. Piping: Fuel-oil piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel. Cast iron, aluminum, copper, and galvanizing shall not be used in the fuel-oil system.

C. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

D. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron.


E. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

F. Subbase-Mounted, Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel-oil tank. Tank shall be mounted below diesel engine, with all fuel supply and return lines pre-piped. Fuel supply and return lines shall include manual shut-off valves and check valves between the engine and the tank. The engine shall be capable of lifting fuel from the tank and supplying fuel under pressure to the injectors. Features include the following:

1. Fuel-Tank Capacity: 1000-gallons. 2. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Leak detection in interstitial space. 4. One 3” NPT local fuel fill port with vandal-resistant fill cap. 5. One normal vent. 6. Two emergency vents. 7. Level gauge. 8. One 4” NPT port for connection of remote fuel fill / fuel supply piping provided

under Bid Alternate No. 1. 9. One 3” NPT port for float switch assembly associated with the fuel return pump

to be provided under Bid Alternate No. 1. 10. One 2” NPT overflow port for fuel return pump to be provided under Bid

Alternate No. 1. 11. One 3” NPT port equipped with float assembly / level switches connected to

generator set controls. At a minimum, the following levels shall be monitored: a. Critical High Level: Contacts operate when fuel level reaches or exceeds

95% of tank capacity. b. Critical Low Level: Contacts operate when fuel level falls below 35% of

tank capacity. c. Level switches shall have DPDT contacts.

2.6 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Applicability: Unless specified or noted otherwise, the requirements of this paragraph shall apply to the controls furnished with the new generator sets and the controls furnished separately for installation in the existing generator sets.

B. Genset Control Panel: 1. Description: Digital controls designed and configured for complete engine and

alternate control, and part of an integrated control system. 2. Paralleling Capability: Genset controls shall be capable of communicating with

the Digital Master Controller and shall support multiple generator set paralleling operation, including synchronizing with other generators and sharing load.


C. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.

D. Provide minimum run time control set for 30 minutes with override only by operation of a remote emergency-stop switch.

E. Comply with UL 508A.

F. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. Panel shall be powered from the engine-generator set battery.

G. Indicating Devices: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, including the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. Genset supplying load indicator. 5. Ammeter and voltmeter phase-selector switches. 6. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 7. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 8. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 9. Running-time meter. 10. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.

H. Protective Devices and Controls in Local Control Panel: Shutdown devices and common visual alarm indication as required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, including the following:

1. Start-stop switch. 2. Over-crank shutdown device. 3. Over-speed shutdown device. 4. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 5. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 6. Low lube oil pressure shutdown device. 7. Air shutdown damper shutdown device when used. 8. Over-crank alarm. 9. Over-speed alarm. 10. Coolant high-temperature alarm. 11. Coolant low-temperature alarm.


12. Coolant low-level alarm. 13. Low lube oil pressure alarm. 14. Air shutdown damper alarm when used. 15. Lamp test. 16. Contacts for local and remote common alarm. 17. Coolant high-temperature pre-alarm. 18. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 19. Fuel tank low-level alarm. 20. Run-Off-Auto switch. 21. Control switch not in automatic position alarm. 22. Low cranking voltage alarm. 23. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 24. Battery low-voltage alarm. 25. Battery high-voltage alarm. 26. Generator overcurrent protective device not closed alarm.

I. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch (new generator sets only): Flush; wall mounted on enclosure, and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.

2.7 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION


B. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire Standby Power System shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices shall consider both utility and Generator sets as the voltage source.

1. Overcurrent protective devices for the Standby Power System shall be accessible only to authorized personnel.

C. Generator Disconnect Switch (new generator sets only): Molded-case type, 100 percent rated.

1. Trip Rating: Matched to generator output rating. 2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or by

other protective devices.

D. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator


disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector performs the following functions:

1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms. Contacts shall be available for load shed functions.

2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds.

3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set.

4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.

E. Ground-Fault Indication: Indicate ground fault with other generator-set alarm indications.

2.8 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR


B. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

C. Drive (new generator sets only): Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

D. Electrical Insulation (new generator sets only): Class H, temperature rise limited to 80-degrees Celsius at an ambient temperature of 40-degrees Celsuis.

E. Stator-Winding Leads (new generator sets only): Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. Provide 12 lead alternator.

F. Range (new generator sets only): Provide broad range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level.

G. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

H. Enclosure (new generator sets only): Dripproof.

I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified and as required by NFPA 110.


1. Adjusting Rheostat on Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

2. Maintain voltage within 15 percent under transient load conditions equal to starting a 300 HP motor across-the-line while connected to, and sharing the load with other generators synchronized and connected to, the paralleling switchgear.

3. Provide anti-hunt provision to stabilize voltage. 4. Maintain frequency within 5 percent and stabilize at rated frequency within 2

seconds.

J. Windings (new generator sets only): Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Sub-transient Reactance (new generator sets only): 16 percent, maximum.

2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Weatherproof aluminum housing, wind resistant up to 150 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. 1. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7. 2. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation. 4. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

C. Prewired AC distribution package: Located in housing. Integral 100-amp, 120/208-volt, 1-phase, 3-wire load center with circuit breakers and pre-wired to factory-installed accessory equipment such as battery charger, heaters, lights and receptacles.

D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vapor-proof fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior.

E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI-type.

2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.


1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Minimum Deflection:1 inch.

B. Vibration isolation devices shall not be used to accommodate misalignments or to make bends.

2.11 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions, with NFPA 37, and with NFPA 110.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install packaged engine generators on concrete equipment pad.

C. Install packaged engine-generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Wires and Cables (Under 600V)." Provide a minimum of one 90-degree bend in flexible conduit routed to the generator set from a stationary element.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical and mechanical test listed in the first two subparagraphs as specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

1) Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications.


2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 4) Verify the unit is clean.

b. Electrical and Mechanical Tests

1) Perform insulation-resistance tests in accordance with IEEE 43.

a) Machines larger than 200 horsepower. Test duration shall be 10 minutes. Calculate polarization index.

2) Test protective relay devices. 3) Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as

required by the application. 4) Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, over-

temperature, over-speed, and other protection features as applicable. 5) Conduct performance test in accordance with NFPA 110. 6) Verify correct functioning of the governor and regulator.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

7. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage at 25 percent and 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

C. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and paralleling switchgear and run them concurrently.


D. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to NIST Calibration Services, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.

E. Leak Test: After installation, charge exhaust, coolant, and fuel systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

F. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment.

G. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

I. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

J. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators.



PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR FUEL PUMPS AND CONTROLS 16232 - 1

SECTION 16232

PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR FUEL PUMPS AND CONTROLS

(BID ALTERNATE NO. 1)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fuel system return pumps, float controls, and associated starters for field installation and connection to packaged engine generator set day tanks.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 16231 "Packaged Engine Generators".


A. Product Data:

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans and elevations. Indicate access requirements. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring, and interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for equipment and functional relationship between all electrical components.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.



B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance


a. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

b. Operating instructions.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIESEL FUEL-OIL SUPPLY AND RETURN SYSTEM

A. Comply with NFPA 30.

B. Components specified herein for the diesel fuel-oil supply and return system shall be furnished by the same manufacturer as the generator and day tank, unless noted or specified otherwise.

C. Work of Other Divisions: Fuel-oil supply pumps and associated pump control panel, fuel oil supply piping, overfill prevention valve, fuel-oil return piping, and fuel supply solenoid valves, are all furnished under Division 15 as part of Bid Alternate No. 1.

D. Combination Starter: Sized specifically for return fuel pump, including overload relays.

E. Float Switch Assemblies: Multiple-position floats that slide up and down a rod and operate DPDT contacts at each designated level. 1. Float switch assemblies shall be designed specifically for the tank in which they

will be installed. Field measurements shall be taken as necessary to insure compliance with this requirement.

F. Return Fuel Pump: Returns fuel to main storage tank in an overfill condition. Pump shall come with combination starter ready for wiring to a power source and tank-mounted float switches. A suction tube shall be provided with the pump that shall terminate in the day tank at the 80 percent fuel level to insure submergence in an



overflow condition and prevent reverse siphon below the 80 percent level. Capacity of pump shall be greater than that of the fuel supply transfer pump at the main fuel storage tank. 1. Ratings: 19GPM, 1.5 HP, Dual 120/208-volts.

G. Fuel Return Pump Controls: The fuel return pump shall be automatically controlled by a new two-position float switch to be mounted in a spare port of the generator sub-base tank. Pump control shall operate as follows: 1. The fuel return pump shall start when fuel in tank reaches the critical high level

(95%) as indicated by the two-position float switch assembly. 2. The fuel return pump shall shut off when fuel in the tank drops below the high-

level (80%) as indicated by the two-position float switch assembly.

H. Fuel Supply Pump Controls: Control of associated solenoid valves and supply pump start/stop control shall be part of Division 16 work under Bid Alternate No. 1. As required for control of supply pumps and solenoid vales, provide a two-position float switch and mount in a spare port of the generator sub-base tank. Controls shall be as follows: 1. When fuel level in the day tank falls below the low level (50%), the lead supply

pump shall be started, and the associated fuel supply solenoid valve for the day tank shall open to allow fuel to flow to the tank.

2. When fuel level in the day tank rises to the high level (80%), the lead supply pump shall be shut off, and the associated fuel supply solenoid valve for the day tank shall be closed to prevent fuel from flowing to the tank.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturers' written installation instructions, with NFPA 37, and with NFPA 110.

B. Equipment Mounting:



1. Install return pump package on elevated concrete equipment pad adjacent to generator sub-base fuel tank.

C. Install equipment to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

D. Install Return Fuel Pump and associated wiring.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Wires and Cables (Under 600V)." Provide a minimum of one 90 degree bend in flexible conduit routed to the generator set from a stationary element.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."




1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical and mechanical test listed in the first two subparagraphs as specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection

1) Compare equipment nameplate data with drawings and specifications. 2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 4) Verify the unit is clean.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing.



ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16410-1

SECTION 16410

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special

Provisions and Divisions 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. This section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of

each Division 16 section-making reference to motor and circuit disconnect switches specified herein.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, “Enclosed and Dead-Front

Switches”. Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches which have been UL-listed and labeled.

B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub.

No. KS 1, “Enclosed Switches” and 250, “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, accessory, and component. Include nameplate ratings, dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Field Quality Control Test Reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches, components, and accessories within same product category, from single manufacturer.



B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions

C. Switches shall be heavy-duty, fusible type, with quick-make, quick-break operating mechanism. Switches shall be horsepower-rated, and load-make / load-break type. Use time delay fuses.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

2.02 FUSIBLE SWITCHES A. Heavy-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type

enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated, horsepower rated, solid neutral where required, incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; so constructed that blades are visible in OFF position with door open. Equipment with operating handle which is integral part of enclosure base and whose position is easily recognizable, and is pad-lockable in OFF position; construct current carrying parts of high-conductivity copper, with silver-tungsten type switch contacts, and positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, provide NEMA Type 4XSS (Type 316) enclosure outdoors, NEMA Type 12 indoors.

B. All fusible switches shall accept only Class R fuses, and shall have U.L. listed

Class R fuse rejection clips. C. The U.L. short circuit rating shall be 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when

Class R fuses are used.

D. All switches shall be U.L. listed for use with copper or aluminum wire whose ampacity and temperature rating are in compliance with NEC 110-14(C).

E. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Install disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer’s

written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA’s



“Standard of Installation”, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and

cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches used for motor-driven appliances, and motors and

controllers within sight of controller position, unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide and install fuses in switches. Fuse shall be mounted right side up, so its

label can be read left to right or bottom to top when the enclosure door is open E. Vacuum clean debris from all enclosures. 3.02 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections, sufficiently tight to assure a

permanent and effective ground, for electrical disconnect switches where indicated.


A. Inspect switches for damage.

B. Verify fuse sizes match the connected load and that fuses have adequate contact and support.

C. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

D. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade fuseholder. Drop values shall not exceed the high level of the manufacturer's published data. If manufacturer's published data are not available, investigate values that deviate from adjacent poles or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

E. Perform insulation-resistance tests for one minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published data, use Table 100.1 from the NETA ATS. Investigate values of insulation resistance less than those published in Table 100.1 or as recommended in manufacturer's published data.

F. Perform ground fault test according to NETA ATS 7.14 "Ground Fault Protection Systems, Low-Voltage."



G. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports. Indicate test procedures used, deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. Uniquely identify each switch for reference.

I. Subsequent to completion of tests, energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units and retest.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.



TRANSFER SWITCHES 16415 - 1

SECTION 16415

TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes automatic transfer switches rated 600 V and less.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for transfer switches.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, and installed features and devices.

2. Include material lists for each switch specified. 3. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources,

and load.


A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.




a. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. b. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration

instructions, including software, where applicable.


A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for transfer switches, including clearances between switches and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for the following conditions:


C. Unusual Service Conditions: Equipment and installation are required to operate under the following conditions:

1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be located in close proximity to salt water and sewer gases.

D. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 110.

D. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.



E. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer.

F. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Short-Circuit Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

2. Short-time withstand capability for 30 cycles. 3. Minimum withstand of 65kA if not indicated on drawings.

G. Repetitive Accuracy of Solid-State Controls: All settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

H. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.62. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

I. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism. Switches for emergency or standby purposes shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions to prevent simultaneous connection to both power sources unless closed transition.

J. Neutral Switching: Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles.

K. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Where specified herein or indicated on drawings, provide devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels. Switches shall have communication capability matched with remote device.

L. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable with printed markers at terminations.

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

M. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 12 indoors, Type 4X stainless steel (type 316) outdoors, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.



2.2 CONTACTOR-TYPE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (“ATS-SOLIDS”)

A. Compatibility: ATS shall be able to communicate over a serial data network to, and seamlessly integrate with, the multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system specified in Section 16430, existing (retrofitted) transfer switches, existing (retrofitted) generator set control panels, and the new generators to be furnished under this project. It shall be possible to monitor and control the ATS from the multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system to be provided as part of this project.

B. Comply with Level 2 equipment according to NFPA 110.

C. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are unacceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Contactor-

style automatic transfer-switch units, rated 600 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

4. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 5. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 6. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 7. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type. 8. Connectors shall be marked for conductor size and type according to UL 1008.

D. Automatic Open-Transition Transfer Switches: Interlocked to prevent the load from being closed on both sources at the same time.

1. Sources shall be mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent closing both sources on the load at the same time.

E. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of generator controls, switchgear controls, and control consoles.

F. Automatic Transfer-Switch Controller Features:

1. Controller operates through a period of loss of control power. 2. Under-voltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal and Standby Source: Sense low

phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage shall be adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to standby source. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set



for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from zero to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes. Override shall automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained under-voltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal-

and emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Standby Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Standby Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

10. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

11. Load Shed: When signaled by the DMC, ATS removes the load by driving the transfer switch to a neutral position. ATS immediately retransfers to primary source when available.

2.3 TRANSFER SWITCH MODIFICATIONS

A. Existing ATS switches “ATS-A, “ATS-B”, and “ATS-C” shall be field-modified to have the capability of communicating with the multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system specified in Section 16430. Modifications shall include, but not be necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Communications Control Module: A communications module that is compatible

with the multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system shall be installed. Module shall be able to communicate all information required by the multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system specified in Section 16430. The multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system shall be able to control switch position for the purposes of generator testing under plant loads.

2. Instrumentation: CT’s and PT’s shall be added for monitoring load data. Instrumentation may be mounted in the existing enclosures, on in new 12”x12”x8” enclosures mounted adjacent to each existing enclosure.



B. PLC located in existing switchgear “MSG” that controls the automatic transfer of connected loads between the two main 4000A circuit breakers shall be modified and reprogrammed as required to allow the multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system to test the banked generators under plant loads. Modifications shall include, but not be necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Communications Module: A communications module that is compatible with the

multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system shall be installed. The multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and control system shall be able to control switchgear main circuit breakers via the existing PLC for the purposes of generator testing under plant loads.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment according to UL 1008. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

1. For each of the tests required by UL 1008, performed on representative devices. Include results of test for the following conditions:

a. Over-voltage. b. Under-voltage. c. Loss of supply voltage. d. Reduction of supply voltage. e. Alternative supply voltage or frequency is at minimum acceptable values. f. Temperature rise. g. Dielectric voltage-withstand; before and after short-circuit test. h. Overload. i. Contact opening. j. Endurance. k. Short circuit. l. Short-time current capability. m. Receptacle withstand capability. n. Insulating base and supports damage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.



1. Install transfer switches on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). 2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into

bases. 3. Provide workspace and clearances required by NFPA 70.

B. Identify components according to Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

C. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to generator sets, control, and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways except within electrical enclosures. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

D. Ground equipment according to manufacturer’s requirements and Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing equipment, test for compliance with requirements according to NETA ATS.

2. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. d. Verify that the unit is clean. e. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on

moving and sliding surfaces. f. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible.



g. Verify tightness of all control connections. h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the

following methods, or both:

1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by

calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data.

i. Perform manual transfer operation. j. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate

sources. k. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters. l. Inspect control power transformers.

1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.

2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit-breaker ratings match Drawings.

3. Electrical Tests:

a. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.

b. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. Compare measured values with manufacturer's acceptable values.

c. Verify settings and operation of control devices. d. Calibrate and set all relays and timers. e. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation. f. Perform automatic transfer tests. g. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions:

1) Normal source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. 2) Engine start sequence. 3) Time delay on transfer. 4) Alternative source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. 5) Automatic transfer operation. 6) Interlocks and limit switch function. 7) Time delay and retransfer on normal power restoration. 8) Engine cool-down and shutdown feature.

4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.



a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and

integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, perform each electrical test for transfer switches stated in NETA ATS and demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and retransfer from standby source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values

exceeding 500 microhms and values for one pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. b. Observe reaction of circuit interrupting devices when simulated fault

current is applied at sensors.

C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

E. Transfer switches will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Plant's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment.



B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.

C. Provide a minimum of 8 hours training. Training shall be held on site and shall include classroom style and hands-on training.



PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION EQUIPMENT 16416 - 1

SECTION 16416

PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Product Data:

1. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of equipment and overcurrent protective

devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For equipment and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


a. Routine maintenance requirements for equipment and all installed components.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

c. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.


A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for equipment, including clearances between equipment and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Environmental Limitations: 1. Rate equipment for continuous operation in the environment in which it will be

installed.

C. Unusual Service Conditions: 1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be near salt water and sewer gases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION EQUIPMENT


B. Comply with NFPA 70.



C. Comply with UL 1008.

2.2 PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION BOX (BID ALTERNATE NO. 2)

A. Description: Free-standing switchboard with Cam-Style locking connectors pre-terminated to bussing for connection of a roll-up type generator having a capacity of up to 2MW.

B. Enclosure: Pad-lockable, NEMA 250, Type 3R, stainless steel (type 316).

C. Ratings: Equipment shall be rated for 480Y/277-volt service, 3000A, 22kAIC (minimum).

D. Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

E. Access: The main access shall be through a hinged door that extends the full height of the enclosure. Access for portable generator cables with female cam-style plugs shall be via cable entry openings in the bottom of the enclosure. A hinged flap door shall be provided to cover the cable openings when cables are not connected; the hinged flap door shall allow cable entry only after the main access door has been opened.

F. Connectors: Cam-style male connectors (inlets) shall be UL Listed single-pole separable type and rated 400 amps at 600VAC. Cam-style male connectors shall be color coded. Cam-style male connectors shall be provided for each phase, neutral, and ground. The ground cam-style male connectors shall be bonded to the enclosure, and a ground lug shall be provided for connection of the equipment grounding conductor from the distribution equipment served by the connection box. None of the cam-style male connectors shall be accessible unless the main access door is open.

2.3 PORTABLE GENERATOR STORM SWITCH

A. Description: Service-entrance rated, manual transfer switch with Cam-Style locking connectors pre-terminated for connection of a roll-up type generator.

B. Enclosure: Pad-lockable, NEMA 250, Type 3R, stainless steel (type 316).

C. Ratings: Equipment shall be service-entrance rated for 480Y/277-volt service, 400A. 1. Short circuit current rating shall be determined by the power system study, 35

kAIC minimum.

D. Manual Transfer: Accomplished by operating mechanically-interlocked molded case circuit breakers.

E. Access: The main access shall be through an interlocked, hinged door that extends the full height of the enclosure. Access for portable generator cables with female cam-style plugs shall be via cable entry openings in the bottom of enclosure. A hinged flap door



shall be provided to cover the cable openings when cables are not connected; the hinged flap door shall allow cable entry only after the main access door has been opened.

F. Connectors: Cam-style male connectors (inlets) shall be UL Listed single-pole separable type and rated 400 amps at 600VAC. Cam-style male connectors shall be color coded. Cam-style male connectors shall be provided for each phase, neutral, and ground. Each of the phase cam-style male connectors within the enclosure shall be factory-wired to a molded case circuit breaker. The ground cam-style male connectors shall be bonded to the enclosure, and a ground lug shall be provided for connection of the equipment grounding and grounding electrode conductors. The neutral cam-style male connectors shall be factory wired to a power distribution block. None of the cam-style male connectors shall be accessible unless both molded case circuit breakers are in the “OFF” position and the main access door is open.

G. Circuit Breakers: UL Listed. One molded case circuit breaker shall be fed from utility power; the other molded case circuit breaker shall be fed from the cam-style male connectors to supply power from a portable generator. Both molded case circuit breakers shall include UL Listed door-mounted operating mechanisms, preventing the opening of the main access door unless both breakers are in the “OFF” position. Both molded case circuit breakers shall be mounted behind a deadfront panel. The load-side of the molded case circuit breakers shall not be energizable unless the main access door is closed and one of the molded case circuit breakers is in the “ON” position. The (2) molded case circuit breakers shall be safety interlocked by mechanical means to ensure that only one breaker can be closed at any given time.

H. Grounding: Additional lugs and other provisions for bonding neutral to ground.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification” for electrical identification devices and installation.

B. Provide Portable Generator Label per NEC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment before installation. Reject equipment that is moisture damaged or physically damaged.

B. Examine elements and surfaces to receive equipment for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work or that affect the performance of the equipment.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, straps and brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from equipment.

C. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Support and secure conductors according to NFPA 70.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

B. Nameplates: Label equipment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."


A. Acceptance Testing: 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 16430 - 1

SECTION 16430

PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Metal-enclosed, low-voltage, circuit-breaker switchgear rated 600 V and less, and associated monitoring and control systems and equipment for paralleling standby generators on an isolated bus and for distributing electrical power.

B. This section describes requirements for controls and switchgear for paralleling generator sets and distributing alternate source power. Equipment provided shall be new factory assembled paralleling equipment with dedicated purpose microprocessor-based controls designed for fast, reliable operation and including the functions described herein.

C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 16230, "Packaged Engine Generators" for individual generator controls

and protection. 2. Section 16415, “Transfer Switches” for system interfaces, including start/stop

commands and status information.


A. Product Data: For each type of paralleling low-voltage switchgear.

1. Include technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes for programmable logic controllers, instrumentation, control devices, monitoring devices, network interfaces, and display components.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, factory settings, and accessories for individual circuit breakers.

3. Provide technical data for the controls, switchgear, and equipment described in this section. Provide technical data fully describing the critical design features of the equipment proposed, and substantiating compliance to the requirements of this specification. Data shall include a complete description of the features and function of the proposed equipment, described on the manufacturer’s published



literature or manufacturer’s letterhead with a manufacturer’s employee signature validating its accuracy.

4. Include a listing of all setting ranges and factory default settings. 5. Include time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices.

B. Shop Drawings: For paralleling low-voltage switchgear and associated monitoring and control equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, shipping sections, weights of each assembled section, and required clearances and service space around equipment.

2. Include tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. 3. Include enclosure types and details. 4. Detail locations for anchor bolts and leveling channels. 5. Show bus configuration with current rating, size, and number of conductors in

each bus run, including phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses.

6. Indicate short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly. 7. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 8. Detail nameplate legends. 9. Include mimic-bus diagram. 10. Include three-line power wiring diagrams for paralleling low-voltage switchgear,

generators, and related equipment showing device terminal numbers. 11. Include point-to-point schematic control, monitoring, and alarm wiring diagrams

showing internal component terminal numbers. 12. Include point-to point schematic control, monitoring, and alarm wiring diagrams

for all externally-connected components indicating terminal numbers, cable types, and other relevant information. Include connections to and for the following:

a. Engine generators. b. Transfer switches. c. Local and Remote Human Machine and Operator Interfaces d. Load-control devices. e. Instrumentation. f. Network and communication wiring. g. Existing, remote PLC.

C. Sequence of Operation: Description of sequence of operation for paralleling controls in automatic, manual, system test, and generator unloading modes.

1. Include the following in the description of the automatic-mode sequence of operation:

a. Programmed sequence of initial generator starting and connection of generators to the isolated paralleling bus.



b. Programmed sequence of transferring loads to the isolated paralleling bus based on operator-adjustable preset priorities and preset loads. Include initial load settings.

c. Programmed sequence of starting and stopping generators based on actual real-time measured loads.

d. Programmed sequence of sending a load-shed signal to transfer switches when the generator frequency does not return to the normal frequency within the adjustable time period.

e. Programmed sequence of stopping generators based on no transfer switch or other device sending a start signal.

2. Include the following in the description of the system testing mode sequence of operation:

a. Plant Load. b. Load Bank. c. No load.

3. Include in the description, the generator unloading mode sequence of operation. 4. Include in the description, the manual-mode sequence of operation showing that

the manual mode fulfills the requirement to permit the operator at the paralleling low-voltage switchgear to accomplish all automatic, system test, and unloading functions.

5. Paralleling Low-Voltage Switchgear Redundancy: Identify any single points of failure.


A. Coordination Drawings:

1. Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around paralleling low-voltage switchgear where pipe and ducts are prohibited.

2. Switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements.

3. Support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

4. Show conduit stub-up locations. 5. Coordinate switchgear requirements with building provider.

B. Qualification Data: 1. Document compliance with Quality Assurance paragraph. 2. Provide names, qualifications, and locations of individuals who will service and

support the equipment.



C. Source quality-control reports: Provide factory test report plan for integrated generator controls and paralleling system.

D. Field quality-control reports: Provide field test plan for integrated generator and paralleling system.


A. Updated mimic bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections have been made, for record.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For paralleling low-voltage switchgear and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Division 01, include the following:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for sequence of operation. b. Manufacturer's system checklists, maintenance schedule, and maintenance

log sheets complying with NFPA 110. c. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting relays. d. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of

overcurrent protective device.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for paralleling low-voltage switchgear testing, monitoring, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the following:

1. Traveling-type lifting device, rail mounted on top of paralleling low-voltage switchgear and all other items necessary to remove circuit breaker from housing and transport it to remote location.

2. Racking handle to move circuit breaker manually between connected and disconnected positions.

3. Any non-standard tools for mechanical maintenance on the system. This includes items such as circuit breaker racking wrenches and special engine tools.





B. The paralleling equipment manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation, and service, in accordance with ISO 9001.

C. Source Limitations: The paralleling switchgear shall be designed, manufactured, and warranted by the generator set manufacturer to provide a single source of responsibility for all the products provided. Warranty documents shall be provided verifying compliance to this requirement. Supplier shall directly employ service technicians specifically trained and qualified on the diagnosis and repair of engines, alternators, power transfer equipment, and paralleling equipment. The technicians shall be trained in the installation and commissioning of complex generator systems, including line voltage generator paralleling equipment.

D. The paralleling system, including generator sets and paralleling equipment, shall be serviced by a single local service organization that is trained and factory certified in both generator set and paralleling equipment service. The technicians serving the site shall be specifically trained and certified by the manufacturer in the diagnosis and repair of the synchronizing, paralleling, and load sharing equipment provided. The supplier shall maintain an inventory of critical replacement parts at the local service organization, and in service vehicles. The service organization shall be on call 24 hours per day, 365 days per year.

E. The manufacturer shall maintain model and serial number records for the paralleling equipment for at least 20 years.

F. Equipment provided shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards to the extent that they are applicable: 1. ANSI C37.20.1 - Metal Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

Switchgear. 2. ANSI C37.13 - Low voltage power circuit breakers. 3. ANSI C37.17 - Trip devices. 4. ANSI C37.51 - Testing of Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage AC Power Circuit

Breaker Switchgear. 5. ANSI/IEEE C57.13 - Requirements for Instrument Transformers. 6. NEMA SG-3 - Low voltage power circuit breakers. 7. NEMA SG5 - Switchgear assemblies. 8. UL 1558 - Switchgear Assemblies. 9. UL1066 - Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers. 10. UL891 - Switchboards and Controls. Control equipment provided in switchboard

enclosures shall be listed and labeled under this standard. 11. CSA C22.2, No. 14 - M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 12. NFPA70 - National Electrical Code. 13. NFPA110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems.



1.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (FACTORY TESTING)

A. Test and inspect paralleling low-voltage switchgear at paralleling low-voltage switchgear manufacturer's factory.

1. Paralleling Low-Voltage Switchgear:

a. NETA ATS, 7.6.1.2, "Circuit Breaker, Air, Low-Voltage Power Switchgear."

b. Factory test with simulated inputs. Test control and relay functions for proper operation.

B. Before shipment of the equipment to the jobsite, the entire control system (including generator set controls) and all the new switchgear directly controlled by the control system shall be tested together at the manufacturer's facility to demonstrate that it is fully functional prior to shipment to the jobsite. No exceptions to the requirements of this paragraph will be accepted.

C. The system shall be static tested to a level that exceeds the sequence of operations including but not limited to the following. Each failure mode test shall be documented and included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1. Generator Failure. 2. Network Communication Failure. 3. Control System Component Failures. 4. Unexpected Breaker Operation. 5. Manual Modes of Operation. 6. Breaker Failure Modes.

D. Verification of Performance: Rate paralleling low-voltage switchgear according to operation of functions and features specified. Paralleling low-voltage switchgear must be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports.


A. Deliver paralleling low-voltage switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Equipment shall be protected from moisture, dirt, and physical damage.

C. Store paralleling low-voltage switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation.




A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:



B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for paralleling low-voltage switchgear, including clearances between paralleling switchgear and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for the following conditions:


D. Unusual Service Conditions: Equipment and installation are required to operate under the following conditions:

1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be located in close proximity to salt water and sewer gases.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace paralleling equipment that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Metal-enclosed switchgear with multiple generator power input circuit breakers and load distribution (output) circuit breakers controlled by a digital master controller (DMC) mounted in a free-standing switchboard adjacent to the switchgear. A human-machine interface (HMI) touchscreen mounted in the DMC switchboard provides system information and operator interfaces.

B. The DMC shall monitor and control the following standby power system components:



1. Generator synchronization. 2. Paralleling low-voltage switchgear power input circuit breakers. 3. Paralleling switchgear load distribution (output) circuit breakers. 4. Engine generators: DMC shall be able to communicate with, control, and monitor

the status of connected generator-mounted controls. 5. Transfer switches: DMC shall be able to communicate with, control, and provide

status information for connected transfer switches.

C. Redundancy:

1. System shall be capable of supporting an “N+1” generator power scheme. It shall be possible to designate any connected generator as the “standby” generator. It shall further be possible for the DMC to designate the generator with the largest number of engine run hours as the “standby” so that all connected gensets are operated on a regular basis. A maximum of 4000 kW shall be allowed to be connected to the switchgear at any single time

2. A redundant DMC shall be provided if necessary to avoid any single point of failure in the standby power system. Multiple-generator paralleling monitoring and controls shall automatically be performed by a backup system without degradation in the event that primary system fails to function for any reason (such as component failure or off-line maintenance).

D. Sequence of Operation for Normal Conditions:

1. Paralleling low-voltage switchgear, including controlled generators, controlled circuit breakers, other controlled devices, and transfer switches, shall be in the automatic position and ready to operate on loss of power or other designated initiation conditions.

E. Sequence of Operation for Loss of Normal Power Conditions: Sequence is identified on drawings.

F. Sequence of Operation for Overload Conditions: Sequence is identified on drawings.

G. Load-Demand Sequence of Operation: Genset unload sequences are identified on drawings.

H. Return to Normal Condition Sequence of Operation: 1. When no load remains on isolated paralleling bus, all generator breakers open, go

through cool-down period, and shut down. 2. If start signal is received during cool-down period, one engine generator is

reconnected to isolated paralleling bus, and system operation follows that of "loss of normal power."

I. System Test Sequence of Operation:



1. Configure tests to comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 testing requirements for each generator. Automatically generate NFPA 110, Level 1 reports.

2. Single-generator test. 3. Multiple-generator test. 4. Start generators manually or by generator exerciser on user-defined schedule. 5. Engine generator(s) start and achieve rated voltage and frequency. 6. Failure of Engine Generator to Start: After expiration of overcrank time delay,

engine generator shuts down and alarm is initiated. 7. Black-Start Control: Prevent out-of-phase paralleling. After selecting first

generator to achieve 90 percent rated voltage and frequency, inhibit connection of generator-controlled circuit breakers to isolated paralleling bus, then close circuit breaker connecting first generator to isolated paralleling bus. Each single-generator paralleling monitoring and control system synchronizes its associated engine generator and allows closure of respective generator paralleling low-voltage circuit breakers to the isolated paralleling bus. On closure to isolated paralleling bus, each engine generator assumes its proportional share of total load.

8. Failure of Engine Generator to Synchronize: If engine generator fails to synchronize, sound alarm after preset time delay, but continue to attempt to synchronize engine generator until signaled to stop by manual operation.

9. Manually select or automatically preselect whether test is a load or no-load test. If test is a load test, manually select or automatically preselect loads to be transferred according to schedule or by adjustable time delays at transfer switches. After generators are connected to isolated paralleling bus, transfer loads by sending signal to load-add relay that is connected to input for "remote transfer to generator source" of transfer switch controller or to other devices. If test is load-bank test, automatically operate load-bank breaker to connect load bank for testing generators based on number and configuration of generators.

10. After adjustable period of time the system, allow engine generators to optimize down to only the required number to be online to avoid wet stacking. Set stopping and starting sequences through human-machine interface panel device and allow settings based on manual priorities or by engine run time.

11. On sensing available bus capacity diminished to set point, controller starts and closes engine generators to the isolated paralleling bus to accommodate load.

12. After system test is completed, transfer loads back to normal power with transfer switches. Shut down system using sequence in automatic mode.

13. If there is an outage during this mode of operation, automatically change to requirements specified in "Sequence of Operation for Loss of Normal Power Conditions".

J. Comply with NFPA 110 for the following: 1. Optional Standby: EPSS Level 2, Type 60.

K. Basis of Design is Cummins Power Generation Paralleling switchgear with DMC-8000 Digital Master Controls (DMC) communicating with Cummins Power Generation Generator Set Controls and Cummins Power Generation Automatic Transfer Switches. Digital Paralleling Equipment, Generator Set Controls, and transfer switches by other



suppliers that meet the requirements of this section, Section 16230 “Packaged Engine Generators”, and Section 16415 “Transfer Switches” are acceptable, if approved not less than 2 weeks before scheduled bid date. Proposals must include a line by line compliance statement for all three specification sections.

2.2 MULTIPLE-GENERATOR PARALLELING MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Components and Devices: Provide an independent system master control to monitor and control the operation of the entire paralleling system, factory mounted in a separate switchboard, adjacent to the switchgear. The master control system shall be listed and labeled under the requirements of UL 891, including all covers, barriers, and supports. Individual control sections shall be isolated from each other by metal or insulating barriers. AC control circuits in the switchboard shall be protected with properly sized miniature circuit breakers. Potential transformers shall be protected on line and load side. All CT installations shall include shorting type terminal blocks. All interior panels and doors shall be bonded to the grounding bar.

B. Main Controller: The DMC and associated I/O components shall have the following minimum specifications: 1. Environment: All active control system components in the system shall be

suitable for operation in ambient temperatures ranging from 0 to +60 degrees C. The active control electronics shall be environmentally protected from dust, dirt, and humidity. The controls shall be suitable for operation in an ambient ranging from 5-95% relative humidity, and shall be protected from the effects of equipment vibration.

2. Power: 19-30 VDC. 3. The DMC shall use primarily a distributed I/O configuration to reduce the amount

of interconnect wiring. The communication network shall be a self-healing ring network, where any cable break will not interrupt communications between the DMC and the I/O communication module. Diagnostic information shall be located on the diagnostics screen in the HMI to graphically indicate where any cable breaks and communication failures have occurred.

4. The DMC shall allow for all field wiring to be landed on dedicated terminal blocks. The terminal blocks shall be rated to be capable of the largest required wire gauge that may be required for field wiring. All field control interconnecting wiring shall be sized as specified by system manufacturer (wiring not designated by the system manufacturer shall be minimum 14 AWG copper). All control interconnect wiring shall be stranded.

5. The DMC 24VDC bus for control power shall be derived from a “best battery”. The “best battery” shall combine the 24VDC battery supplies from each generator, as well as the station battery power supply. Provisions must be available for an additional customer supplied 24VDC source to be added to the best battery bus. The station battery included in the DMC shall be capable of supplying the entire cabinet’s power requirements during starter dip of the engine



generators, as well as be able to fully supply the power requirements in the case of a failure of all generator batteries. The station battery system shall consist of a 24VDC power supply, a UPS, and a set of batteries capable of supplying the Master Control power indefinitely during normal conditions, and for at least 30 minutes during an entire facility outage before additional charging is required.

6. All Control Relays in the DMC shall have LED indicators.

C. Redundant Multiple-Generator Monitoring and Control System Controller:

1. Fully equip with redundant CPU and power supplies. Redundant CPU shall be supplied with a bump less transfer when the primary CPU has a failure. The configuration shall be of a synchronized Hot-standby. The failure of one CPU should not have any effect on the distributed I/O racks nor any loss of data.

D. Multiple-generator monitoring and control system auto/manual selector switch (may be incorporated into an operator screen).

E. Control switch for circuit breaker that serves load bank (may be incorporated into an operator screen).

F. Under Alternate No. 2, a control switch for the circuit breaker that serves the roll-up generator connection box (may be incorporated into an operator screen).

G. Full-Color, Touch-Screen, Human-Machine Interface Device:

1. The Operator Panel shall be constructed of two parts, a Touchscreen and an Industrial PC; both shall have separate isolated 24 VDC power supplies.

2. Touchscreen shall be a 19” (or larger) TFT LCD monitor with a minimum resolution of 1280x1024. Touchscreen shall be constructed such that it can be replaced easily, without programming modifications.

3. Industrial PC shall not have any moving parts and shall include the following at a minimum: 32GB storage, (2) RJ-45 Ethernet ports, and (6) USB ports. PC operating system shall be Windows, embedded.

4. The Operator Interface must have the provisions to ensure that only one operator is in control of the system at any access point to the master control. This includes all redundant, secondary, or web screen interfaces.

H. Operator Screens: 1. General: Configurable graphic screens to provide operators with visual indication

of system status and a point of control for system operation. The Operator Screens shall be constructed so that every main screen is within one click of each other. A common navigation bar should be available so that any screen can be accessed from another screen without the need to return to a main menu. A common navigation bar should be available so that any screen can be accessed from another screen without the need to return to a main menu. The Screen Navigation buttons shall be graphical in nature and indicate visually whether the screen is available to be selected, is unselected, or is selected. Operator Help



Screens shall be available on every screen with screen specific content. The Security Log-in/Log out screens shall be available from every screen. The current System Operating Mode shall be displayed on every screen.

2. Generator Summary Screen: Screen shall display generator state, status, and all engine and alternator parameters including, at a minimum, the following:

a. Generator control switch position. b. Generator status (stopped, start pending, warmup at idle, running, cool

down at rated, cool down at idle). c. Generator common alarm. d. Generator shutdown. e. Generator breaker position. f. Engine data, including engine speed, oil pressure, coolant temperature,

battery voltage, engine runtime, and fuel consumption rate. g. Alternator data, including voltage, current, frequency, power factor, percent

kW, total kW, total kVAR, and total kVA. h. Paralleling Bus data, including voltage and frequency. i. Generator set alarms, including high/low battery voltage, battery charger

failure, fail to start, overspeed, low coolant temperature, high engine temperature, low oil pressure, low coolant level, and low fuel level.

3. Engine Generator Control Screen (Screen may be part of the Generator Summary Screen): Screen shall provide for the following operator controls: a. Engine generator manual start/stop control (functional only when the

paralleling low-voltage switchgear mounted control switch is in "Auto" position).

b. Engine generator alarm reset. c. Manual paralleling and circuit-breaker enable/inhibit controls.

4. System Control Screen: Screen shall provide for the following operator controls: a. Engine function and timer settings. b. System function, testing, and timer settings. c. Engine generator optimization settings: automatically determine the priority

of the engine generators based on engine run time and number of engine starts or manually assign engine priorities.

d. Time Delay Adjustments. e. System Mode Adjustments. f. System Test Modes: Test with load/test without load/normal/retransfer

time-delay override. g. Test with Load: Starts and synchronizes engine generators on isolated

paralleling bus; all loads are transferred to the isolated paralleling bus. h. Test without Load: Starts and synchronizes engine generators on isolated

paralleling bus but does not transfer loads to the isolated paralleling bus. i. Time adjustments for retransfer time delay, transfer time delay, system time

delay on stopping, and system time delay on starting.



5. One-Line Diagram Screen: Depicting system configuration and system status by screen animation, screen colors, text messages, or pop-up indicators.

a. Conditions for Engine Generators, Buses, and Paralleling Circuit Breakers: Energized or de-energized.

b. Engine Generator Modes:

1) Auto. 2) Manual. 3) Running 4) Cool down. 5) Test off line. 6) Test on load.

c. Engine Generator Status: Normal, warning, shutdown, or load-demand stop. d. Paralleling Circuit-Breaker Status: Open, closed, or tripped. e. Bus Conditions: Energized or de-energized. f. Percent load. g. Feeder Breakers shall have the ability to open and close by pressing the

breaker symbol to open a control window for operator initiated open and close

h. Automatic Transfer Switches shall show status of the switch as well as the source status when available

i. The Power System device names shall be field editable to suit customer specific device names and shall not require programming software to do so

j. Display average Voltage and Power for each source. k. Percent of available capacity of the engine generators that are operating in

parallel on the bus.

6. Metering Screen: The metering screen shall display system metering data at a minimum for all source breakers. The metering shall be a minimum of 1% accurate for voltage and current measurements AC metering screen for isolated paralleling bus shall display the following:

a. Line-to-line volts per phase b. Line-to-neutral volts per phase. c. Average voltage line-to-line and line-to-neutral. d. Amps per phase. e. Average amps. f. Frequency. g. Real Power (kW) h. Reactive Power (kVAR) i. Apparent Power (kVA) j. Power factor. k. Kilowatt hours.



7. Analog Metering Screen: Graphical analog (270 electrical degree) metering representation with digital display. Analog Gauges should be available for the following parameters. The range shall be field adjustable for min and max. The gauges shall be available in two sizes.

a. Individual generator electrical data, including average output voltage, average current, kW, kVA, and frequency.

b. Individual generator engine data, including starting battery voltage, oil pressure, coolant temperature, and engine RPM.

c. Switchgear bus electrical data, including average bus voltage, average current, kW, kVA, and frequency.

8. Trending Screen: The trending screen shall be able to display up to 8 simultaneous graphs. The trending graphs shall allow for each parameter being logged to be displayed at any one time and not be limited to trend “groups”, or limited to a single simultaneous device. The graph scales shall be adjustable for time as well as for each parameter’s y axis. Each trend shall be able to be paused and then re-started without any loss of data. The available trend information shall be for the previous 90 days, at a minimum, in a FIFO format The trend data shall be available for export to a USB media drive in a .CSV file format. The following shall be available for trending:

a. Individual generator electrical data, including average output voltage, average current, percent kW, total kW, Total KVAR, total KVA, frequency, and power factor.

b. Individual Generator engine data, including starting battery voltage, oil pressure, oil temperature, coolant temperature, engine RPM, and fuel consumption rate.

c. Switchgear bus electrical data, including average bus voltage, average current, total kW, total kVAR, total kVA, frequency, and power factor.

9. Load Control and Demand Screens: Screens shall be used to implement load add and shed sequences. a. The Load Control Screen shall allow for load level configuration for each

load. Each load should be able to be assigned to a configurable load add and load shed level.

b. The Shed levels should be allowed to be automatically assigned according to the order of the assigned add level, or if desired be operator customized.

c. Each Load shall be able to have a field configurable name that corresponds to the name on the Oneline diagram. Programming software should not be required to change the load name.

d. The Load Control Screen shall show the status of each Load Level as follows: Added / Shed / Restored. Manual Add/Shed control of each load level shall be available.

e. The Load Demand Screen Shall allow for enabling the Load Demand Function.



f. Load demand shutdown sequence shall be adjustable and user-configurable. In addition, standard sequences shall be included for run hour optimization and simple rotation.

g. The load demand function shall automatically adjust the load demand sequence to remove a generator that is shutdown on a fault, and to move a generator with an active warning to be the first generator to shut down in the sequence.

h. Load demand shutdown sequence shall be field adjustable. Standard sequences shall be available based on generator operating percentage and absolute kW.

i. It shall be possible to adjust load demand set points for initial time delay, shutdown time delay, restart time delay, and spare pickup kW.

10. ATS Status Screen: Displays status of automatic transfer switches connected to the system, including the following:

a. Automatic transfer switch connected to normal. b. Automatic transfer switch connected to emergency.

11. Alarm Screen: The Alarm Screen shall display all currently active or unacknowledged alarms. Alarms shall be time and date stamped and shall be color coded to designate that the alarm is active (red), active but acknowledged (green), or inactive and unacknowledged (blue). At a minimum, the follow alarms shall be displayed and logged:

a. Generator Alarms: Include all required and optional Level 2 alarms indicated in NFPA 110 plus “Not in Auto”, “Fail to Sync”, “Emergency Stop”, and “Overload”.

b. Generator Breaker Alarms: Include “Fail to Open”, “Fail to Close”, “Tripped”, “Ground Fault”, and “In Manual Operation”.

c. Feeder Breaker Alarms: Include “Fail to Open”, “Fail to Close”, “Tripped”, “Ground Fault”, and “In Manual Operation”.

d. Communication Alarms. e. System Alarms.

12. Alarm History Screen: The Alarm History Screen shall hold all recorded alarms for a year and be able to display 1000 alarms simultaneously. The Alarm History Screen shall allow and operator to filter the displayed alarms by date or message text.

13. Event Log Screen: The Event Log Screen shall log all events in the system. In general, this should be any change in the system that does not require operator intervention or acknowledgement. The Event Log shall log all state changes for Security Log, System Events, Breakers, Generators, and ATS. The Event Log shall have the ability to filter events based on the event type or the date that an



event occurred. The Event log shall be able to show up to 1000 events. It shall be possible to print and clear the log.

I. Remote Monitoring: Replicate human-machine interface monitoring functions at the remote HMI located in the Lab Building.

J. Reports: HMI shall be capable of compiling the following reports, which can be printed, saved to USB media, viewed through a connected web server, or emailed. 1. Generator Report: The generator report shall allow for a facility to record the

necessary data to ensure compliance with NFPA 110. The Generator report function shall allow for simultaneous reporting of all generators in the system. Each generator shall be assigned a file with its respective reports. The report shall record the following Generator parameters at a rate set by the Report Sample rate: Oil pressure, coolant temperature, battery voltage, total kW, percent kW, total kVAR, frequency, amps per phase, volts per phase (L-L and L-N). In addition, the report shall record the time that the generator was above the minimum loading requirements.

2. Run Report: Report shall record all events that occur during generator set running. Report shall include the date and time of the utility failure (or test start time), of each generator start command, of each generator reaching rated frequency and voltage, of each generator breaker closing to the bus, of each ATS transfer, of each load circuit breaker operation, of each generator breaker opening after utility power returns, and of each generator shutdown.

3. Operator Settings Report: The Operator Settings Report shall contain a list of all settings and parameters that can be changed by the operator.

4. Factory Settings Report: The Factory Settings Report shall contain a list of all settings that are available in the factory (technician) setup screens.

K. Security: Operator screens shall be password protected, allowing different levels of system access. Standard access levels shall include View Only, Operator Access, Manager Access, and Technician Access. Each user shall be assigned a unique user name and password. Manager level access and above shall be allowed to add and remove users. Each user’s activity shall be logged. After a field-adjustable period of inactivity, users shall be automatically logged out.

2.3 METAL-ENCLOSED, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR (600 V AND LESS)

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.

B. Ratings: As indicated on drawings, suitable for application in three-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded neutral system. The integrated switchgear assembly shall withstand the effects of closing, carrying and interrupting currents up to the assigned maximum short circuit rating. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit conditions.



C. Isolated Paralleling Bus:

1. Phase-, Neutral-, and Ground-Bus Materials:

a. Phase and Neutral Bus: Copper, silver plated along entire length. b. Ground Bus: Copper, silver plated along entire length; minimum size 1/4 by

2 inches.

2. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are not permitted.

a. Uniform capacity for horizontal and vertical bus. b. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity. c. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-

circuit currents.

D. Switchgear Fabrication:

1. Each section shall contain one or more individual circuit breakers, or instrumentation compartments, and a rear compartment for the buses and outgoing cable connections

2. Rigid removable steel base channel shall be provided at the front and rear of each section .

3. Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.

4. Each circuit breaker shall be mounted in its own barriered compartment. 5. Door-Mounted Control Components: Industrial-type oiltight devices and digital-

display indicator lamps. 6. Operational buttons on the circuit breaker as well as the trip unit and the display

shall be accessible without opening the breaker compartment door. 7. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets,

supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections. Prepared spaces shall be totally complete, include the racking mechanism, bussing, and secondary contacts as necessary, so that a circuit breaker of the correct frame size can be installed with no modifications required.

8. Barriers separate bussing and cable compartment. 9. All bus joints shall consist of Grade 5 hardware and conical spring (e.g.

Belleville) washers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short circuits. All joints shall consist of a minimum of 2 bolts.

10. Control, Instrumentation and Communication Wiring: a. Wiring shall be factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and

protection. b. All control, instrumentation, and communications connections shall be

made from the front of the switchgear lineup. A dedicated wiring area accessible from the front shall allow easy access to all control or communications terminations



c. All control and instrumentation wire shall be type SIS. d. Dedicated conduit entry for control wires shall be provided at the top and

bottom of each section. e. All interconnections between sections at shipping splits shall use locking-

pull apart terminal blocks. f. All instrumentation and communication wiring shall be securely fastened to

the switchgear without the use of adhesive backed wire anchors. 11. Cable Compartment: All incoming or outgoing power conductors shall be routed

through this area. Feeder Breakers shall have adequate wire bending space regardless of the interrupting rating.

12. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly.

a. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.

b. Provide for future extensions from either end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.

13. Circuit-Breaker Terminals for Cable Connections: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped with pressure connectors for conductors.

E. Circuit Breakers: Comply with IEEE C37.13, IEEE C37.16, and IEEE C37.17.

1. Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

2. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features:

a. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.

3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with optional manual charging. 4. Circuit breakers shall be suitable for the required instantaneous rating without the

use of current limiting fuses. 5. Each Circuit breaker shall have built in contact temperature and contact wear

sensors. 6. Padlocking provisions shall be furnished to receive up to three padlocks when

circuit breaker is in the disconnected position, positively preventing unauthorized closing of the circuit breaker contacts. Provisions for up to two key locks shall be furnished allowing locking in the disconnected position.

7. Located on the face of each circuit breaker shall be buttons, with optional lockable clear cover, to open and close the circuit breaker and indicators to show the position of the circuit breaker contacts, status of the closing springs, and circuit breaker position in the cell. An indicator shall show “charged–not OK to close” if closing springs are charged but circuit breaker is not ready to close. Circuit breaker racking system must have positive stops at the connected, test, disconnected and withdrawn positions.



8. All circuit breakers shall have field interchangeable electrical accessories including shunt trip, spring release, electrical operator, auxiliary contacts, and Trip Unit.

9. Trip Devices:

a. Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, and a release mechanism.

b. All trip units shall be removable to allow for field upgrades. Trip Units shall incorporate “True RMS Sensing”, and have LED long-time pickup indications. All trip units shall have the option of turning instantaneously to the off position.

c. Electronic trip unit functions shall consist of adjustable long-time pickup and delay, short-time pickup and delay, instantaneous, and ground-fault pickup and delay. Adjustable long-time pickup (Ir) and delay shall be available in an adjustable rating plug that is UL Listed as field-replaceable. Adjustable rating plug shall allow for nine long-time pickup settings from 0.4 to 1 times the sensor plug (In). Other adjustable rating plugs shall be available for more precise settings to match the application. Long-time delay settings shall be in nine bands from 0.5–24 seconds at six times Ir. Short-time pickup shall allow for nine settings from 1.5 to 10 times Ir. Short-time delay shall be in nine bands from 0.1–0.4 I2 t ON and 0–0.4 I2 t OFF. Instantaneous settings on the trip units with LSI protection shall be available in nine bands from 2 to 15 times In.

d. Ground-fault protection shall be available for solidly grounded three-phase, four-wire systems. Trip unit shall be capable of the following types of ground-fault protection: residual, source ground return, and modified differential. Ground-fault sensing systems may be changed in the field. Ground-fault settings for circuit breaker sensor sizes 1200 A or below shall be in nine bands from 0.2 to 1.0 times In. The ground-fault settings for circuit breakers above 1200 A shall be nine bands from 500 to 1200 A.

e. Differential Ground Fault Protection: 480Y/277V 4-wire, connected equipment having multiple sources shall have a modified differential ground fault system (MDGF). The manufacturer shall complete the MDGF design prior to building equipment to ensure that the main or tie breakers operate properly during the following occurrences on the main bus: 1) Ensure the system will trip with the occurrence of a ground fault at

any location in the switchgear. 2) Ensure system will not trip without ground fault and with normal

current flow. 3) Ensure system will not trip due to large single-phase currents. 4) Ensure system will trip with combination of normal current flow and

ground fault current flowing together. 5) Ensure system will not trip with circulating currents through the

neutral due to multiple grounds and sources external to the immediate low voltage power sources.



6) The manufacturer shall be required to include additional CT’s, ground fault relays, interlocks, wiring, components etc. to insure the ground fault systems operates without nuisance tripping on the main bus of the switchgear.

f. All trip units shall have the capability for the adjustments to be set and read locally by rotating a switch.

g. Trip unit shall provide local trip indication. h. Trip units shall be capable of communicating on MODBUS ® networks. i. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from

minus 5 to plus 40 deg C. j. Time-Current Characteristics: Field adjustable. k. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors

on circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods.

10. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation. Each consists of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

11. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions.

a. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is closed.

b. Circuit breaker must be equipped with an interlock to discharge the stored energy spring before the circuit breaker can be withdrawn from its cell. Circuit breaker must provide a positive ground contact check between the circuit breaker and cell when the accessory cover is removed while the circuit breaker is in the connected, test or disconnected positions.

c. Circuit-Breaker Positioning:

1) An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed, unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield.

2) An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open.

3) Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

a) Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

b) Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.



12. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position; arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

13. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

a. Generator Paralleling Circuit Breakers: Interlocked with system control so that circuit breaker does not close unless mode selector switch is in "Auto" position and engine generator is synchronized with the isolated paralleling bus.

14. Electric Close Button: One for each electrically operated circuit breaker.

a. Generator Paralleling Circuit Breakers: Interlocked with system control so that circuit breaker does not close unless mode selector switch is in "Auto" position and engine generator is synchronized with the isolated paralleling bus.

15. Key Interlocks: Arranged so keys are attached at devices indicated. Mountings and hardware are included where future installation of key-interlock devices is indicated.

F. Instrumentation: 1. Instrumentation shall be provided as necessary for trip unit operation and for

complying with the requirements of the above section entitled “Multiple-Generator Paralleling Monitoring and Control System.”

2. Where additional space is required for instrumentation, CPT’s, metering, etc., a barriered instrumentation compartment shall be used.

3. The instrumentation compartment shall not inhibit the routing of control or communication wires.

4. Individual component mounting surfaces and pans in the instrument compartments shall be painted white as standard.

5. Instrument Transformers:

a. Comply with IEEE C57.13. b. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA

accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y. c. Current Transformers:

1) Burden and accuracy class suitable for connected trip units and controls.

2) Size for the maximum momentary current amperage based on calculation or the momentary rating of the circuit breaker protecting the conductor.

3) Include shorting-type terminal blocks.

G. Control Power Supply:



1. Control power transformer shall supply 120-V ac control circuits from the generator source through secondary disconnect devices.

2. Include a control power transformer for each generator paralleling switchgear circuit breaker connected to the generator side of the circuit breaker.

3. Include a control power transformer for each distribution paralleling switchgear circuit breaker.

4. Dry-type transformers shall be in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including primary and secondary fuses.

5. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses shall provide current-limiting and overload protection.

H. Identification: Comply with requirements in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification” for electrical identification devices and installation.

1. Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring. 2. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, applied to front of paralleling low-voltage

switchgear, arranged in one-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.

a. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in paralleling low-voltage switchgear sections to which applied, to produce a concise visual presentation of principal paralleling switchgear components and connections.

b. Medium: Painted graphics. 3. Provide Portable Generator Label per NEC.

I. Enclosure: NEMA 250 Type 12, painted steel.

1. Finish: Finish shall be ANSI 61 applied by an oven-cured, electrostatic powder-coating process after surface preparation. Surface preparation shall include cleaning / degreasing, rinsing, iron-phosphate spray coating, non-chemical sealant, and oven-drying.

2. Access: Fabricate enclosure with hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of paralleling low-voltage switchgear.

3. Features for Each Compartment or Group of Compartments: a. Thermostatically-controlled space heater operating at one-half or less of

rated voltage, sized to prevent condensation.

J. Accessories:

1. Tools for circuit-breaker and switchgear tests, inspections, maintenance, and operation.

2. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected positions.

3. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without removal from switchgear.



4. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, where paralleling low-voltage switchgear will be installed for compliance with installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions in NECA 400.

B. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install paralleling low-voltage switchgear on cast-in-place concrete equipment pad.

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from paralleling low-voltage switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

B. Diagrams and Instructions:

1. Mount permanent operating instructions at each transfer point, and at the system master control. Instructions shall include a one-line system drawing, description of the operating sequences of the system and the manual operation instructions for the panel where they are installed. A notice indicating location of the operation and maintenance manual shall be provided. A notice indicating service support information including supplier name, telephone numbers, and manufacturer’s contact information shall be provided on each major piece of equipment



2. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for paralleling low-voltage switchgear, including control and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.

3. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads.

4. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with grounding and bonding requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Comply with wire and cable requirements in Section 16120 "Wires and Cables (Under 600V)."

C. Provide control interconnection wiring and connect all control interconnections in strict compliance to the equipment manufacturers’ instructions.


A. Prior to acceptance testing, test insulation resistance of each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit (in compliance and under supervision of equipment manufacturer(s).) Test continuity of each circuit. Retain permanent records of this testing. 1. Inspect paralleling switchgear installation, including wiring, components,

connections, and equipment. 2. A factory-authorized and certified service technician shall inspect all control

wiring for type of wiring material and installation practice, verify that the wiring is properly installed by point to point testing, and complete installation and startup checks as required by the equipment manufacturer

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a. AC generators and emergency systems. b. Switchgear. c. Circuit breakers. d. Instrument transformers. e. Metering and instrumentation.



f. Ground-fault systems. g. Battery systems.

2. Inspect paralleling switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and equipment. Test and adjust components and equipment.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Perform NFPA 100 tests for Type 1 essential power systems.

C. Paralleling low-voltage switchgear will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Test sequence of operation step by step for each mode.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, electronic circuit-breaker trip characteristics according to results specified in Section 16055 "Power System Study."

B. Record all settings and provide in system operation and maintenance manuals .

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of paralleling low-voltage switchgear. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes. All equipment is to be thoroughly cleaned, with any shipping or installation damage repaired, prior to equipment commissioning and final test

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Equipment shall be protected from the environment in compliance to manufacturer’s recommendations. As a minimum, equipment shall be protected from moisture, dirt, and condensation.

B. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to paralleling low-voltage switchgear, according to manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when paralleling switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.



3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain paralleling low-voltage switchgear. A minimum of 40 hours of training shall be provided. Training shall be held on site and shall include classroom style and hands-on training.



PANELBOARDS 16440 - 1

SECTION 16440

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 2. Load centers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination

sizes, equipment features, and ratings. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:



1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing overcurrent protective devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.


A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above panelboards is complete.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation in the environment in which it will be installed.

B. Unusual Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, as follows : 1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be near salt water and sewer gases.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS


B. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12 indoors and in generator set enclosures.

E. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components.

F. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity, except load center buses may be aluminum.

a. Plating shall run entire length of bus. b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.

G. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating. 2. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if

required, for larger conductors. 3. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each

pole in the panelboard. 4. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type, with a lug on

the bar for each pole in the panelboard.

H. Future Devices: Panelboards shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.



2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 67 and UL 1449.

B. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

2.3 LOAD CENTERS

A. Comply with UL 67.

B. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

C. Doors: Concealed hinges secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

D. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads. b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

2. MCCB Features and Accessories: a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status. c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings. d. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor materials. e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application. f. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing with a single handle. g. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker

handle in on or off position.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases, and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC rating.



C. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with transparent plastic protective cover.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from all other circuits.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in NFPA 70.

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have been subjected to water saturation.

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices not already factory installed.

1. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars, and connections to separate ground bars.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Tags: Label each panelboard with a tag complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

D. Provide hazard labels as required by NEC.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS, Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING




SWITCHBOARDS 16441 - 1

SECTION 16441

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Product Data: For each switchboard, overcurrent protective device, surge protection device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component.

1. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective

devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


a. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.

b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

c. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchboards and connect factory-installed space heaters to temporary electrical service to prevent condensation.

C. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NEMA PB 2.1.


A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchboards, including clearances between equipment and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

C. Environmental Limitations: 1. Rate equipment for continuous operation in the environment in which it will be

installed, and under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.



D. Unusual Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, as follows: 1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be near salt water and sewer gases.

E. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written

permission. 4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate required modular building penetrations with building supplier, including floor penetrations and/or openings for conduits to stub-up into switchboards.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboard enclosures, buswork, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and factory installed interconnection wiring that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHBOARDS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain switchboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 891.

F. Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted. 2. Branch Devices: Group mounted. 3. Sections front and rear aligned.

G. Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 12, painted steel. 1. Finish: Factory-applied in manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-

inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each vertical section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above expected dew point.

2. Space-Heater Power Source: 120-V external branch circuit.

I. Pull Box on Top of Switchboard:

1. Adequate ventilation to maintain temperature in pull box within same limits as switchboard.

2. Removable covers shall form top, front, and sides. Top covers at rear shall be easily removable for drilling and cutting.

3. Bottom shall be insulating, fire-resistive material with separate holes for cable drops into switchboard.

4. Cable supports shall be arranged to facilitate cabling and adequate to support cables indicated, including those for future installation.

J. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide phase bus arrangement A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, and left to right when viewed from the front of the switchboard.

2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, silver-plated.

3. Copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.



4. Ground Bus: Minimum-size required by UL 891, hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors.

5. Main-Phase Buses and Equipment-Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections.

6. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated, equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables.

K. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

L. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and other components including instruments and instrument transformers.

2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) – Feeder Breakers: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: 100 percent rated. Provide all feeder breakers with electronic trip units.

2. Electronic trip circuit breakers with RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long and short time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

3. MCCB Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and

conductor material. c. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with

adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

d. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

e. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.



B. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB) – Main Breakers: 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.

1. Fixed circuit-breaker mounting. 2. Two-step, stored-energy closing. 3. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug,

trip indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip. b. Time adjustments for long- and short-time pickup. c. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.

5. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

6. Control Voltage: 120-V ac. 7. Differential Ground Fault Protection: 480Y/277V 4-wire, connected equipment

having multiple sources shall have a modified differential ground fault system (MDGF). The manufacturer shall complete the MDGF design prior to building equipment to ensure that the main breakers operate properly during the following occurrences on the main bus: a. Ensure the system will trip with the occurrence of a ground fault at any

location in the switchgear. b. Ensure system will not trip without ground fault and with normal current

flow. c. Ensure system will not trip due to large single-phase currents. d. Ensure system will trip with combination of normal current flow and

ground fault current flowing together. e. Ensure system will not trip with circulating currents through the neutral due

to multiple grounds and sources external to the immediate low voltage power sources.

8. The manufacturer shall be required to include additional CT’s, ground fault relays, interlocks, wiring, components etc. to insure the ground fault systems operates without nuisance tripping on the main bus of the switchgear.

2.3 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrumentation shall be provided as necessary for trip unit operation

B. Instrument Transformers: NEMA EI 21.1.

1. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect secondary wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide



selective tripping of main circuit breakers. Coordinate with feeder circuit-breaker, ground-fault protection.

2.4 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied from remote branch circuit.

B. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification” for electrical identification devices and installation. Identify equipment, main breakers, and feeder breakers.

B. Provide Portable Generator Label per NEC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.

1. Lift or move switchboards with spreader bars and manufacturer-supplied lifting straps following manufacturer's instructions.

2. Use rollers, slings, or other manufacturer-approved methods if lifting straps are not furnished.

3. Protect from moisture, dust, dirt, and debris during storage and installation. 4. Install temporary heating during storage per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work or that affect the performance of the equipment.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboard on concrete pad

1. Install conduits entering underneath the switchboard, entering under the vertical section where the conductors will terminate. Extend 2 inches above concrete pad after switchboard is anchored in place.

2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, straps and brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Operating Instructions: Mount the printed basic operating instructions for switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures. Cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on inside door of switchboard.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

F. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Support and secure conductors within the switchboard according to NFPA 70.

B. Extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16195 "Electrical Identification."





1. Acceptance Testing:

a. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Open control and metering circuits within the switchboard, and remove neutral connection to surge protection and other electronic devices prior to insulation test. Reconnect after test.

b. Test continuity of each circuit. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Correct malfunctioning units on-site where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

B. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING


B. Set field-adjustable, electronic circuit-breaker trip characteristics according to results specified in Section 16055 "Power System Study."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards and overcurrent protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories.


LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 16460 - 1

SECTION 16460

LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for equipment, including clearances between equipment and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

B. Environmental Limitations:



1. Rate equipment for continuous operation in the environment in which it will be installed, and under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.

C. Unusual Service Conditions: NEMA PB 2, as follows: 1. Corrosive Atmosphere: Equipment will be near salt water and sewer gases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.


C. Efficiency: Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type. 2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Ventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound to seal out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

D. Taps: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps below normal full capacity.



E. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of 80-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

F. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 16195 " Electrical Identification."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.01 and IEEE C57.12.91.

1. Resistance measurements of all windings at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections.

2. Ratio tests at the rated voltage connections and at all tap connections. 3. Phase relation and polarity tests at the rated voltage connections. 4. No load losses, and excitation current and rated voltage at the rated voltage

connections. 5. Impedance and load losses at rated current and rated frequency at the rated

voltage connections. 6. Applied and induced tensile tests. 7. Regulation and efficiency at rated load and voltage. 8. Insulation Resistance Tests:

a. High-voltage to ground. b. Low-voltage to ground. c. High-voltage to low-voltage.

9. Temperature tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with ambient-temperature requirements for each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.



C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install transformers level and plumb with vibration-dampening supports.

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounted transformers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

C. Secure transformer to concrete base according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce noise generation.

E. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Wires and Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS for dry-type, air-cooled, low-voltage transformers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals. Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 5 percent and not being lower than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap settings as test results.

B. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



FUSES 16491 - 1

SECTION 16491

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Cartridge fuses rated 600 V and less for use in switches, controllers, and motor-control centers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings.

2. Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. 3. Time-current curves, coordination charts and tables, and related data.

B. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

1. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

2. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.


FUSES 16491 - 2

C. Comply with NEMA FU 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.

B. For use in power circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

C. For use in Control Panels: Class CC, time delay.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

B. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing fuse.


FUSES 16491 - 3

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch.



FUSES 16491 - 4



LIGHTING 16510-1

SECTION 16510

LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Luminaries and accessories. B. Ballasts. C. Lamps. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide for each pole, light fixture, lamp, ballast, battery, and accessory. Include the following at a minimum:

1. Arrange in order of designation. 2. Include lamp characteristics, including type, size, ANSI designation, lumen

output, CRI, predicted lamp life, etc. 3. Include ballast characteristics, including type, input watts, operation amps,

ballast factor, etc. 4. Include LED data, including lumen output, color temperature, CRI, and

power consumption. 5. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 6. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaire. 7. Means of attaching luminaires to supports and indication that the attachment

is suitable for components involved. B. Shop Drawings: At a minimum, provide the following documentation: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT

A. Submit product data, shop drawings, and manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions for each product.


LIGHTING 16510-2

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project. Use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.


A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

B. Each LED luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

C. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in

this section with minimum five (5) years documented experience. 1.6 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide ten-percent spare fluorescent lamps. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturers' laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINARES


LIGHTING 16510-3

A. Furnish Products as indicated in the Fixture Schedule, including all mounting components for a complete and safe installation.


C. Emergency lighting units shall comply with UL924.

D. LED fixtures shall have a minimum efficacy of 100 lumens per watt.

E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during re-lamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Luminary Mounting Hardware or Bracket: Provide, in base bid, luminary manufactured components, as required, intended for the mounting application, whether specified or inadvertently omitted in these specifications and plans.

2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.

B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time delay.

2.4 BALLASTS AND LAMPS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT FIXTURES

A. General: 1. Comply with UL935 and ANSI C82.11. 2. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output. 3. THD Rating: Less than 10 percent. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A

or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 42kHz or higher. 7. Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. Ballast Factor: 0.88 or higher.


LIGHTING 16510-4

9. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Lamps: T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32-W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2850 initial lumens (minimum), CRI of 80 (minimum), color temperature of 3500K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated

2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING


B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Self-contained units listed for installation in the environment in which they will be installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire electrical conduit to verify actual locations of conduit connections before luminaire installation.

C. Examine structure for suitable conditions where luminaires will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.


LIGHTING 16510-5

C. Install surface mounted luminaries and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement at indicated mounting height.

D. Install lamps in each luminaire.

E. Provide supports that are sized and rated for luminaires and able to maintain luminaire position.

F. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with finished grade unless otherwise indicated.

G. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.

H. Aluminum Fixtures: Do not install in contact with concrete or masonry. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

I. Emergency Lighting: Support to structure with supports sized for combined weight of fixture and battery.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and

components.

A. Operate each luminary after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection, grounding and operation. Correct condition as necessary for proper installation and operation at final acceptance of project. Lamps, which fail during one (1) year warranty period, shall be replaced by Contractor at no added cost to the Owner.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose.

B. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.



LIGHTING 16510-6



ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS 16902 - 1

SECTION 16902

ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pushbutton and selector switches. B. Pilot Lights. C. Relays. D. Time delay relays. E. Control power transformers. F. Control panel wiring and devices. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 16160 - Control panel enclosures.

1.3 REFERENCES A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and

Assemblies. C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. D. NEMA ST 1 - Standard for Specialty Transformers (Except General Purpose

Type.) E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit to NEMA ICS 1 indicating control panel layouts, wiring

connections and diagrams, dimensions, support points, ladder diagram line



number designation, relay contact type and number of ladder line where contact is located.

C. Product Data: Provide for each component showing electrical characteristics and

connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include instructions for storage,

handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up of Product.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE / QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project.

1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish components of product listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PUSHBUTTONS AND SELECTOR SWITCHES

A. General: NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, UL 508. Heavy-duty, die-cast metal construction, IP65, 30.5mm devices. For the Fuel Valve Control Panel, 22.5mm devices will be considered if there is insufficient mounting space for 30.5mm devices.

B. Standard Pushbuttons: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, momentary type, non-illuminated, with guard to prevent inadvertent operation.

C. Emergency Stop Pushbuttons: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, maintained, push-pull type, red metal mushroom head, non-illuminated, with clear, hinged cover to prevent inadvertent operation.

D. Selector Switches: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, two- or three-position rotary selector switch (as indicated on drawings), non-illuminated, standard knob operator.



E. Pilot Indicator Lights: Unless otherwise noted on drawings, full voltage, LED type.

F. Contact Blocks: NEMA ICS 2, Form C, rated 600-volts.

G. Basis of Design: Allen Bradley 800 series.

2.2 CONTROL RELAYS

A. General: Except as otherwise noted on drawings or specified, control relays shall be UL listed, NEMA ICS 2, electromechanical type and shall meet the requirements of this paragraph.

B. General Purpose: General purpose relay with manual override, and LED pilot indicator. Contacts shall be rated a minimum of 5-amps at 120-volts AC.

C. Interposing: Octal-type plug termination, manual override, internal indicator lamp, and silver-cadmium oxide contacts rated for 10 amps at 120-volts AC. Basis of Design: Potter & Brumfield KRPA-11AN-120V with No. 27E122 base.

D. Time Delay: Solid state time delay relay with time delay after energization or de-energization as indicated on drawings.

C. Contacts: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, Form C, DPDT. Where required

by control schemes, relays shall be 4PDT. D. Contact Ratings: Class A600. 2.3 CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS B. Description: NEMA ST 1, machine tool transformer with isolated secondary

winding. C. Power Rating: Standard VA rating, unless capacity indicated otherwise on the

drawings. D. Voltage Rating: As indicated on the electrical schematic diagram. E. Fuses: Provide primary and secondary fuses. 2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. UL489, miniature type for breakers rated 10A and larger or serving control power transformers; UL1077 for supplementary breakers rated under 10-amps, having a



UL489 circuit breaker upstream within the same control panel, and serving loads within the control panel.

2.5 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal blocks shall comply with NEMA ICS 4 and UL 1059. Terminal blocks

for conductors and cables exiting control panels shall be two-way type with double terminals, one for internal wiring connections and the other for external wiring connections. Terminal blocks shall be made of bakelite or other suitable insulating material with full deep barriers between each pair of terminals. A terminal identification strip shall form part of the terminal block and each terminal shall be identified by a number in accordance with the numbering scheme on the approved wiring diagrams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTROL WIRING AND INSTALLATION

A. Install components (products) in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install cabinets under the provisions of Section 16160.

C. Install all associated wiring appurtenances such as wireways, equipment fasteners, wire, straps, markers and lugs.

D. Run all wiring in plastic wireway and suitably harnessed to components where wireways are not used. Conductors shall be bundled to keep them in place. All wiring leaving from a bundle to a device shall be serviced looped.

E. Tag all wiring with numbers. Tagging shall be done with slip-on sleeve wire markers. Wrap around tape will not be acceptable. Tags shall match wire size. All markers shall read “left to right” or “top to bottom”.

F. Connect all control wiring from external devices to terminal blocks. Terminate all wiring with spade crimp on connectors, if the terminal is not equipped with saddle straps or equivalent means of retaining strands. Install crimp-on connectors following manufacturer’s recommendations with a ratchet type tool. Plier type shall not be acceptable. Install no more than two wires per block or pole. Do not splice wires.

G. Separate Class 1 and Class 2 control circuits. Class 1, 120-volt circuits shall not be routed in the same conduit as low-voltage, Class 2 circuits. Shielded cables shall not be routed in the same conduit as power circuits or AC control circuits.



H. Remove sharp edges, burrs, rough surfaces or threads from conduit fittings, raceways, or any other parts, which may come into contact with cable jackets or conductor insulation. Where necessary, additional protection consisting of a flame retardant, oil resistant insulating materials shall be provided to protect conductors and cables.

I. Test each circuit for continuity, short circuits and ground faults when all wiring of the electrical system is complete. After circuit testing is completed, perform functional testing of the control panel components as a system to confirm operation and make calibration adjustments as necessary. Provide temporary power and/or instrument quality air supply required by the panel drawings. Provide temporary wiring as required for the system test and calibration, consisting of toggle switches, test lights, potentiometers, etc. which will be connected to the control panel field terminal blocks.


CITY OF KENNER OF KENNER WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT NO. 3 GENERATOR BANKING PROFESSIONAL SEALS...

Documents

Transcript of CITY OF KENNER OF KENNER WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT NO. 3 GENERATOR BANKING PROFESSIONAL SEALS...